Skip to main content

Full text of "Brother HL-2600cn Service Manual"

See other formats


brother. 



Brother Color Laser Printer 

SERVICE MANUAL 



MODEL: HL-2600CN 




Read this manual thoroughly before maintenance work. 

Keep this manual in a convenient place for quick and easy reference at all times. 



October 2001 
SM-PRN023 



© Copyright Brother 2001 

All rights reserved. 

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means without permission in 

writing from the publisher. 

Specifications are subject to change without notice. 

Trademarks: 

The brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd. 

Apple, the Apple Logo, and Macintosh are trademarks, registered in the United States and other 

countries, and True Type is a trademark of Apple computer, Inc. 

Epson is a registered trademark and FX-80 and FX-850 are trademarks of Seiko Epson 

Corporation. 

Hewlett Packard is a registered trademark and HP Laser Jet is a trademark of Hewlett Packard 

Company. 

IBM, IBM PC and Proprinter are registered trademarks of International Business Machines 

Corporation. 

Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. 

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. 



PREFACE 

This service manual contains basic information required for after-sales service of the color laser 
printer (here-in-after referred to as "this machine" or "the printer"). This information is vital to the 
service technician to maintain the high printing quality and performance of the printer. 

This service manual covers the HL-2600CN color laser printer. 

This manual consists of the following chapters: 



CHAPTER I 



OUTLINE OF PRODUCT 

Features, parts names, internal structure, and description of the control panel. 

SPECIFICATIONS 

Specifications, etc. 

INSTALLATION 

Installation conditions and installation procedures. 

STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

Basic operation of the mechanical system, the electrical system and the electrical 
circuits and their timing information. 

CONTROL PANEL OPERATION 

Operation and setting procedures on the control panel. 

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 

Description of periodic maintenance parts, and procedures for periodic 
replacement and cleaning. 

DISASSEMBLY 

Procedures for replacement of the mechanical system parts. 

TROUBLESHOOTING 

Description of error messages on the control panel, troubleshooting image 
failure, etc. 

APPENDICES :SERIAL NO. DESCRIPTIONS, ETC. 



CHAPTER II 



CHAPTER III 



CHAPTER IV 



CHAPTER V 



CHAPTER VI 



CHAPTER VII 



CHAPTER VIM 



Information in this manual is subject to change due to improvement or re-design of the product. All 
relevant information in such cases will be supplied in service information bulletins (Technical 
Information). 

A thorough understanding of this printer, based on information in this service manual and service 
information bulletins, is required for maintaining its print quality performance and for improving the 
practical ability to find the cause of problems. 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTER I PRODUCT OUTLINE 1-1 

1. FEATURES 1-1 

2. PARTS NAMES & FUNCTIONS I-4 

3. INTERNAL STRUCTURE I-6 

4. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PANEL I-7 

4.1 Video Controller Mode I-7 

4.2 Engine Controller Mode I-7 

CHAPTER II SPECIFICATIONS 11-1 

1. RATING 11-1 

2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS II-2 

2.1. Printing II-2 

2.2. Functions II-3 

2.3. Electrical and Mechanical II-3 

2.4. Network II-4 

2.5. Paper Specification II-5 

3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION II-9 

3.1 Ambient Temperature / Humidity /Altitude II-9 

CHAPTER III INSTALLATION 111-1 



1. CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION I 

1.1. Environmental Conditions 

1 .2. Basic Layout of Printer Set-up Location 

2. UNPACKING I 

2.1 Unpacking of Printer 

2.2 Unpack the Starter Kit 

3. INSTALLATION WORK I 

3.1 Install the Fuser Cleaner and Oil Bottle 

3.2 Install the OPC Belt Cartridge 

3.3 Install the Toner Cartridge to the Printer 

3.4 Test Print 



1-1 
11-1 
11-1 

I-2 

II-2 
II-4 

I-5 

II-5 
II-6 
II-8 
II-9 



CHAPTER IV STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS IV-1 

1. BASIC STRUCTURE IV-1 

1 .1 Print System and Transfer System IV-6 

1 .2 Scanning System IV-21 

1 .3 Paper Transportation System IV-23 

1.4 Fusing Unit IV-25 



2. STRUCTURE OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM IV-27 

2.1 Basic Structure IV-27 

2.2 Control System IV-34 

2.3 Main PCB (Video Controller PCB) IV-42 

2.4 Power Supply Unit IV-56 

2.5 High Voltage Power Supply Unit IV-60 

2.6 Wiring Diagram IV-63 

CHAPTER V CONTROL PANEL OPERATION V-1 

1. PANEL LAYOUT V-1 

2. VIDEO CONTROLLER MODE V-2 

2.1 Configuration of Operational Mode V-2 

2.2 Line Test Mode V-3 

2.3 DRAM Test Mode V-7 

2.4 Test Print Mode V-8 

2.5 NVRAM Reset Mode V-8 

3. ENGINE CONTROLLER MODE V-9 

3.1 Configuration of Operational Mode V-9 

3.2 Operation of Normal Mode V-1 1 

3.3 Service Mode V-1 8 

3.4 Adjustment Work Procedures V-41 

CHAPTER VI PERIODIC MAINTENANCE VM 

1. GENERAL VI-1 

1.1 Handling Precautions VI-1 

1.2 Periodic Maintenance Cleaning VI-4 

1.3 Periodic Maintenance Parts and Maintenance Cycle VI-1 7 

2. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES VI-20 

2.1 OPC Belt Cartridge Replacement VI-20 

2.2 Fusing Unit Replacement VI-23 

2.3 Transfer Roller 2 Replacement VI-27 

2.4 Paper Discharger Unit Replacement VI-30 

2.5 Drum Cleaner 2 Replacement VI-32 

2.6 Ozone Filter Replacement VI-35 

2.7 Paper Pick-up Roller and Separator Pad 2 Replacement VI-36 

2.8 Transfer Drum 2 Replacement VI-37 



CHAPTER VII DISASSEMBLY VIM 

1. BEFORE STARTING DISASSEMBLY VII-1 

1.1 Precautions VII-1 

1 .2 Preparation of Disassembly VII-1 

2. PARTS NAME VII-3 

2.1 Cover VII-3 

2.2 Circuit Boards (PCBs) VII-4 

2.3 Motor Units VII-4 

2.4 Clutches and Solenoids VII-5 

2.5 Sensors VII-5 

3. DISASSEMBLY FLOW VII-6 

4. DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE VII-7 

4.1 Top of the Printer VII-7 

4.2 Right Side of the Printer VII-20 

4.3 Left Side of the Printer VII-32 

4.4 Paper Exit Unit VII-49 

4.5 Front of the Printer VII-56 

4.6 Rear of the Printer VII-63 

4.7 Fusing Unit VII-68 

CHAPTER VIII TROUBLESHOOTING VIII-1 

1. OUTLINE OF TROUBLESHOOTING VIII-2 

2. OPERATOR CALL VIII-3 

2.1 Video Controller Mode VIII-3 

2.2 Engine Controller Mode VIII-6 

3. PAPER TRANSPORT ERROR VIII-8 

3.1 Feed Jam VIII-8 

3.2 Inner Jam VIII-9 

3.3 Outer Jam VIII-9 

3.4 Others VIII-9 

4. SERVICE CALL VIII-10 

4.1 Video Controller Mode VIII-1 1 

4.2 Engine Controller Mode VIII-1 5 

5. IMAGE FAILURE VIII-43 

APPENDIX A A-1 



REGULATIONS 



LASER SAFETY (FOR 110-120 V MODEL ONLY) 

This printer is certified as a Class I laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and 
Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation 
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the printer does not produce 
hazardous laser radiation. 

Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings 
and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of 
user operation. 

FDA REGULATIONS (FOR 110-120 V MODEL ONLY) 

U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has implemented regulations for laser products 
manufactured on and after August 2, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products 
marketed in the United States. One of the following labels on the back of the printer 
indicates compliance with the FDA regulations and must be attached to laser products 
marketed in the United States. 

Caution 

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in 
this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. 



IEC 60825 SPECIFICATION (FOR 220-240 V MODEL ONLY) 

This printer is a Class 1 laser product as defined in IEC 60825 specifications. The label 
shown below is attached in countries where required. 




This printer has a Class 3B Laser Diode which emits invisible laser radiation in the Scanner 
Unit. The Scanner Unit should not be opened under any circumstances. 

Caution 

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in 
this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. 

The following caution label is attached near the scanner unit. 




5mW 
780nm-800nm 



DANGER- INVISIBLE LASER radiation when open. 
AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. 

VORSICHT-UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG 
GEOFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG 
UBERBRUCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. 

DANGER- RAYON LASER INVISIBLE LORS DE LOUVER TURE. 

EVITER L'EXPOSITION DIRECTE. 
PELIGRO- RADIACION LASER INVISIBLE AL ABRIR. EVITAR 

LA EXPOSICION DIRECTA AL HAZ. 

In" |5£ H I** t * I/— !f ttWOfeRfc* u . 

tf-Alcm&3£b&^J;5lcaEl;LTT£Uo MAS 



For Finland and Sweden 

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE 

KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT 

Varoitus! Laitteen kayttaminen muulla kuin tassa kayttoohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa 
altistaa kayttajan turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittavalle nakymattomalle lasersateilylle. 

Varning - Om apparaten anvands pa annat satt an i denna Bruksanvisning specificerats, 
kan anvandaren utsattas for osynlig laserstralning, som overskrider gransen for laserklass 
1. 



SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 



SAFETY PRINCIPLE 



1) Before starting any operations, read this manual thoroughly. Especially read the safety 
instructions in this section carefully and ensure that you understand the contents. 

2) Perform all the operations by following the procedures described in this manual. Follow all the 
cautions and warnings set out in the procedures and on safety labels affixed to the machine. 
Failure to do so may result in human injury or equipment damage. 

3) Perform only the procedures explained in this manual. Refrain from opening or touching any 
portions that are not related to your required operation(s). 

4) Repair and replacement of parts should be performed by trained and qualified persons only. 
Operators should not attempt to do such repair or replacement work. 

5) It must be appreciated that the above-mentioned cautions and warnings do not cover 
everything because it is impossible to evaluate all the circumstances of repair situations. 

SPECIAL SAFETY INFORMATION 

Introductory Information 

Cautions and warnings are made clear by following the 'Safety Alert Symbols' or 'Signal 
Words' such as DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION. 

<SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL> 

This is the safety alert. When you find this symbol placed on the equipment or marked in 
this manual, be aware of the potential of human injuries. Follow the recommended 
precautions and safety operation practices. 

Understanding Signal Words> 

DANGER is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will cause severe human 
injuries or a fatal accident if the warning is ignored. 

WARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard or unsafe practices which may 
cause severe human injuries or a fatal accident if the warning is ignored. 

CAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard or unsafe practices which may 
cause minor human injuries if the warning is ignored. CAUTION also calls your attention to 
safety messages in this manual. 

<Follow Safely lnstructions> 

Carefully read all the safety messages set out in this manual and also in the safety warning 
signs placed on the equipment. In this manual, the safety instructions (safety alert symbols 
and signal words) are enclosed in a rectangular enclosure to bring them to your attention. 
Keep the safety signs on the equipment in good condition and ensure none are missing or 
damaged. Replace the safety signs if unreadable or damaged. Learn how to operate the 
equipment and how to use the controls properly. Do not let anyone operate this equipment 
without following the instructions. Keep the equipment in proper working condition. 
Unauthorized modification to the equipment may impair the function & safety and affect the 
life of the equipment. 

Listed below are the various kinds of "WARNING" messages contained in this manual. 

<Caution for the battery> 

There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. 

Do not replace the battery. 

Do not disassemble, recharge or dispose of in fire. 

Used battery should be disposed of according to local regulations. 



A\WARNING 

HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 



May cause serious injuries or fatal accidents. Voltage is now applied from 
the power supply of printer. There is a danger of electrical shock if you 
touch the active area inside the printer. 

Be sure to turn the power supply switch OFF and pull the plug out from the 
power outlet before starting maintenance work on the printer. 



A' 



^WARNING 

HARMFUL OZONE GAS 

Inhalation of an excessive amount of ozone gas may adversely affect the 
respiratory organs. 

An Ozone Filter is fitted to this printer to reduce the exhausted ozone. This 
filter must be replaced with a new filter periodically in accordance with the 
manual supplied with the printer. 

A\WARNING 

HOT SURFACE 

The Fusing Unit reaches a temperature of approx. 170 V and adjacent 
parts are also very hot. 

When you need to change the cleaning pad or remove jammed paper, wait 
about 20 minutes after opening the paper exit unit to allow the unit to cool 
down. 



A\CAUTION 

ROTATING PARTS 



Be aware of the potential danger of various rollers and take care not to get 
your fingers or hand caught into the machine, this can cause serious 
injuries. Note that the exit roller that ejects the printed paper is rotating 
while printing. 

Be careful not to get your hair, fingers, hands, sleeve or necktie caught in 
the machine while operating the machine. 



IV 



A\CAUTION 

HAZARDOUS POWDER 



Toner is a fine powder which can cause a powder explosion if disposed of 
into a fire. Under no circumstances dispose of toner into a fire. 



A- 



f j\CAUTION 

HAZARDOUS POWDER 

Toner is a fine powder which may cause irritation to the eyes and 
respiratory organs if inhaled. 

Handle the toner cartridge, waste toner pack and developing unit carefully 
so as not to spill the toner. 



/KCAUTION 

POWER CORDS & PLUGS 



This printer is equipped with a 3-wire power cord fitted with a 3-pronged 
plug (bi-polar plug with grounding) for the user's safety. 

Use these power cords in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical 
outlet to avoid an electrical shock. 



A\CAUTION 

SAFETY INTERLOCK 



The front cover, paper exit unit and transfer unit of this printer have 
electrical safety interlocks to turn the power off whenever they are opened. 
Do not attempt to circumvent these safety interlocks. 



A 



CAUTION 

Do not lean against or apply any excessive force to the paper cassette, 
open cover of Duplex unit. Otherwise it may cause the product to decline 
or fall down and result in the injuries. 




VI 



<Label Location> 




1 . Hot Caution Label 



170°C/338°F A 



2. Laser Caution Label 




5mW 
780nm-800nm 



DANGER- 
VORSICHT- 

DANGER- 
PELIGRO- 



UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG 
GEOFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG 
UBERBRUCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. 



ffl ate t * v— !f«E*t©j&&* y . 

£-AlcBglafcb&UJ;5IC;±;iUTT;5lV MAS 



VII 



3. Rating Label 



(For US) 



[brother 

MODEL HL-2600CN 


A 


SER.NO 


Brother printer HL series coverd by one 

or more following patents: USP4.96S.159 / USP5.050,Z2B 

USP5.068,6O5/USP5.OB6,481 fUSP5,0S3,904 


MANUFACTURED: HTJ 




120V ~~ S0/6OHZ 11.0A 


cCyOus ™ 

■ WKn E153322 

LISTED 


BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. made in japan 
15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561 , Japan. 
This product complies with FDA radiation performance 
standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J. 


■A, ,._ „ . me Class BtSgltal apparatus compltes 

CP T «t«i TO Comply ^ CanaJianlceSflOa 

ITSSf Mh FCC Standards. c« apparel. nuittfiqiK. M la class* B 

est oonfor™ s la norms MMB-003 du 

FOR HOME OH OFFICE USE Canada. ® 7 



(For Europe) 



(brother 

MODEL HL-2600CN 






\ 


SER.NO 

220- 240V ~ 50/OOHz 6.0A 






■ CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT ■ 
1 APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 1 
| LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUCT | 




BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. made in japan 






a 


-*sdfiS 


01 ACN 001 393 835^ 


v 






^ J 



(Jam label) 




VIM 



SHIPMENT OF THE PRINTER 

If for any reason you must ship the printer, carefully package the printer to avoid any 
damage during transit. It is recommended that you save and use the original packaging. 
The printer should also be adequately insured with the carrier. 



A\CAUTION 



When shipping the printer, remove the toner cartridges, the OPC belt 
cartridge and the waste toner pack from the printer to prevent toner spill 
in the printer or damage of the toner cartridge and the OPC belt 
cartridge. 

When shipping the printer, remove the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner 
from the fusing unit. After removing the oil bottle, be sure to remove the 
oil remaining in the fusing unit with the supplied syringe. Failure to do so 
will cause severe damage to the printer. 




IX 



CHAPTER I 

PRODUCT OUTLINE 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTER I PRODUCT OUTLINE 1-1 

1. FEATURES 1-1 

2. PARTS NAMES & FUNCTIONS I-4 

3. INTERNAL STRUCTURE I-6 

4. DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PANEL I-7 

4.1 Video Controller Mode I-7 

4.2 Engine Controller Mode I-7 



CHAPTER I PRODUCT OUTLINE 

1. FEATURES 

This printer has the following features: 

2400 x 600 dpi Class Resolution 

The printer prints pages with a resolution of 600 dots per inch (dpi) as 
default. It also provides higher quality printout which is the equivalent 
of 2400 x 600 dpi resolution when using HRC or CAPT. 

High Speed Color Laser Printing 

The printer allows crisp printing in 24 bit brilliant color. The printer 
prints at a speed of 24 pages per minute in monochrome mode and 6 
pages per minute in full color mode. The controller utilizes a high 
speed 32-bit RISC microprocessor and special hardware chips, which 
provides a very fast processing speed. 

High Resolution Control (HRC) 

The high resolution control (HRC) technology provides clear and crisp 
printouts and improves even the 600 dpi resolution. This mode is 
effective when printing text data. 

Color Advanced Photoscale Technology (CAPT) 

The printer can print graphics in 256 shades for each color in HP® 
color printer PCL5C™ and BR-Script 3 emulations, producing nearly 
photographic quality. This mode is effective when printing 
photographic images. 

Maintenance-Free Toner Cartridge 

A toner cartridge can print up to 12,000 (Black) and 7,200 (Cyan, 
Magenta and Yellow) single-sided pages at 5% coverage. The one 
piece, easy-to-replace toner cartridges do not require difficult 
maintenance. 

Universal Media Cassette 

This printer loads paper automatically from the media cassette. Since 
the media cassette is a universal type, a number of different sizes of 
paper can be used. Even envelopes can be loaded from the media 
cassette. 



1-1 



Three Interfaces 

This printer has a high speed, bi-directional parallel interface, USB 
and Ethernet 10/100BaseTX. 

If your application software supports the bi-directional parallel 
interface, you can monitor the printer status. It is fully compatible with 
the industry-standard bi-directional parallel interface. 

The Brother network board (NC-4100h) is factory installed in the HL- 
2600CN, which enables you to use this printer in the TCP/IP, 
IPS/SPX, Apple Talk, DLC/LLC, Banyan VINES, DEC LAT and 
NetBEUI environments. Also, many useful utilities, such as BRAdmin 
Professional for the administrator and Brother network printing 
software, are included in the CD-ROM supplied with the HL-2600CN 
printer. For setup, see the Network User's Guide. 

Automatic Interface Selection 

The printer can automatically select the bi-directional parallel, USB, 
NETWORK depending on the interface port through which it receives 
data. With this feature, the printer can be connected to more than one 
computer. 

Five Emulation Modes 

The printer can emulate Hewlett-Packard Color PCL® 5C (PCL6® in 
monochrome mode) and PostScript® 3 language emulation (Brother 
BR-Script 3) printers, the industry-standard HP-GL™ plotter as well 
as EPSON® FX-850™, and IBM® Proprinter XL® printers (in 
monochrome mode). It is possible to print with all application 
programs that support one of these printers. 

Automatic Emulation Selection 

The printer can automatically select the printer emulation mode 
depending on the print commands it receives from the computer 
software. With this feature, many users can share the printer on a 
network. 

Data Compression Technology 

The printer can internally compress the received graphics and font 
data in its memory so that it can print larger graphics and more fonts 
without additional memory. 



I-2 



Various Fonts 



The printer has 66 scalable and 12 bitmapped fonts. The fonts that 
can be used will vary according to the selected emulation mode. 

In PCL mode, you can also print the 13 kinds of bar codes listed 
below. In BR-Script mode, the printer has 165 scalable fonts. 

< Bar Code Printing > 

This printer can print the following 13 types of bar codes: 



Code 39 

Interleaved 2 of 5 

EAN-8 

EAN-13 

EAN-128 

Code 128 

UPC-A 



UPC-E 

Codabar 

FIM (US-PostNet) 

Post Net (US-PostNet) 

ISBN (EAN) 

ISBN (UPC-E) 



CCITT G3/G4 



Lock Panel 



Since the printer supports the CCITT G3/G4 format in addition to HP- 
compatible formats, it can quickly receive and print data compressed 
in this format. 



If the panel button settings have been changed, the printer may not 
work as expected. It is possible for the administrator of the printer to 
lock the settings to prevent changes from being made. 

Power Save Mode 

The printer has a power saving mode. As laser printers consume 
power to keep the fixing assembly at a high temperature, this feature 
can save electricity when the printer is on but not being used. The 
factory setting of the Power Save mode is ON so that it complies with 
the EPA Energy Star new specification. Compared with conventional 
laser printers, this printer consumes less power even when the power 
saving mode is turned off. 

The printer has an economical toner save mode. This mode allows 
you to reduce the printer running cost substantially in addition to the 
improved life expectancy of the toner cartridge. 

A touch of a panel button allows reprinting of the last print job without 
sending the data again from the computer. When there is not enough 
memory to print the last complete job out, the last print page can be 
reprinted. 

Saving User Settings 

It is possible to operate the printer differently from other users with the 
panel button settings. One set of user settings can be stored. 



Toner Save Mode 



Reprint Function 



I-3 



2. PARTS NAMES & FUNCTIONS 



<Front View> 



10. Paper stopper A 



2. Control Panel 



1 . Top Cover ASSY 2 
1 1 . Paper stopper 

5. Power Button 




Media Cassette 



3. Front Cover 2 



Fig.1-1 



<Rear View> 



Paper Exit Unit Cover 2 




8. Controller Box 



6. Power Inlet 



7. Rear Access Cover 
4. Paper Exit Unit 



Fig.1-2 



I-4 



No. 


Part Name 


Outline of Functions 


1 


Top Cover ASSY 2 


To act as an upper enclosure and also as a 
paper tray for printed paper. 


2 


Control Panel 


To display the status of printer operation. 


3 


Front Cover 2 


To act as a front enclosure, opened when 
replacing a toner cartridge or waste toner pack. 


4 


Paper Exit Unit 


To exit a printed paper onto a top cover ASSY 2, 
acting also as paper tray for printed paper. 

To be opened when replacing an OPC belt 
cartridge. 


5 


Power Button 


To operate power-on and off to the printer. 
(Push for On/Off operation) 


6 


Power Inlet 


To connect a power supply cable. 


7 


Rear Access Cover 


To act as a rear enclosure, opened when 
clearing an internal jam or doing maintenance 
work. 


8 


Controller Box 


Space for a controller PCB to be installed. 


9 


Paper Exit Unit Cover 2 


Cover to be provided at duplex transportation 
inlet and to be removed when installing the 
duplex transportation unit. 


10 


Paper Stopper A 


Stopper to be erected for alignment of exited 
papers and also prevention of falling down. 


11 


Paper Stopper B 


Stopper to be erected for preventing exited 
papers from falling down. 



I-5 



INTERNAL STRUCTURE 

<Cross Sectional View > 

4.FusingUnit 3.Drum Cleaner 2 



2.0PC Belt Cartridge 



1 Toner Cartridge (K, Y, M, C) 



5.Transfer Unit 2 

7.Paper Discharger 

8.Transfer Roller 2 
6.Transfer Drum 2 

12. Registration Roller 2 
10. Paper Pick-up Roller 




11. Scanner Unit 



9. Media Cassette 



Fig.1-3 



No. 


Components Name 


Outline of Functions 


1 


Toner Cartridge 


Contain the toner (K, Y, M, C) for developing. 
Each toner cartridge (K, Y, M, C) is independent. 


2 


OPC Belt Cartridge 


Forms images and includes the photoconductive belt. 


3 


Drum Cleaner 2 


Cleans and collects waste toner adhering to the transfer 
drum 2. 


4 


Fusing Unit 


Fixes by heat and pressure the toner image onto the paper. 


5 


Transfer unit 2 


Transfers toner images from the transfer drum 2 to the 
paper. 


6 


Transfer Drum 2 


Forms color images, combining the toner images from the 
OPC belt on the drum. 


7 


Paper Discharger 


Emits a corona charge for separating the paper from the 
transfer drum 2. 


8 


Transfer Roller 2 


Transfer the toner image on the transfer drum 2 to the 
paper. 


9 


Media Cassette 


Feeds paper automatically. 


10 


Paper Pick-up Roller 


Feeds paper automatically from the paper cassette. 


11 


Scanner Unit 


Generates a laser beam and scans the OPC belt. 


12 


Registration Roller 2 


Aligns the paper correctly ready for printing 



I-6 



DESCRIPTION OF CONTROL PANEL 

The printer control panel provides control of the printer including test printing, 
maintenance operations performed by the video controller and also the ones which are 
performed by the engine controller. 

The Video Controller Mode and the Engine Controller Mode have some common 
functions. Under normal circumstances the functions in the Video controller mode will be 
used. Refer to Chapter V for further information. 



4.1 Video Controller Mode 

The printer goes into the Video Controller Mode when the power is turned on by pressing 
the power button. 

The Video Controller Mode supplies the general test printing and setting functions and 
some of the maintenance operations. If further engine settings are required, use the 
Engine Controller Mode. 



4.2 Engine Controller Mode 

The printer goes into the Engine Controller Mode when power is turned on by pressing 
the power button at the same time as holding down the secure print, back, set. (Refer to 
Fig.1-4.) 

Note: 

This mode provides unique control panel display and operation functions which are 
completely different from the ones described on the actual control panel or in the user's 
guide. Refer to Chapter V for detailed information. 



I-7 




Fig.1-4 



No. 


LED / Button Name 


1 


LCD: 16 character by 2 lines 


2 


Power LED 


3 


Ready LED 


4 


Data LED 


5 


Go button 


6 


Job Cancel button 


7 


Alarm LED 


8 


Secure Print button 


9 


- button 


10 


+ button 


11 


Reprint button 


12 


Back button 


13 


Set button 



I-8 



CHAPTER II 

SPECIFICATIONS 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTER II SPECIFICATIONS 11-1 

1. RATING 11-1 

2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS II-2 

2.1. Printing II-2 

2.2. Functions II-3 

2.3. Electrical and Mechanical II-3 

2.4. Network II-4 

2.5. Paper Specification II-5 

2.5.1 Printable Media & Cassette Capacity II-5 

2.5.2 Printed Output II-6 

2.5.3 Recommended Paper Specifications II-6 

2.5.4 Effective Printing Area II-6 

2.5.5 Paper Feed Jam Rate II-8 

3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION II-9 

3.1 Ambient Temperature / Humidity /Altitude II-9 



CHAPTER II SPECIFICATIONS 
1. RATING 



/j\ WARNING 



Use the power supply cable supplied with the printer, or a similar cable complying with 
the following specification (3-wire power cable with ground). 

Use of an "out of specification" cable may result in an electric shock. 



Destination 


Voltage (V) 


Frequency (Hz) 


Input Current (A) 


Power Cord (Piece) 


US / Canada 


120 


50/60 


11 


1 


Europe 


220 - 240 


50/60 


6 


1 * 



For the model for Europe, the power supply cable depends on the country as 
follows; 



Figure 


Rating 


Approval Agency 


Applicable Area 


A 


250VAC, 6A 


VDE, DEMKO, SEV 


Europe (Continent) 


B 


BS 


UK 



Figure A: For Europe (Sample) 




fk 



ur 



TTK 
JJ 





uiM 








M 


2.5m 

-^ ► 









Figure B: For UK 





Note: 

For details of other power supply cables, refer to the parts reference list. 



For rating labels, refer to the Safety Instruction on Page vi. 



2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 
2.1. Printing 

Print method: Electrophotography by semiconductor laser beam scanning 

Resolution: 600 x 600 dots per inch (Fine) 

The resolution can be enhanced to 2400 dpi class by using the 
HRC(High Resolution Control) and CAPT (Color Advanced Photoscale 
Technology) features. 



Print speed: 



Monochrome mode: 
Full color mode: 



24 page/minute (A4/Letter-size) 
6 page/minute (A4/Letter-size) 



Warm-up: 



Max. 4 minute at 20 °C (68 °F) 



First print: Monochrome mode: 1 5 seconds or less 

Full color mode: 22.5 seconds or less 

(when loading A4/Letter-size paper by face down print delivery from 
standard upper cassette feed) 

Print media: Toner in a single-color single-component cartridge 

Life Expectancy: 12,000 single-sided pages/cartridge (Black) 
7,200 single-sided pages/cartridge (Cyan, 
Magenta, Yellow) 
Note: These figures are based on an average of 5% coverage of the printable area for 
one color using laser paper. The frequency of replacement will vary, depending 
on the complexity of the prints, the percentage of coverage, and the type of 
media. Transparencies, glossy coated paper and other special media will result in 
shortened consumable life. 



Resident Printer Fonts: 

<HP PCL, EPSON FX-850, and IBM Proprinter XL modes> 
66 scalable fonts and 12 bitmapped fonts, 1 1 bar codes 
<BR-Script 3 mode> 
1 65 scalable fonts 



2.2. 



Functions 

CPU: 



Toshiba TMPR 4955AF-266 (TX4955 266MHz) 



Emulation: Automatic emulation selection 

HP Color Printer (PCL5C) including HP LaserJet 4+ (PCL5e) and HP 
LaserJet 5 (PCL6 monochrome) 

BR-Script 3 (Adobe PostScript 3 compatible) 
HP-GL 

EPSON FX-850 
IBM ProprinterXL 

Interface: Bi-directional parallel 

Universal Serial Bus (USB) 
Ethernet 1 0/1 00 Base-TX 

RAM: Standard model: 64Mbytes 

(Expandable up to 384Mbytes with DIMMs) 

The standard memory fitted can vary depending on the printer model and 
country 

Control panel: 8 buttons, 4 LEDs and a 16-column x 2 lines liquid crystal display 
Diagnostics: Self-diagnostic program 

2.3. Electrical and Mechanical 

Power source: U.S.A. and Canada: AC 120V, 50/60Hz 

Europe and Australia: AC 220 to 240V, 50/60Hz 



Power consumption: 

Printing: 
Standing by: 
Sleep: 



Noise: 



Temperature: 



Humidity: 



Printing: 
Standing by: 

Operating: 
Non Operating: 
Storage: 

Operating: 
Storage: 



600W or less 
260W or less 
30W or less 

55dB A or less 
48dB A or less 



10to32.5°C(50to90.5°F) 
5 to 35 °C (41 to95°F) 
0to35°C(38to95°F) 

20 to 80% (non condensation) 
20 to 80% (non condensation) 



Dimensions (W x D x H): 

500 x 520 x 410 mm (19.7 x 20.5 x 16.1 inches) 
500 x 520 x 555 mm (1 9.7 x 20.5 x 21 .9 inches) 
with the optional lower tray unit fitted 

Weight: Approx. 39kg (86lbs.) 

Approx. 54.4kg 
with the optional lower tray unit and toner cartridges fitted 



2.4. Network 

Type /Speed: 

Protocols: 



Management: 

Firmware update: 
Supplied software: 



Ethernet 10/100BaseTX Printer server (NC-4100h) 
Auto speed detection 

TCP/IP (DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, DHCP, NetBIOS over IP 
LPR/LPD, Port9100, Custom Port, POP3/SMTP SMB Print 
TELNET, SNMP, HTTP, TFTP), EtherTalk, IPX/SPX, DEC LAT, 
Banyan VINES, NetBEUI, DLC/LLC 

Web Based Management 

BRAdmin Professional Windows® based management utility 

8MB flash ROM. Use BRAdmin Professional when upgrading print 
server software or BOOTP, TFTP PUT/GET or IPX for Netware. 

BRAdmin Professional (for Windows® 95/98/ME/NT 4.0/2000/XP) 

Driver Deployment Wizard (for Windows® 95/98/ME/ 

NT 4.0/2000/XP) 

Network Print Software (for Windows® 95/98/ME/NT 4.0/2000/XP) 

Storage Manager (for Windows® 95/98/ME/NT 4.0/2000/XP) 

Analysis Tool (for Windows® 95/98/ME/NT 4.0/2000/XP) 



2.5. Paper Specification 

2.5.1 Printable Media & Cassette Capacity 

The standard media cassette (upper cassette) is supplied with the printer. The optional 
lower tray unit and the optional Legal cassette can also be installed. 



1 ) Printable Media: Plain paper / Transparency / Thick Stock / Label / Envelope 

2) Printable size: (Refer to the list below.) 

3) Feedable paper weight: 64 (1 8lb.) to 1 63 (43lb.) g/m 2 

4) Maximum load height : 27mm 

• Plain paper: 250 sheets of 75g/m 2 (20lb) paper 

• Envelopes : 15 sheets 

• Transparency: 50 sheets 

• Label: 80 sheets 

Pull the media cassette out of the printer toward you, insert 
the paper into the cassette after aligning the top edge of the 
sheets, then push the cassette back into its original position. 



5) Setting method: 



Paper Source 


Printable Media Size 


The Standard Media Cassette 


Plain paper: A4, Letter, B5, Executive 
Envelope: COM10, DL 
Other size: width 105-21 6mm (4.1 "-8.5") 
length 220-297mm (8.7"-1 1 .7") 


The Optional Legal Cassette 


Plain paper: Legal, A4, Letter, B5, Executive 
Envelope: COM10, DL 
Other size: width 105-21 6mm (4.1 "-8.5") 
length 220-355.6mm (8.7"-14") 



105 to 216 mm 




Feeding direction 
(face up) 



220 to 297mm 
(Standard Cassette) 
220 to 355.6 mm 
(Legal Cassette) 



2.5.2 Printed Output 

250 sheets of 75g/m 2 (201b) paper / plain paper can be stacked in the output tray. 

Face-down print delivery 

Note: Face down: Delivers the printed side of the paper downwards 
Environment: 17.5-27.0 °C, 50 ~ 70%RH 

2.5.3 Recommended Paper Specifications 



Item 


Description 


Basis Weight (g/m 2 ) 


82 ±5 


Thickness (|i m) 


95 ±6 


Smoothness (Bekk) (seconds) 


90 ±20 


Stiffness (Clark) 


100 ± 15 


Brightness (%) 


85 ±2 


Surface Resistance (Q) 


10 10 ~10 11 


Grain Direction 


Long 



Measurement Condition: 17.5 - 27.0 °C, 50 - 70%RH 

Note: Keep the paper sealed in the bag as supplied and do not open the paper bag 
until the paper is required for use. 

2.5.4 Effective Printing Area 

(1) Printable area 



F 
E 








A 










C 




E 


1 


' 










i 


i 












B 


i 
D 

1 






z 


/\ 


\ 














i 


f 












i 


i 
F 















The effective printing area means the area within which the printing of all the data 
received without any omissions can be guaranteed. (Refer to Table 2-1 for details.) 



II-6 



Table 2-1 : Effective Printing Areas 



Size 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


F 




210.0mm 


297.0mm 


203.2mm 


288.5mm 


3.4mm 


4.23mm 


A4 


8.27" 


1 1 .69" 


8.0" 


1 1 .36" 


0.13" 


0.17" 




(2,480 dots) 


(3,507 dots) 


(2,400 dots) 


(3,407 dots) 


(40 dots) 


(50 dots) 




215.9mm 


279.4mm 


207.44mm 


271.0mm 


4.23mm 




Letter 


8.5" 


1 1 .0" 


8.16" 


1 0.67" 


0.17" 


* 




(2,550 dots) 


(3,300 dots) 


(2,450 dots) 


(3,200 dots) 


(50 dots) 






215.9mm 


355.6mm 


207.44mm 


347.1mm 






Legal 


8.5" 


14.0" 


8.16" 


13.67" 


* 


* 




(2,550 dots) 


(4,200 dots) 


(2,450 dots) 


(4,1 00 dots) 








182.0mm 


257.0mm 


173.54mm 


248.5mm 






B5(JIS) 


7.16" 


10.12" 


6.82" 


9.78" 


* 


* 




(2,149 dots) 


(3,035 dots) 


(2,049 dots) 


(2,935 dots) 








176.0mm 


250.0mm 


167.54mm 


241.5mm 






B5(IS0) 


6.93" 


9.84" 


6.59" 


9.5" 


* 


* 




(2,078 dots) 


(2,952 dots) 


(1,978 dots) 


(2,852 dots) 








184.2mm 


266.7mm 


175.74mm 


258.3mm 






Executive 


7.25" 


10.5" 


6.91" 


10.17" 


* 


* 




(2,1 75 dots) 


(3,1 50 dots) 


(2,075 dots) 


(3,050 dots) 








104.8mm 


241.3mm 


96.34mm 


232.8mm 






COM-10 


4.125" 


9.5" 


3.785" 


9.16" 


* 


* 




(1,237 dots) 


(2,850 dots) 


(1,1 37 dots) 


(2,750 dots) 








110.1mm 


221mm 


101.64mm 


211.5mm 






DL 


4.33" 


8.66" 


3.99" 


8.33" 


* 


* 




(1,299 dots) 


(2,598 dots) 


(1,1 99 dots) 


(2,498 dots) 







(Note that the paper sizes indicated here should conform to the nominal dimensions 
specified by JIS.) 

A4 paper must accommodate 80 characters printed in pica pitch (203.2 mm). 

The dot size is based on 300 dpi resolution. 



(2) Print guarantee area 
<Plain paper> 



3mm 



5mm 



Print 

guarantee 

area 



4mm 



Paper:5mm 
Other:10mm 



Non printable area 



Non guarantee area 



4mm 



Paper:4mm 
Other:10mm 



3mm 



5mm 



<Envelope> 



Non printable area 



Non guarantee area 





r* 








3mm 














i 
42mm 


i 








Print guarantee area 




16mm 












} 


U 












4mm 










4mm 














nr 


Mv/i-m-cQ*v->.nr> 


ni 


"\Mir>-CQ« 





DL:40mm 



DL:40mm 



2.5.5 Paper Feed Jam Rate 

Less than 1 misfeed per 2000 pages under normal environmental conditions. 

Less than 1 misfeed per 1000 pages outside the normal environmental conditions. 

Note: 

These figures are based on the paper whose specification is recommended. For the 
recommended specifications, refer to Section 2.4.3 of this chapter. 



II-8 



3. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION 

3.1 Ambient Temperature / Humidity / Altitude 

(1 ) Under Operational conditions: 1 0.0 ~ 32.5°C, 20 - 80%RH (See the figure below. 




Zone A 

Recommended Condition; 

17.5~27°C 

50~70%RH 



Zone B 
Operation Area 
other than Zone A. 



10 17.5 20 27 30 

Ambient Temperature (°c) 



32.5 40 



(2) Under Non Operational conditions: 5.0 - 35.0°C, 1 ~ 80%RH (See the figure 
below.) 



x 

DC 



E 
x 



80 



60 



40 



.1 30 

_Q 

E 
< 20 



10- 



< 



10 20 30 35 40 

Ambient Temperature(t: ) 



II-9 



(3) Storage and Transportation Environment of Printer 

The following defines the storage and transportation environment of printers that have 
been packed according to Brother specification. However, this section does not cover the 
OPC belt cartridge and toner cartridges. 



Temperature 


Normal 
Conditions 


0°C ~ 35°C (32°F ~ 95°F) 


Severe 
Conditions 


High Temperature: 35°C ~ 40°C (95°F ~ 104°F) 
Low Temperature: -1 0°C ~ 0°C (1 4°F ~ 32°F) 


Humidity 


10%~90%RH 


Period of Storage 


One Year after EX-works 


Other 


No Condensation 


Atmosphere 


613-1 ,067hpa (460 ~ 880mmHg) 



The period under the severe conditions should not be continuous, and is assumed as an 
accumulation of intermittent time. However, an individual period of intermittent time under 
severe conditions should not be allowed to exceed 48 hours. 

Note: 

Normal conditions should occupy more than 90% of total storage period. 

Severe conditions should be less than 10% of total storage period. 



11-10 



CHAPTER 

INSTALLATION 



CONTENTS 
CHAPTER III INSTALLATION 111-1 



1. CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION I 

1.1. Environmental Conditions 

1.2. Basic Layout of Printer Set-up Location 

2. UNPACKING I 

2.1 Unpacking the Printer 

2.2 Unpack the Starter Kit 

3. INSTALLATION WORK I 

3.1 Install the Fuser Cleaner and Oil Bottle 

3.2 Install the OPC Belt Cartridge 

3.3 Install the Toner Cartridge to the Printer 

3.4 Test Print 



1-1 

11-1 
11-1 

I-2 

II-2 
II-4 

I-5 
II-5 
II-6 
II-8 
II-9 



CHAPTER III INSTALLATION 

1 . CONDITIONS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION 

Any Laser beam printer is likely to be influenced by the environment of the set-up 
location. If the printer is set-up in an inappropriate location, the printer may not perform as 
expected. Therefore, the following factors should be taken into consideration before 
deciding where to set-up the printer. 

1 .1 . Environmental Conditions 

The printer should not be set up in the locations referred to in the following items (a) 
through (d) which specify inappropriate locations for set-up. 

(a) Where it is likely to receive direct sunlight or similar light. (For example, next to a 
window) 

(b) Where it is likely to suffer a big difference in temperature and humidity between the 
maximum and minimum levels. (Normal operation environment is within 10°C ~ 35°C, 
20 ~ 80%RH and without any condensation.) 

(c) Where it is likely to be in a draft of cold air from an air-conditioner or warm air from a 
heater, or to receive direct radiant heat. 

(d) Where it is likely to be excessively dusty or be subject to corrosive gases such as 
ammonia. 

(e) Users should select a location with good ventilation and set the printer on a flat 
surface. 

(f) Users should check that the maximum angle of the set-up location is horizontal to 
within ±1°. 

1.2. Basic Layout of Printer Set-up Location 

Fig. 3-1 shows the basic layout of the printer set-up location that is suitable for smooth 
operation and maintenance of the printer. 





Table 

1 


50cm (20") 
























70cm 
(28") 






J 20cm (8") 










\ 




1 

• CO 

1 UJ 

1 ® 


=C 


" 


CO 
o 

it 




50cm i 
(19.7") | 










1 CL 






D 


•ooo 




! y^\ 








i XK 








!//i 










r \ 

Power Co 












d 


54cm (21 .3") 


50cm (20") 









Fig.3-1 

• The space in front of the printer (70cm) is necessary to open the front cover. 

• The space at back of the printer (20cm) is necessary to open / close the rear access 
cover. 

• The space on both sides of the printer (50cm) is necessary for general access. 



1-1 



UNPACKING 



A 



WARNING 



• The package containing a printer weighs approximately 45kg, so it is too heavy for 
one person to carry. It needs two adults to move the printer. Since the printer is a 
precision machine, make sure that it is carried slowly with care so that no impact 
occurs to the printer while moving it. 

• Do not attempt to lift a printer when it is covered by the vinyl bag because it is slippery 
and may result in damage and injury if dropped. 



2.1 Unpacking the Printer 

Refer to Fig. 3-2 on the next page. 

1 ) Cut the P.P band (2 pieces). 

2) Remove the plastic joints (4 locations). 

3) Remove the outer box tape. 

4) Open the top of the package and take the starter kit out. 

5) Lift the outer box up from around the printer. 

6) Remove the upper packing (4 locations). 

7) Take out the power code. 

8) Open up the polyethylene bag enclosing the printer. 

9) Lift up the printer with another person's help, and move it away from the polyethylene 
bag. 

10) Remove the shipping tape (4 locations). 

1 1 ) Remove the fixing tape of the silica gel the printer rear side. 

1 2) Remove the silica gel. 



I-2 



Outer Box 



Polyethylene 
Bag (ST) 



Engine Top Cushion 



F Tape (w:38mm 



#7 Polyethylene 
Bag 




Starter Kit Packing (U) 



Polyethylene 
Bag (T) 



Silica Gel \^ 
(ST) ^ 



Polyethylene 
Bag (T) 



Polyethylene Bag (T) 



Starter Kit 
Packing (L) 



F23 Polyethylene 
Bag (Oil) 



Engine Top Cushion 



Sleeve 
Scotch Tape (w:25mm 

Polyethylene 
Bag (EN) 



F Tape (w:38mm 



Base 

Packing Fig.3-2 




P.P Band (w:1 5.5mm) Outer Box Tape (w:75mm) 



(fy P Joint (4 locations) 



F Tape (w:38mm 



2.2 Unpack the Starter Kit 

<Unpacking Procedure> 

1 ) Open the polyethylene bag and slide off the cardboard sleeve covering the starter 
kit. 

2) Confirm all of the following parts are inside the starter kit packing box. 



No. 


Kit Name 


Appearance 


Quantity 


1 


Toner Cartridge (Y,M,C,K) 


<^^^^\ ^^ Y(Yellow) 
< K§^§S^3ff^O'f&^^ M(Magenta) 


4 


2 


OPC Belt Cartridge 


<# 


1 


3 


Oil Bottle 


^ 




1 


4 


Fuser Cleaner 


C<&£\ Fuser Cleaner 
Spuit ^~^U ^* 


1 



A 



CAUTION 

When shipping the printer, remove the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner from the fusing 
unit. After removing the oil bottle, be sure to remove the oil remaining in the fusing unit 
with the supplied syringe. Failure to do so will cause severe damage to the printer. 



I-4 



INSTALLATION WORK 

Install the unit parts of the starter kit into the printer according to the following 
procedures: 



3.1 Install the Fuser Cleaner and Oil Bottle 

1 ) Open the paper exit cover. 

Pressure has been released by the 
fusing release lever between the fuser 
roller and back-up roller while the 
transportation and storage. 

Release the fusing release lever. 



^ 



CAUTION 



Do attempt to loosen the oil bottle's 
cap, because loose cap is likely to 
cause the oil leakage. 



2) Open the retainer lock lever of oil bottle 
and the fuser cleaner. 



3) Install the oil bottle to the fusing unit. 



4) Install the fuser cleaner to the fusing 
unit. 

5) Hold the fuser cleaner with the retainer 
lock lever. 

6) Close the paper exit cover. 



Fusing 
release lever 



Fusing oil bottle 



Fuser cleaner 



Paper exit cover 




Fig.3-3 




Fig.3-4 




I-5 



3.2 Install the OPC Belt Cartridge 



/l\ CAUTION 



• Do not directly touch the OPC belt surface with bare 
hands or gloves. 



If the OPC belt is exposed for more than two minutes 
under the light of 800 lux, the belt may be damaged. 




1 ) Open the front cover and the paper exit 
unit cover 2 by releasing the latches. 



^ 



CAUTION 



When installing or removing the OPC 
belt, be sure to open the front cover 
first. Failure to do so will cause the 
OPC belt to be damaged due to 
contact with the toner cartridges. 



Paper exit unit 
cover 2 




Front cover 



Fig.3-6 



2) Release the belt cartridge lock levers 
(left & right). 




Belt cartridge lock lever 

Fig.3-7 



I-6 



3) Pull and remove the tension release 
pins on both sides (left & right) of the 
OPC belt cartridge. 

4) Remove the protective sheet from the 
new OPC belt cartridge. 



Tension 
release pin 



Protective sheet 




OPC belt cartridge 



Tension 
release pin 



Fig.3-8 



5) Install the new OPC belt cartridge into 
the printer, along the guide of belt 
cartridge lock lever provided at both 



sides. 



OPC belt cartridge 




Fig.3-9 



6) Set the belt cartridge lock lever at both 
sides (left and right). 

7) Close the paper exit unit cover 2. 




Belt cartridge lock lever 



Fig.3-10 



I-7 



3.3 Install the Toner Cartridges into the Printer 



/l\ CAUTION 



• Refrain from holding a toner cartridge vertically, otherwise, it may adversely affect the 
print quality. 

• Do not hold the toner cartridge vertically (neither long nor short edge), otherwise , it 
adversely affect the print quality. 



1 ) Open the front cover. 

2) Holding a toner cartridge horizontally, 
shake it to left and right for three to four 
times. 



3) Remove the seal tape and remove a 
protective cover of toner cartridge. 



4) Push the new toner cartridge along the 
guide into the printer. 



5) Installation order of toner cartridge in 
terms of color shall be Cyan (C), 
Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K). 

6) Close the front cover. 




Toner cartridge 



Toner 
cartridge 



Protective cover 



Fig.3-12 




Fig.3-13 




Fig.3-14 



I-8 



3.4 Test Print 

1 ) Make sure the printer power button is off. Do not connect the interface cable. 




Fig.3-15 



2) Connect the AC power cord to the printer, and then plug it into the AC outlet. 




Fig.3-16 



3) Turn on the power button. 




© 



Fig.3-17 



I-9 



4) After the printer warms, the READY message will appear. 



brother 




Reprint Back 



Control panel 



Unfold the tray extension flap 




Fig.3-18 



5) Press the Go button. The printer will print a test page. Check that the test page is 
printed correctly. 





Fig.3-19 



111-10 



CHAPTER IV 

STRUCTURE OF 
SYSTEM COMPONENTS 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTER IV STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS IV-1 

1. BASIC STRUCTURE IV- 1 

1.1 Print System and Transfer System IV-6 

1.1.1 Structure of the Printer IV-7 

1.1.2 Basic Structure of the Printing System IV-8 

1.1.3 Details of Each Process IV-10 

1.2 Scanning System IV-21 

1.3 Paper Transportation System IV-23 

1.4 Fusing Unit IV-25 

2. STRUCTURE OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM IV-27 

2.1 Basic Structure IV-27 

2.1.1 Electrical System and Functions IV-27 

2.2 Control System IV-34 

2.2.1 Control of the Print Process IV-34 

2.3 Main PCB (Video Controller PCB) IV-42 

2.3.1 Outline IV-42 

2.3.2 Circuit IV-44 

2.4 Power Supply Unit IV-56 

2.5 High Voltage Power Supply Unit IV-60 

2.6 Wiring Diagram IV-63 



CHAPTER IV STRUCTURE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

1. BASIC STRUCTURE 

<Mechanical & Electrical Structures> 

This laser beam color printer (hereinafter called "Printer") consists of five mechanical 
systems; Print, Transfer, Scanning, Paper Transport and Control System. The printer 
produces color printing through the interactive operations of these five systems as shown 
in Fig.4-1. 

(1) Print System 

The print system consists of the following 6 (six) functional parts located around 
the OPC belt which form a toner image on the OPC Belt. 

• Charger Part 

• Exposure Part 

• Development Part 

• First Transfer Part 

• Discharger Part 

• Cleaner Part 

(2) Scanning System 

The scanning system consists of the following 2 (two) functional parts which form 
an electrostatic latent image on the OPC Belt by scanning it with a laser beam. 

• Scanner Unit 

• Scanner Motor (SCM) 

(3) Transfer System 

The transfer system consists of the following 3 (three) functional parts and 
transfers the toner image formed on the transfer drum onto the page. 

• Transfer Drum 

• Second Transfer Part 

• Drum Cleaner Unit 

(4) Paper Transport System 

The paper transport system consists of the following 5 (five) functional parts and 
picks up paper from the media cassette, separates the paper from the transfer 
drum and exits it from the printer body after fusing the toner image on the paper. 

• Media Cassette 

• Transport rollers 

• Paper Discharger 

• Fusing unit 

• Paper Exit 



IV-1 



< 

I 



Fusing Unit 



Transfer Unit 



AC Discharger Unit 



Transfer Roller 



Registrater Roller 



Paper Pick-up Roller 



> Paper Exit Unit ►QPaper Exit 




Main Motor 



MM 



Develope Motor 




I/F Controller 



i 



MCTL 



I/F Control 



Sequence Control 



Laser Control 



Fig.4-1 



(5) Control System 

The control system consists of the following 4 (four) control parts and runs the 
printer by processing the interface signals transmitted from the Host computer and 
interfacing to the print, transfer, scanning and transport systems. 

• Sequence Control 

• Laser Control 

• Fusing Temperature Control 

• Interface Control 

<Basic Mechanism of Color Printing> 

(1 ) Principle of Color Printing 

Color printing is made through the subtractive process by combining the three 
primary colors, yellow, magenta, and cyan. Fig.4-2 shows the three primary colors 
and subtractive process: 




Y: Yellow 
M: Magenta 
C: Cyan 
R: Red 
GR: Green 
BL: Blue 
BK: Black 



Fig.4-2 

(2) Basic Color Printing Process 

(a) The printer has a Toner Cartridge of each color yellow, magenta, cyan and black 
as shown in Fig.4-3. 

(b) The toner image developed using the primary colors is transferred to the transfer 
drum for the printed color combination as shown in Fig.4-4 (a). 

(c) The toner image formed on the transfer drum is transferred to the transported 
paper as shown in Fig.4-4 (6). 

(d) The toner on the paper is fused by the thermal fixing unit to fix the toner image 
onto the paper as shown in Fig.4-4©. 

Summarizing the above processes, a toner color layer is formed on the 
transported paper, and subsequently, the color image is made through the 
subtractive process. 



IV-3 



OPC Belt Cartridge 



Toner Cartridge 



Transfer Drum 




(§). First Transfer 



©. Fusing 



Fig.4-3 



Toner 




fl 



©. Second Transfer ^ 




% 



Paper 



Red ' Cyan Green 



~Yjj GR J 



R ¥ C i GR 
Paper 



Fig.4-4 



IV-4 



<Structure of the OPC Belt> 

The OPC belt consists of a surface layer having a photoconductor (OPC) of organic 
material, the inner layer of an insulator material (PET / Mylar) and an aluminum deposit 
layer in between. The OPC belt is located as shown in Fig.4-5 as the main part of the 
print system. 



OPC Belt Cartridge 



OPC Belt 



Transfer Drum 




_v^ 



Toner Cartridge 



? 



? 



? 



'Scanner Unit 



Fig.4-5 



Electrode 




Photoconductor(OPC) 

Aluminum deposit layer 
Insulator Material 



Fig.4-6 



IV-5 



1.1 



Print System and Transfer System 



Fig.4-7 shows the basic structure of the print system having the OPC belt as the main 
part and the transfer system having the transfer drum as the main part. Color printing is 
achieved by actuating in sequence each process in the print system and transfer system. 

4 cycles of actions 1 to 6 are required to form a full 24 bit color image on the transfer 
drum, only one cycle of actions 7, 8 and 9 is required to transfer the image to the paper 
from the transfer drum ready for fixing by actions 1 and 1 1 . 



/ 



Print System 



Transfer System 



Transport System 





■ 


- 






1 


Charging 




' 


' 




2 


Exposing kymc 


6 


OPC Belt Cleaning 


' 


' 


, 


3 


Developing ky 


MC 


5 


Belt Discharge 


\ 


' 




k 


4 


OPC Belt ky 


MC 










Transfer Drum(First Trans 


fer) 




Transfer Drum ky 


MC 










' 


' 




7 


Second Transfer(Paper) 


9 


Transfer 


Drum Cleaning 


' 


' 




i 


8 


Paper 


Dischanging 










' 


' 




10 


Fusing 




\ 


1 




11 


Paper Exit 





Fig.4-7 



IV-6 



1 .1 .1 Structure of the Printer 



No. 


Component Part 


Process 


1 


Charger 


Charging 


2 


Scanner Unit 


Exposing 


3 


Toner Cartridge 


Developing 


4 


OPC Belt Cartridge 


Receives the Image 


5 


Transfer Drum 


Transfers the Image 


6 


Belt Discharger Erase Lamp 


Discharges the Belt 


7 


Cleaning Blade 


Cleaning the Belt 


8 


Transfer Roller 


Transferring 


9 


Paper Discharger 


Discharges the Paper 


10 


Drum Cleaner 


Cleans the Drum 


11 


Fusing Unit 


Fusing 


12 


Paper Exit Unit 


Exits the Paper 


13 


Registration Roller 


Paper Alignment 



11. Fusing Unit 



12. Paper Exit 
Unit 



10. Drum Cleaner 4. OPC Belt Cartridge 



Transfer Unit 

9. Paper Discharger 

8. Transfer Roller 
5. Transfer Drum 

13. Registration Roller 

Paper Pick-up 
Roller 




r 



3. Toner Cartridge 
. (K,Y,M,C) 






oo j 



60 iH 



? 



i 



3 



^ 



u 



2. Scanner Unit 



6. Erase Lamp 7. Cleaning Blade 1 . Charger Media Cassette 



Fig.4-8 



IV-7 



1 .1 .2 Basic Structure of the Printing System 

A toner image is formed through the potential of the OPC belt varying in each of the 
charger, exposure, development, transfer and cleaning processes. 

(1 ) Process of Print System (See Fig.4-9.) 

i) The OPC belt is biased to the voltage -CBV(V) by the power supply CBV. 

ii) A negative high voltage is applied to the charger unit by the power supply CHV, 
and a corona is generated as the result. 

iii) The developer magnetic roller of the toner cartridges is biased to -DBV(V) by 
the power supply DBV. 

iv) The frame potential of the transfer drum is GND. 



Toner Cartridge 



Paper Discharger 



rtr 



Develop 




-EM- 



Fig.4-9 



No. 


Func 


tion 


Power Supply (P/S) 




P/S Name 


Approx.Output Voltage 


1 


Charging 


CHV(-) 


4.6KV 


HVRD6190 


619V 


2 


First Transfer 


CBV(-) 


200V ~ 900V 


3 


Developing 
Bias 


Y,M 


DBV(-A) 


200V ~ 400V 


C,K 


DBV(-B) 


200V ~ 400V 


4 


Second Transfer 


THV(+) 


400V ~ 3,000V 


5 


Transfer Roller Cleaning 


THV(-) 


600V 


6 


Paper Discharging 


ACV(~) 


4.9KV 


DCV(+) 


200V 


7 


Drum Cleaning 


FCBV 


200V ~ 1 ,500V 



IV-8 



(2) Variation of OPC Belt Potential (See Fig.4-1 0.) 

The OPC belt is initially biased to -CBV(V). 

The OPC belt surface is evenly charged to V (V) in the charging process. 

The potential of the exposure part of the OPC belt is reduced to -VR(V) as it is 
exposed to the laser beam in the process of exposing, and an electrostatic 
latent image is formed on the OPC belt as the result. 

iv) Negatively charged toner is moved onto the exposed part of the OPC belt in the 
development process due to the difference of potential between -VR(V) (the 
latent image) and -DBV(V), and a visible toner image is formed as the result. 

v) Negatively charged toner on the OPC belt moves to the transfer drum surface 
in the transfer process because the GND potential of the transfer drum is 
greater than -VR(V) of the OPC belt. 

vi) The OPC belt is discharged by the erase lamp. 



Process 



OPC Belt 




Dev. roller 
m Charging Process 
[~2l Exposing Process 
|~3~l Developing Process 
[J]Transfering Process 
l~5~l Cleaning (Erase) 



CBV Power Supply for OPC Belt Bias 



CHV| Power Supply for Charging 

Power Supply for Mag Roller Bias 
Remain voltage on the OPC Belt 



DBV 



VR 



Fig.4-1 



IV-9 



1 .1 .3 Details of Each Process 



1 


Charging 



The charging process ensures that the OPC belt is evenly charged by the charger 
system. 



(1 ) Structure of the Charger Unit (Refer to Fig.4-8 and Fig.4-1 1 ) 

) The charger unit is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 

i) The charger unit consists of the case, corona wire and grid. 

ii) The charger unit charges the OPC belt surface to the potential -V (V) with the 
corona charge. 

iv) The charger unit has the grid controlled to the constant voltage ZD(V) for even 
charging. 



(2) Process of Charging (Refer to Fig.4-1 2.) 

i) The status of the OPC belt surface before charging is -CBV(V). 

ii) The charger unit charges the OPC belt surface evenly to -V (V) by generating a 
negative charge. 



ZD 



Grid 



Corona wire 



2 


\ 




i i 




\ 
1 

/ 


/ 


V 


f-i-n X - 
















CBV 




CHV 





Case 



Fig.4-1 1 




Cleaning 
(Blade) 



Charging 
Fig.4-1 2 



IV-10 



2 


Exposing 



The exposing process means that the OPC belt surface is exposed to the laser beam to 
form an electrostatic latent image. 



(1 ) Structure of Scanner Unit 

i) The scanner unit is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 

ii) The source of the laser beam is a semiconductor laser. 

iii) The laser light is scanned onto the OPC belt by converting the laser light to a 
beam of light through the lens and reflective mirror to form an electrostatic 
latent image. 



(2) Process of Exposing (Refer to Fig.4-13.) 

i) The OPC belt surface has been charged to the potential -Vo(V) in the charging 
process. 

ii) The laser light is scanned at right angles to the forward direction of the OPC 
belt. 

iii) High speed switching of the laser is made according to the transmitted image 
data. 

iv) The charge of the areas radiated by the laser light is reduced to the potential - 
VR(V). 

v) An invisible electrostatic latent image is formed on the OPC belt as shown in 
Fig.4-13. 




Charging Exposing 



Fig.4-13 



IV-11 



3 


Developing 



The developing process means that an electrostatic latent image on the OPC belt is 
made visible by depositing toner onto the exposed areas of the OPC belt. 

(1) Structure of the Toner Cartridge (Refer to Fig.4-8 & 4.14.) 

i) The toner cartridge is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 

ii) Four toner cartridges are made available from the top to bottom in the order 
black, yellow, magenta and cyan. 

iii) Each color toner is loaded in the corresponding toner cartridge. 

(2) Process of Developing (Refer to Fig.4-8, 4-1 4, 4-1 5, and 4-1 6) 

i) Toner adheres to the developer roller of the toner cartridge. 

Developing is processed by this roller contacting the OPC belt surface. 

ii) The developer roller has been biased to the potential -DBV(V). Fig.4-15 
describes the relationship established between the potential of the toner, the 
potential -V (V) at the non-exposed area of OPC belt and the potential -VR(V) 
on the exposed area of the OPC belt. 

iii) Developing is processed by the toner adhering to the OPC belt due to the 
attraction between the potential of the toner and the potential -VR(V) on the 
exposed area of the OPC belt. A visible Toner image is formed on the OPC 
belt. 

iv) No developing takes place on the non-exposed area because the potential of 
the toner and that of the OPC belt is the same polarity and therefore repel each 
other. 



/ 



^ 



Toner 



OPC belt 

Developer roller 



0) 

© 



V 



Toner cartridge 




Electrostatic latent image 



Toner 



Fig.4-14 



IV-12 



Developer „ Toner 

roller 




DBV 



CBV 



Fig.4-15 



Toner (M) 




Exposing 



© 



® ® 

Developing 



® 



Fig.4-16 



IV-13 



First Transfer (Drum) 



The first transfer process means that the toner image on the OPC belt is transferred onto 
the transfer drum. 



(1 ) Structure of the Transfer Drum (Refer to Fig.4-8.) 

i) The drum is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 

ii) Material of the drum is aluminum. 

iii) Semiconductor rubber is used to provide the drum surface as shown in Fig.4- 
17. 

iv) The transfer drum rotates by contacting and synchronizing with the OPC belt. 



Transfer Drum 




Aluminum 



Rubber 



Fig.4-17 



IV-14 



(2) First Transfer Process (Refer to Fig.4-1 8.) 

i) The OPC belt has been through the development process and contacts and 
synchronizes with the transfer drum. 

ii) The OPC belt has been biased to the potential of -CBV(V). The potential of the 
transfer drum is nearly GND. 

iii) Toner on the OPC belt is moved onto the transfer drum due to the difference of 
potential between the OPC belt and the transfer drum. 

iv) Toner that has been developed by each color in sequence is moved from the 
OPC belt onto the transfer drum and the color toner images overlap on the 
transfer drum. 

v) Upon completion of the drum transfer process, the complete toner image is 
transferred onto paper in the paper transfer process. 



OPC Belt 



Residual Charge 

Residual Toner 



■=>i 



Drum transferring 




discharging 
(Erase Lamp) 



Belt cleaning 
(Blade) 



Fig.4-1 8 



IV-15 



Belt Discharging (Erase Lamp) 



The belt discharging process means that upon completion of the drum transfer process, 
an LED light is radiated onto the OPC belt prior to mechanically cleaning the belt to 
discharge the residual charge. 

(1 ) Structure of Erase Lamp 

i) The erase lamp is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 

ii) The light source of the erase lamp is 24 light emitting diodes (LEDs). 

(2) Process of Discharging (Refer to Fig.4-19.) 

i) Though the toner image was transferred to the transfer drum in the drum 
transfer process, there is still a residual charge on the OPC belt. 

ii) The residual charge (-VR) on the OPC belt is discharged by the radiation of the 
erase lamp light prior to cleaning the belt. 



■=>! 



Drum transferring 




discharging 
(Erase Lamp) 



Belt cleaning 
(Blade) 



Fig.4-19 



IV-16 



6 


Belt Cleaning 



The belt cleaning process means that the residual toner adhering to the OPC belt surface 
is mechanically scavenged. 

(1 ) Structure of Belt Cleaning 

The blade for the belt cleaning is located relative to the OPC belt cartridge as 
shown in Fig.4-8. 

(2) Process of Belt Cleaning (Refer to Fig.4-20.) 

There is residual toner on the OPC belt as it has not been completely transferred in 
the drum transfer process. 

Residual toner is mechanically scavenged by the blade edge. 

The scavenged residual toner is collected in the waste toner pack by the waste 
toner feeder. 



■=>i 



Drum transferring 




Belt 

discharging 
(Erase Lamp) 



Belt cleaning 
(Blade) 



Fig.4-20 



IV-17 



Second Transfer (Paper) 



The second transfer process is where the toner image on the transfer drum is transferred 
onto the transported paper. 

(1 ) Second Transfer Structure 

i) The transfer roller for the paper transfer is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 

ii) The transfer roller is normally kept out of contact with the transfer drum until the 
second transfer process starts. 

iii) The transfer roller is positively biased by the power supply THV. 

iv) The transfer roller is in contact with the transfer drum only in the second 
transfer process. 

v) Transported paper passes between the transfer roller and transfer drum. 

(2) Second Transfer Process (Refer to Fig.4-21 .) 

i) Paper is transported and is synchronized with the transfer drum. 

ii) The transfer roller operates and is synchronized with the transported paper and 
is in contact with the transfer drum through the transported paper. 

iii) The transported paper passes between the transfer roller and transfer drum. 

At this time the positive high voltage (THV) is fed to the transfer roller. 

iv) Negatively charged toner on the transfer drum is moved to the positively 
charged paper. 

v) The transported paper with the toner transferred to it is moved to the paper 
discharging process. 



Paper Discharger 



Transfer Roller 



Transfer Drum 




Toner image 



VAC: Power Supply for Paper 

discharging 
THV: Power Supply for Transfer 

Roller Bias 



Paper 



Fig.4-21 



IV-18 



8 Paper Discharging 



The paper discharging process is where the transported paper onto which the toner 
transfer has been completed is separated from the transfer drum by applying an AC 
charge to the paper. 



(1 ) Structure of Paper Discharger (Refer to Fig.4-22.) 

) The AC charger unit for discharge the paper is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 
i) The AC charger unit consists of the case and a charger wire, 
ii) A high alternating voltage (VAC) is fed to the AC charger unit. 



(2) Process of Paper Discharging (Refer to Fig.4-22.) 

i) The paper adheres to the transfer drum in the transfer process. 

ii) The paper is neutralized (discharged) in terms of any electrical charge by the 
alternate voltage generated by the discharger. 

iii) Paper is separated from the transfer drum and subsequently transported to the 
fusing (fixing) process. 



Paper Discharger 



Transfer Roller 



Transfer Drum 




Toner 



IV-19 



Drum Cleaning 



The drum cleaning process is where the residual toner on the transfer drum is removed. 

(1 ) Structure of Drum Cleaning (Refer to Fig.4-23.) 

i) The drum cleaning unit is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 

ii) The drum cleaning brush is a semiconductor type so that the brush can clean 
the surface of the rotating transfer drum. The Drum cleaning brush is kept out 
of contact with the transfer drum when the print image on the transfer drum is 
being created. 

iii) The drum cleaning roller is positively biased by the positive voltage FCBV(V). 

iv) FCBV(V) is fed to the cleaning brush in contact with the roller and the cleaning 
brush is self-biased by the resistance of the brush. 

v) The drum cleaning roller rotates in contact with the drum cleaning brush. 

(2) Process of Belt Cleaning (Refer to Fig.4-23.) 

i) There is residual toner on the surface of the transfer drum after the paper 
transfer process. 

ii) The Drum cleaning brush is positively self-biased and so the negatively 
charged residual toner is removed from the surface of the transfer drum onto 
the drum cleaning brush. 

iii) The Drum cleaning roller has been biased to the positive voltage FCBV(V). As 
the cleaning brush rotates, the residual toner absorbed into the brush from the 
transfer drum is attracted by the positive FCBV(V) voltage on the roller and 
adheres to the surface of the drum cleaning roller. 

iv) Waste toner adhering to the surface of the drum cleaning roller is scavenged by 
the cleaning blade and collected into the waste toner pack by the waste toner 
feeder. 



Cleaning Brush 



FCBV: Cleaning Roller 



Power Supply for Fuser 
Cleaner Bias 




Fuser Cleaner 

West Toner Feeder 



Drum Cleaning Unit 



Fig.4-23 



IV-20 



1 .2 Scanning System 

This printer employs a semiconductor laser diode as a light source. This laser diode is 
switched according to the transmitted image data (video signal). 

The generated laser light scans over the OPC belt through a polygon mirror and lens, by 
which method electrostatic latent images will be formed on the OPC belt. 

(1 ) Structure of the Scanning System (Refer to Fig.4-24.) 
The scanner unit is located as shown in Fig.4-8. 
The scanner unit consists of the following parts; 

Light emitting source incorporating a laser diode. 

Condenser for the laser beam. 

Hexahedral mirror for scanning the laser beam. 

Focus lens for the laser beam. 

Motor to rotate the polygon mirror. 

Reflecting mirror for the laser beam path. 

Laser diode control circuit. 

Beam detector. 

Beam timing detector mirror to guide the laser beam 
to the PD sensor. 



® 


Laser Unit: 


© 


Cylinder Lens: 


© 


Polygon Mirror: 


© 


F-0 Lens: 


© 


Scanner Motor: 


© 


Mirror: 


© 


LDC: 


© 


PD: 


© 


BTD Mirror: 




Fig.4-24 



IV-21 



(2) Specification: 

Specification of the Scanner Unit is as follows; 



Item 


Specifications 


Rated Output of Laser Diode 


5mW. 


Wave Length of Laser Beam 


Approx.785nm. 


Scanning Density 


600dpi 


Scanning Width 


314mm 


Scanner Motor speed 


35,904rpm 


Number of Polygon Mirror Faces 


6 



IV-22 



1 .3 Paper Transportation System 

(1) Outline 

This printer employs automatic paper feeding from the media cassette. 

When toner images are formed on the transfer drum through the operations of the 
print system and transfer system, paper is fed by the pick-up roller and transported 
to the register roller. The transported paper is further transported to the transfer, 
fuser and exit parts by the register roller synchronizing with the rotation of the 
transfer drum. 



(2) Structure of Paper Transportation System (Refer to Fig.4-25.) 
The paper transportation system consists of the following parts; 

Case to accommodate paper to be fed 
automatically. 

Roller to feed sheets of paper one by one, 
preventing multi-feed. 

Roller to transport papers synchronized with 
the transfer drum. 

Print processing part consisting of transfer 
drum and transfer roller to transfer the toner 
image onto the paper. 

Corona generator to generate AC corona for 
separating paper from the transfer drum. 

Mechanical part to fuse the toner image with 
heat rollers and fix it on the paper. 

Mechanical part to exit the fused paper from 
the printer. 

Roller to feed paper from the printer. 



© 


Media Cassette: 


© 


Paper Pick-up Roller: 


© 


Registration Roller: 


© 


Transfer System: 


© 


Paper Discharger Unit: 


© 


Fusing Unit: 


© 


Paper Exit Unit: 


© 


Paper Exit Roller: 



IV-23 



®^ 




© Media Cassette 

© Paper Pick-up Roller 

© Registration Roller 

® Transfer Roller 



® Paper Discharger Unit 

© Fusing Unit 

® Paper Exit Unit 

© Paper Exit Roller 



Fig.4-25 



IV-24 



1.4 Fusing Unit 



The fusing unit employs a thermal fusing system using heater lamps in the rollers. Paper 
carrying the combined toner image passes between the heat rollers. Heat and pressure is 
applied to the paper when passing between the heat rollers so that the toner image is 
melted and fused onto the paper. 

(1) Structure 

The fusing unit consists of the following component parts; (Refer to Fig.4-26.) 



© 


Back-up Roller: 


is a pressure roller and incorporates a heater 
lamp. 


© 


Fusing Roller: 


incorporates a heater lamp. 


© 


Fusing Heaters: 


halogen lamps to heat the rollers. 


® 


Thermal Fuse: 


prevent the fuser roller from being 
excessively heated up. 


© 


Thermistor: 


is a sensor to detect the temperature of the 
fuser roller's surface. 


© 


Oil Bottle: 


contains silicone oil for fusing. 


© 


Fuser Cleaner: 


cleans the fuser roller. 




Fig.4-26 



IV-25 



(2) Fusing Process (Refer to Fig.4-27.) 



© Silicone oil supplied from the oil bottle is applied to the surface of 
fuser roller. 

© The toner image has been transferred onto the paper, but not yet 
fused. 

® Transported paper passes between the heater roller and back-up 
roller. 

© Each roller is heated up to approx.140°C, and receives 

approximately 156N pressure from the opposite heat roller. 

© When the paper carrying the toner images passes between the 
two heat rollers, the toner images are melted and fused on the 
transported paper. 

© The paper carrying the fused image is separated from the heat 
rollers, and ejected from the printer. 



(a). Before Fusing 



Fig.4-27 



Toner Image 




Fixed toner 



(b). After Fusing / R \/ M \/ GR 



IV-26 



2. STRUCTURE OF THE CONTROL SYSTEM 

2.1 Basic Structure 

2.1.1 Electrical System and Functions 

Most of the main electrical parts of this printer are controlled by the MCTL (engine 
controller) PCB. 

<Structure of the Sequence Control> 

The basic structure of the sequence control is shown in Fig.4-28. 



© Print Process Control: 

© Laser Output Control: 

® Fuser Temperature Control: 

© Toner Sensing Control: 

© Interface Control: 
(Video Signal) 

© Control Panel Indicator: 

© Error Control: 



To control the print process from the paper feed 
through to the paper exit. 

To automatically control the laser output. 

To control the fixer heater so that the 
temperature of the fuser roller and back-up 
roller will be correct. 

To control the sensing of the toner empty 
status. 

To process the input and output signals to and 
from the external controller (host). 

To display the printer operational status on the 
control panel indicator. 

To control the safety stop procedures when 
errors occur in the printer. 



IV-27 



Host Computer 






Control 
Panel 



l/F 
Controller 



00 



o 







l/F 
Control 



Paper Sensor (F.CL) 



Oil Sensor (OIL) 



Fusing Unit 



DC Power 
Supply Unit 



MCTL (Engine Controller) 



Sequence Control 



Temperature Control 



Toner Empty Sensing Control 



Control Panel Control 



Error Processing Program 



<^> 




<^> 



Laser Control 




Interlock Switches 



-o oo o-o o 



Fig.4-28 



Paper Sensor (P. EN) 


Paper Sensor (D. EN) 


Paper Sensor (PT1) 


Belt Sensor (PBS) 


Paper Size Sensor (PSU) 


Oil Sensor (OIL) 


Paper Sensor (EXF) 


Paper Sensor (PT2) 


OHP Sensor 3 (OHP) 


Waste Toner Sensor (WTS) 


Belt Sensor (DPJ) 


Toner Sensor ASSY 


Paper Sensor (F.CL) 


Developer Position Sensor 


Toner Key Sensor 2 (TNK) 


Paper Full Sensor 


Temperature Sensor for Fusing Unit 



<Layout & Function of the Electrical Parts> 

(1 ) Print PCB (Refer to Fig. 4-29.) 



No. 


Name 


Function 


1 


Video Controller PCB 


To receive the print data from the host computer, 
convert it into image data and then send the 
printing image data to the MCTL PWB 2. 


2 


MCTL PWB 2 


To control the sequence of processes of the 
printer: Fusing Temperature Control, Laser Output 
Control, Control Panel Indications, Toner Empty 
Sensing Control, Error Processing Control, 
Interface Control. 


3 


Panel PWB 


To display the printer's operation status and 
support the control panel switches. 


4 


LDU PCB 


To control the drive and output to the laser diode 
in the scanner unit. 


5 


PDU PCB 


To sense the emission of the laser diode and the 
beam position in the scanner unit. 


6 


Erase Lamp 


To discharge the OPC belt with the LEDs. 


7 


IOD1 PWB 2 


To send the signals from the sensors to the MCTL 
PWB 2, and to drive the outputs from the MTCL 
PWB 2 to the motors, clutches and solenoids. 


8 


IOD2 PWB 2 


- Ditto - 


9 


DC Power Supply 
(LVPS) PCB 


To provide the printer with the power for printer 
control. 


10 


High-voltage Power 
Supply (HVU) PCB 


To provide the printer with the high voltage power 
supplies necessary for the printing process. 



8. IOD2 PWB 2 



10. High-voltage 
Power Supply 
(HVU) PCB 

1 . Video Control PCB 



3. Panel PWB 



IOD1 PWB 2 



2. MCTL PWB 2 




6. Erase Lamp 



4. LDU PCB 



9. DC Power 
Supply (LVPS) 
PCB 



5. PDU PCB 



Fig.4-29 



IV-29 



(2) Motors (Refer to Fig.4-30. 



No. 


Name 


Code 


Function 


1 


Main Motor 2 


MM 


To drive the OPC belt and the paper 
transport system. 


2 


Developer Motor 2 


DM 


To drive the toner cartridge and the 
developing system. 


3 


Scanner Motor 


SCM 


To scan the laser beam. 


4 


Cooling Fan OZ 


OZFAN 


To exhaust the ozone from the printer 
(charger unit). 


5 


Cooling Fan (EX) 2 


HTFAN2 


To exhaust the heat of the fusing unit. 


6 


SL2 PS Fan 


CTLFAN 


To exhaust the heat of the power 
supply unit and Interface Controller. 



5. Cooling Fan (EX) 2 



6.SL2PSFan 



Motor 2 

4. Cooling Fan OZ 




2. Developer Motor 2 



3. Scanner Motor 



Fig.4-30 



IV-30 



(3) Clutches and Solenoids (Refer to Fig.4-31 .) 



No. 


Name 


Code 


Function 


1 


Paper Pick-up 
Clutch 


PCLU 


To feed paper by coupling the feeding 
roller to the main gear unit at the correct 
timing for paper feeding. 


2 


Registration Clutch 


RECL 


To transport paper by coupling the 
register roller to the main gear unit 
synchronized with the rotation of the 
transfer drum. 


3 


Fusing Clutch 


FUCL 


To drive the fusing rollers by coupling the 
fusing unit to the main gear unit. 


4 


Cleaner Clutch 3 


FBCL 


To drive the brush of the drum cleaner 
by coupling the cleaner clutch to the 
main gear unit at the correct timing for 
drum cleaning. 


5-8 


Developer Clutch 2 


DCL 
(Y,M,C,K) 


To drive the magnetic roller of the 
desired color toner cartridge by coupling 
that toner cartridge to the developer gear 
unit during developing. 


9 


Developer Solenoid 
Unit 


PSL(MC) 
PSL(KY) 


To position the desired color toner 
cartridge in the developing position 
during developing. 


10 


TR Cam Clutch 3 


TRCM 


To make the transfer roller contact the 
transfer drum surface at the time of the 
second transfer. 


11 


TR Cam Clutch 3 


FBCM 


To make the drum cleaner contact the 
transfer drum surface at the correct 
timing for drum cleaning. 



Layout of Clutches and Solenoids 



8. Developer 
Clutch 2 (K) 



7. Developer 
Clutch 2 (Y) 



6. Developer 
Clutch 2 (M) 



5. Developer 
Clutch 2 (C) 




1 1 . TR Cam Clutch 3 (FBCM) 
3. Fusing Clutch (FUCL) 

4. Cleaner Clutch 3 (FBCL) 
10. TR Cam Clutch 3 (TRCM) 

2. Registration Clutch (RECL) 



1. Paper Pick-up Clutch (PCLU) 



Fig.4-31 



IV-31 



(4) Sensors 



No. 


No. 


No. 


Function 


1 


Paper Size Sensor 


PSU 


Photo sensor to detect the paper size. 


2 


Paper Sensor 


PT1 


Photo sensor to detect when paper is 
fed from the media cassette. 


3 


Paper Sensor 


PT2 


Photo sensor to detect that paper is 
exited from the paper exit unit. 


4 


Paper Sensor 


P.EN 


Photo sensor to detect if paper is 
loaded in the media cassette. 


5 


Oil Sensor 


OIL 


Photo sensor to detect if the fusing unit 
oil is empty. 


6 


OHP Sensor 3 


OHP 


Photo sensor to detect if media in the 
media cassette is an OHP. 


7 


Belt Sensor 


DPJ 


Photo sensor to detect if paper is 
wound around the transfer drum. 


8 


Paper Sensor 


D.EN 


Photo sensor to detect rotation of the 
transfer drum. 


9 


Belt Sensor 


PBS 


Photo sensor to detect the home 
position of the OPC belt. 


10 


Toner Sensor ASSY 


TPD/TTR 


Photo sensor to detect if the toner is 
empty for each toner cartridge. 


11 


Waste Toner Sensor 


WTS 


Photo sensor to detect if the waste 
toner bottle is full of toner. 


12 


Developer Position 
Sensor 


DHP1, 
DHP2 


Photo sensor to detect the position of 
the toner cartridge. 


13 


Paper Sensor 


F.CL 


Photo sensor to detect if the fuser 
cleaner is fitted in the fixing unit. 


14 


Temperature Sensor 
for Fusing Unit 


TH 


Thermistor to detect the fuser 
temperature. 


15 


Paper Sensor 


EXF 


This is the sensor to detect thet the 
paper exit tray is full of exited papers. 


16 


Toner Key Sensor 2 


TNK 


To detect the availability of key to be 
provided to the toner cartridge. 


17 

17-1 
17-2 
17-3 


Interlock Switch 

Interlock Switch 
(FRONT) 

Interlock Switch (TOP) 

Interlock Switch 
(REAR) 


DSW1 
DSW2 
DSW3 


This the safety interlock switch when 
opening the cover. 



IV-32 



9. Belt Sensor (PBS) 



3. Paper Sensor (PT2) 

14. Temperature Sensor 



13. Paper Sensor (F.CL) 
15. Paper Sensor (EXF) 

5. Oil Sensor (OIL) 

17-2. Interlock Switch 
(Top) 

17-3. Interlock Switch 
(Rear 

6. OHP Sensor 3 
(OHP) 



8. Paper Sensor 
(D.EN) 

2. Paper Sensor 
(PT1) 




4. Paper Sensor (P.EN) 

1. Paper Size Sensor 
(PSU) 



Toner Sensor ASSY 
(TPD/TTR) 



17-1. Interlock Switch 
(Front) 



12. Developer 

Position Sensor 



1 1 . Waste Toner 
Sensor (WTS) 



16. Toner Key Sensor 2 (TNK) 



Fig.4-32 



IV-33 



2.2 Control System 

2.2.1 Control of the Print Process 

A Micro CPU mounted on the MCTL PCB controls the print processes. 

<Print Sequence Diagram> 



Host 
Computer 



I Scanner \ _ 
I Motor J ' 




Interlock Switches 



' ooo-o o 



Paper Sensor (P. EN) 


Paper Sensor (D. EN) 


Paper Sensor (PT1) 


Belt Sensor (PBS) 


Paper Size Sensor (PSU) 


Oil Sensor (OIL) 


Paper Sensor (EXF) 


Paper Sensor (PT2) 


OHP Sensor 3 (OHP) 


Waste Toner Sensor (WTS) 


Belt Sensor (DPJ) 


Toner Sensor ASSY 


Paper Sensor (F.CL) 


Developer Position Sensor 


Temperature Sensor for Fusing Unit 


Paper Full Sensor 



Fig.4-33 

(1 ) Control Block Diagram (Refer to Fig.4-33. 



No. 


Name 


Function 


1 


Sequence Control 


To control the sequence of printer operations. 


2 


Temperature Control 


To control the temperature of the fixing unit. 


3 


Toner Empty Sensing Control 


To detect the toner empty status of each 
toner cartridge. 


4 


Control Panel Control 


To control the control panel indications and 
the operational signals. 


5 


Error Processing Control 


To sense errors occurring in the printer and 
control the stop procedures. 


6 


Interface Control 


To control the receipt and transmission of the 
interface signals from the external controller. 


7 


Laser Control 


To control laser scanning and laser power. 



IV-34 



(2) Laser Drive Control Circuit 

Laser Drive Control Circuit (LDC) consists of the video signal input circuit, laser 
drive circuit, laser diode, output sensing circuit and output control circuit, as shown 
in Fig.4-34. 

<Operation> 

(1) When the video signal is received, the laser drive control circuit switches the 
laser diode according to the video signal data. 

(2) The radiated laser beam is sensed by the photo detector (PD) and the signal is 
fed back to the output control circuit. 

(3) The output control circuit controls the laser output to make the level constant by 
comparing the laser output with the feed-back value transmitted from the output 
sensing circuit. 

(4) The scanning laser beam is sensed by the beam detector (PD), then the beam 
detecting timing (BDT) signal is output. 



MCTL PWB 2 



PRINT Signal 



VIDEO Signal 



OPC Belt 



F-eLens 




Scanner Motor 



Fig.4-34 



IV-35 



(3) Control of the Fusing Temperature 

Each roller of the fusing unit is controlled to maintain the appropriate temperature 
so that toner will be fixed correctly onto the print paper. 



TH: 



RY: 



<Basic Structure of Temperature Control (Fig.4-35)> 

FLS: Thyristor to switch the power supply to the heat lamp. 

TFU1/TFU2 Temperature fuse to shut down the circuit for safety when the 
temperature becomes too hot within the fixing unit. 

Temperature sensor to detect the surface temperature of the 
heat roller (HR). 

Relay to prevent further heating when it becomes hotter than 
the set temperature within the fixing unit. 

Process circuit to control the temperature signal (micro 
computer). 

Sensor circuit for temperature signal (for ACOFF signal). 

Sensor circuit for temperature signal (for HON signal). 

Sensor circuit for temperature signal (for processing). 

Sensor circuit for shut-down by the thermistor (for THERR 
signal). 

Heat lamp for the heat roller. 

Heat lamp for the back-up roller. 



GA/CPU: 



CM1 
CM2 
CM3 
Q: 

HR: 
BR: 



CD 

i— 
=3 
-t— > 
Ctf 

i_ 
CD 
Q_ 

E 

CD 



< Signal Functions > 
HON-N To turn on/off the heater inside the fuser roller. 

ACOFF To turn off the relay RY1 if overheat occurs. 

THERR To detect the shut-down by the thermistor. 

AD To convert the temperature sensing signal to AD. 



<Controlled Temperature and Safety> 



(°C) 

4 






/ 



TPS 



TA 




150C TS 



-► Time 



IV-36 



<Basic Structure of Fuser Control> 



CO 

^1 



-> — o 



7F 



I 



O * 




CM3>— 4 



AD 




^ 




T 



Q 



Q 



RY-1 



ACOFF-P 



6 



Q 



PC, 



HON-N 



V V 



THERRACOFF HON 

GA/CPU 



RY-1 



FLS 



W 



Fusing Unit 



TFUi TFU2 



BR 



HR 



Fig.4-35 



TS: To maintain the temperature for fixing of the toner at approx. 

146°C by turning the thyristor on and off. 

TA: Reference temperature (approx. 185°C) to identify that it is 

excessively hot inside the fusing unit. When it reaches this 
point (approx. 185°C), the relay RY turns off, the power supply 
to the heat lamp is shut down and the printer stops operating. 

TPS: Limit temperature when the thermal fuse will start to melt and 

shut down the power supply to the heat lamp if the temperature 
control circuit should break down. When the thermal fuse 
melts, the printer will stop operating. 

<Safety Control by Temperature Control Signal> 

HO: When the THERR signal is input, the control panel indicates 

"HO", and the printer will stop operating. 

H2: If the temperature of the fixing unit does not reach the required 

point "T1" after a certain time, the control panel indicates "H2" 
and the printer will stop operating. 

H3: If the "Heater On" signal still continues after a certain time, the 

control panel indicates "H3", and the printer will stop operating. 

H4: If the temperature within the fusing unit becomes unusually hot 

and when ACOFF signal is input, the control panel indicates 
"H4", and the printer will stop operating. 



IV-38 



(4) Interface Control 
<General> 

(a) Interface Type 

This Document describes the Video and Command/Status Interface between 
Laser Printer Contriller (LPC) and engine controller. 

Printer controller acts as a slave to LPC. Through Video Interface, LPC 
controls the Printer & Control Panel using Command/Status communication and 
transmits the synchronized video data to Printer laser diode. Control Panel is 
physically resident on the engine. 

(b) Interface Connection 



Control 
Panel 



Duplex unit 
(Option) 



Lower Feeder(1) 
Unit (Option) 



Video Interface/ 

DC Power Supply Connector 



Printer 
Engine 
Controller 



-■£K 



DC Power Supply 



Laser Printer 

Controller 

(LPC) 

[Customer design] 



Host 
System 



Fig.4-36 

The interface connector of this laser printer is connected to the host system as 
shown in Fig.4-36. 



IV-39 



(c) Interface Circuit (Printer side) 



Table 4-1 : Interface Circuit 



No. 



Interface Circuit 



Signal Name 




• VIDEO-P 



Fast TTL 




150O 



• VIDEO-N 

• VIDEO-P 



M5M34050 




• HSYNC-N 

• HSYNC-P 



M5M34050 



22 Q 

— t — W 



+5V I | 

>220Q I 



T 
T 

SN74LS14 GND 



0.01 HF 330a - 



PRREQ-N 
COMMAND-N 
ID1-N 
ID2-N 



+5V 



74LS06 



3.3 KQ 



VSYNC-N 
IREADY-N 
STATUS-N 
KEY-STATUS-N 



IV-40 



(d) Connector Pin Assignment 

The connector in the printer to connect to the controller board is type 

128A-064S2B-:L14A (DDK) or the equivalent. 

Table 4-2: Connector Pin Assignment 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1A 


PSGND 


1B 


+5V-2 (Max 3A) 


2A 


PSGND 


2B 


+5V-2 (Max 3A) 


3A 


PSGND 


3B 


+5V-2D (Max 7A) 


4A 


PSGND 


4B 


+5V-2D (Max 7A) 


5A 


PSGND 


5B 


+5V-2D (Max 7A) 


6A 


PSGND 


6B 


+5V-2D (Max 7A) 


7A 


PSGND 


7B 


+5V-2D (Max 7A) 


8A 


PSGND 


8B 


+5V-2D (Max 7A) 


9A 


VIDEO-P 


9B 


VIDEO-N 


10A 


RET(GND) 


10B 


Reserve 


11A 


HSYNC-P 


11B 


HSYNC-N 


12A 


ID2-N 


12B 


Reserve 


13A 


RET(GND) 


13B 


VSYNC-N 


14A 


RET(GND) 


14B 


Reserve 


15A 


RET(GND) 


15B 


STATUS 


16A 


RET(GND) 


16B 


IREADY-N 


17A 


RET(GND) 


17B 


Reserve 


18A 


RET(GND) 


18B 


COMMAND 


19A 


RET(GND) 


19B 


PRREQ-N 


20A 


RET(GND) 


20B 


Reserve 


21A 


ID1-N 


21 B 


Reserve 


22A 


RET(GND) 


22B 


KEY_STATUS-N 


23A 


12C-CLK 


23B 


Reserve 


24A 


12C-DAT 


24B 


FRIRQPN 


25A 


RET(GND) 


25B 


Reserve 


26A 


RET(GND) 


26B 


Reserve 


27A 


RET(GND) 


27B 


Reserve 


28A 


RET(GND) 


28B 


Reserve 


29A 


RET(GND) 


29B 


Reserve 


30A 


RET(GND) 


30B 


Reserve 


31A 


RET(GND) 


31B 


Reserve 


32A 


RET(GND) 


32B 


Reserve 



IV-41 



2.3 Main PCB (Video Controller PCB) 

2.3.1 Outline 

The Main PCB consists of the circuits which perform the following functions; 

• Receive the printing data from the computer. 

• Convert the received data to the bitmap data such as characters or graphics. 

• Control the engine and send the generated bitmap data as a video signal. 

The control panel is controlled by communicating with the engine CPU to display LCD 
messages, light the LEDs and display the button status, etc. 

The power for the Main PCB is supplied from the engine through the engine interface 
connector. 



IV-42 



<Main PCB Block Diagram> 



+5v 
CDCC l/F 



RJ45 
10/100Base-TX 



[ 



USB 



+5v 



Compact Flash 



+5v o- 



+3.3v o- 



Regurator 
PQ30RV31 



Regurator 
PQ070XZ01Z 



+3.3v/+1.65v 



-o +3.3v 



-o +1.65v 



CPU 
TMPR4955-266 
(TX4955 266MHz) 



+5v/+3.3v i r 



+3.3v 



Network Board 
NC-4100 



PCI-BUS 



+5v 



IDE 

HARD DISK 



-I. IDE Data BUS 




CompactFlash Data BUS 



HCT245 



<h 



+5v/+3.3v 



Gate Array 
SLAC099HF1A 



Local Data BUS 
< ► 



+5v 



EEPROM 

M24C64 

64kbit 



Clock 

Generator 

C8750 



-►66MHz(CPU,SDRAM) 
-►33MHz(PCI) 



CPU-Address/Data MultiBUS 



-►48MHZ(GA) 

+3.3v 



ASIC 
MB87F4561 



CS.DQM 



LCX16347 
RAS.CAa r 

WE,MA '. 



~\> 



SLOT2 



SLOT1 



SLOTO 
DIMM 
(100pin) 
3slots 
H 348MB MAX 



Data BUS 



LCX16245 



L^ 



+3.3v 



Address BUS 



Address BUS 



MASK 
ROM 
32Mx2 
(8MB) 



+3.3v 



Flash 
ROM 
32Mx2 
(8MB) 



SN75C1168 



~<^< 



► =[> 



Hsync 



Video 



Command, PrReq 



Vsy nc, Status, I ready, Key Status 



+5v o- 



GND o- 



ENGINE l/F 



Fig.4-37 



IV-43 



2.3.2 



Circuit 

(1) 



CPU block 

• Model name: TMPR4955AF-266, 

MIPS 64bit RISC CPU manufactured by TOSHIBA 

• Clock speed: 66.7MHz (external) / 266MHz (internal) 

• Cache memory: 32KB (Command cache) / 32KB (Data cache) 

• Bus width: 32bit (external) / 64bit (internal) 

Internal Floating Point Unit (FPU) 

• Appearance: 160-pin QFP 



MF87F4561 manufactured by Fujitsu 
420pin BGA 



(2) ASIC block 

• Model name: 

• Appearance: 

• Functions: 

* Controls CPU 

* Controls memory 

* Controls interrupts 

* Timer 

* External interfaces (Centronics, BR-NET, IDE, Compact Flash, USB) 

* Engine interface (Video signal control) 

* Supports Software 



(3) Gate Array block 

• Model name: 

• Appearance: 

• Functions: 



SLAC099HF1A manufactured by Epson 

160pinQFP 

Engine control 



(4) ROM block 

The ROM stores the CPU control program and font data. ROMs used are an 
16Mbytes masked ROM, and an 8 Mbytes flash ROM which can be rewritten 
on the board. 



<Masked ROM> 

• Access time: 

• Appearance: 
<Flash ROM> 

• Model name: 

• Access time: 

• Appearance: 



less than 100nsec. (page access: less than 30nsec) 
48pin TSOP 

MBM29DL32BD-90 manufactured by Fujitsu 
less than 90nsec. 
48-pin TSOP 



IV-44 



(5) DIMM 

DIMM (Dual-inline-Memory-Module) allows memory extension by up to 
384MB. 

3 DIMM sockets are available. (1slot pre-installed 64MB DIMM) 
The following type of DIMM can be installed into each slot. 



• Appearance: 


100-pin 


• Memory type: 


SDRAM 


• Access time: 


PC66, CL2 


• Parity: 


either Parity or Non-parity can be used 


• Memory capacity 


16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB 


<Recommended DIMM type> 


* 16MB: TechworksPM-HP16M 


* 32MB: Techworks PM-HP 32M 


* 64MB: Techworks PM-HP 64M 



* 128MB:Techworks PM-HP 128M 

Any combination of DIMM size can be installed into any slot in any order but it 
is recommended that the larger DIMM is install in Slot 0. 



(6) External interface block 

• Centronics Interface 

• USB 

• Compact Flash 

• IDE Interface 



IV-45 



(7) Engine interface block 

The engine interface consists of the following signals; 

<IREADY> 

The signal indicating the engine is ready 

<PRREQ> 

Signal requesting printing from the controller 

<KEY_STATUS> 

Signal indicating that a key switch status on the control panel has changed. 

<VSYNC> 

Vertical synchronization signal for printing 

<HSYNC> 

Horizontal synchronization signal for printing 

<VIDEO> 

Video data signal 

<COMMAND> 

Command signal sent from the controller to the engine 

<STATUS> 

Status signal sent from the engine to the controller 

Fig.4-39 shows the timing of each signal after the power switch is turned on. 



PRREQ-N 



0.1 sec. MIN. 
15sec. MAX. 



/ V- 



3.0sec. MAX. for Continuous Printing 



) ( (K)data )( X" (C)data ~X X (M) data X X (Y) data X 




Fig.4-38 



IV-46 



The COMMAND signal and STATUS signal are the signals that are used to 
transfer the data between the controller and the engine, which perform as a 
half-duplex asynchronous serial communication. Refer to Fig.4-40. 

Stop bit 
Start bit 



I 



Parity bit 



COMMAND 



STATUS 



t 



t 



LSB 



MSB 



8ms (TYP) 



"> 



30ms (MAX) 



LSB 



MSB 



* 



Start bit 



7C A 
Parity bit 

Stop bit 



Fig.4-39 



Note: 

• Based on "Asynchronous Communication" method. 

• Command/Status communication must keep the "Handshake Rule". 

• Baud rate is 9600 bps. 

• Frame format: - one (1) start bit, 

- eight (8) data bits 

(Start bit side is LSB, Parity bit is MSB), 

- one (1) odd parity bit, 

- one (1) stop bit. 

The video controller has to send an "Initialize Command" to the engine controller 
after power on in order to establish communication. 

The power for the Main PCB is supplied through the engine interface 
connector. 



IV-47 



Main PCB Circuit Diagram (1/8) 



X 



:^x 




DivModel 
DivModeO 



-iz ^C104 X 3B 



U33 



M-LaIx 



3— I— S?— I— te— I— S— I— 



^ 









■Vcc 10-7 
■VccIO-14 
•VccIO-21 
■VCC 10-28 
■Vcc 10-40 
■Vcc 10-48 
Vcc 10-59 
Vcc 10-67 
VccIO-75 
•VCC 10-86 
■Vcc 10-88 
Vcc 10-95 
Vcc 10- 102 
Vcc 10- 109 
VccIO-116 
■VccIO-126 
■Vcc 10- 133 
■Vcc 10- 140 
VccIO-152 
VccIO-154 
VCC 10- 160 



> ^^ 






o T o TuTuyuT 



t ±LsJjB±s i 



■jL- . a T tr P"pr hff~ 

BLM21P300S nltj 



a 3 BLM21P 




GND-1 
GND-8 



GND-29 
GND-33 
GND-41 
GND-52 



GND-66 
GND-76 



Vcclnt-ll 
Vcclnt-18 
■VccInt-25 
■VccInt-32 
■VccInt-50 
■VccInt-65 
■Vcclnt-81 
■Vcclnt-91 
■VccInt-98 
■Vcclnt-105 
•VccInt-112 
■VccInt-123 
■VccInt-130 
■VccInt-136 
■VccInt-144 
■VccPLL 



GND-106 
GND-1 10 
GND-1 13 
GND-120 
GND-124 
GND-127 
GND-131 
GND-134 
GND-137 
GND-14: 
GND-145 
GND-153 



wlasterClock 



SysAD31 
SysAD30 
SysAD29 
SysAD28 
SysAD27 
SysAD26 
SysAD25 
SysAD24 
SysAD23 
SysAD22 
SysAD21 
SysAD20 
SysAD19 
SysADlB 
SysAD17 
SysAD16 
SysAD15 
SysAD14 
SysAD13 
SysAD12 
SysADll 
SysAD10 
SysAD9 
SysADB 
SysAD7 
SysAD6 
SysAD5 
SysAD4 
SysAD3 
SysAD2 
SysADl 
SysAD0 



SysCmdP 
SysCmd8 
SysCmd7 
SysCmd6 
SysCmdS 
SysCmd4 
SysCmd3 
SysCmd2 
SysCmdl 
SysCmd0 



_97__Apj_19] / 



4 RA55 , , 

CMD13] 

CMDl2l 

CMDlll 

CMD(0] 



TMPH4955AF-266 



PVALIDN m 



Dill] 



D191 



\ADl31j_j_g3 



\ADl25 



AD29 
AD28 
AD27 
AD26 
AD25 
AD24 
AD23 
AD22 
AD21 



■AD 19 
■AD 18 
■AD 17 
■AD 16 
■AD 15 
■AD 14 
■AD 13 
■AD 12 
■AD11 
■AD 10 
■AD09 



AD07 
AD06 



AD04 
AD03 
AD02 
AD01 
ADOO 



PVALIDN 




§ 1 tAAA^ 



33^yV Wp, A63 

, , "^AA^ ^^ 

p[10] ^ a 



^AAAh 2 - 



L ^yyyi a - 



-&ry 



^fAAAn 7 - 



aftVWf ^ 



j-tvyyTRAir 1 



^VYVf- 






■^•245 



CMD8 
CMD7 
CMD6 
CMD5 
CMD4 
CMD3 
CMD2 
CMD1 
CMD0 



ADR19 
ADR 18 
ADR 17 
ADR 16 
ADR 15 
ADR 14 
ADR13 
ADR 12 
ADR11 
ADR 10 
ADR09 
ADR08 
ADR07 
ADR06 
ADR05 
ADR04 
ADR03 
ADR02 



™nln-Rl 



V£3 



> s CMDl8l_ 
\CMDjjl_ 
, s CMDt6]_ 

^CMD_[5]_ 
CMDU1_ 
CMDt3l 
\CMDt2] 
\CMDtll 



-^AA^> 
^AA^> 



, 184 COLDRSTN 



-••COLDRSTN 
2A/B-3A 



-^vV 

R84 ; 
rAAAr- 



~Z. RA42 

-^yyyt^ 



A^V^ 



-^tVA p" I 






-^lAAA| r 33 I 



' RA49 4 L yyv p 3 3 - 

^-^6AA^33-^- 



- 2 tAAA ffjJ ^ 

-^LAAA| 6 3 3 I 



. cw RA44 

' 6 I ^L VW 



fc\AA| 5 33 i 






T-RMltAAA^a: 



-^lAAAi 5 33 I 



3 R85 BUSDIR 3~6B 

■VW »>eusDiR 

3-6B 



MB87F4561PB 



— MDI0-31] 
3-6A/7-1A 




U34 



HVSS-421 
HVSS-422 
HVSS-423 
HVSS-424 
HVSS-425 
HVSS-426 
HVSS-427 
HVSS-428 
HVSS-429 
HVSS-430 
HVSS-431 
HVSS-432 
HVSS-433 
HVSS-434 
HVSS-435 
HVSS-436 
HVSS-437 
HVSS-438 
HVSS-439 
HVSS-440 
HVSS-441 
HVSS-442 
HVSS-443 
HVSS-444 
HVSS-445 
HVSS-446 
HVSS-447 
HVSS-448 
HVSS-449 
HVSS-450 
HVSS-451 
HVSS-452 



HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-' 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 
HVSS-^ 



MB87F4561PB 



"tz^C104 ><5 



U34 



gzzLzgJ^-Lg-L 



VDDES-363 
VDDES-366 
VDDES-374 
VDDES-377 
VDDES-380 
VDDES-383 
VDDES-391 
VDDES-408 
VDDES-411 






yo 



s_Ls_L§_L^J_ 



M 11,1 



•QJ 



VDDI-354 
VDDI-357 
VDDI-358 
VDDI-360 
VDDI-361 
VDDI-365 
VDDI-369 
VDDI-375 
VDDI-378 
VDDI-382 
VDDI-3B6 
VDDI-388 
VDDI-392 
VDDI-394 
VDDI-395 
VDDI-397 
VDDI-399 
VDDI-400 
VDDI-403 



111 1 

8 TTT 5 T 

-tr ^C104 x 18 



-tr ^C104 x 12 



! TTT T 
*! 



*m — ^ 
jn "i 



.TTTT 



vss- 

VSS-26 
VSS-51 
VSS-76 
VSS-353 
VSS-356 
VSS-359 
VSS-364 
VSS-367 
VSS-370 
VSS-373 
VSS-376 
VSS-381 
VSS-384 
VSS-387 
VSS-390 
VSS-393 
VSS-39B 
VSS-401 
VSS-404 
VSS-407 
VSS-410 
VSS-414 
VSS-415 



VSSIO-4 
VSSIO-5 
VSSIO-37 
VSSIO-65 



VDDI-405 VSSIO-282 
VDDI-409 VSSIO-285 
VDDI-412 VSSIO-288 
VDDI-416 VSSIO-290 
VDDI-417 VSSIO-301 
VDDI-420 VSSIO-315 
VSSIO-320 
VSSIO-323 
VSSIO-324 
VSSIO-328 
VDDI03-2 VSSIO-334 
VDDI03-25 VSSIO-342 
VDDI03-57 VSSIO-344 
VDDI03-59 VSSIO-347 
VDDI03-67 VSSIO-362 
VDDI03-75 VSSIO-368 
VDDI03- 10 1VSSIO-402 
VDDI03-205VSSIO-4 19 
VDDI03-215 
VDDI03-284 
VDDI03-2B7 
VDDI03-291 
VDDI03-330 
VDDI03-349 
VDDI03-355 
VDDI03-372 
VDDI03-3B9 
VDDI03-396 
VDDI03-406 
VDDI03-413 



RVD 



VDDI05-236 
VDDI05-302 



NC128 
NC300 



ACF32 1825-223 



fT^ — f-y 



,J_ih 



H<l oB 

1SS355 



MB87F4561PB 



^T 



CODE 



NAME 



LJ8907001 



B512137CIR(1/8) 

I 12 



IV-48 



Main PCB Circuit Diagram (2/8) 



X 



:^x 



VCC5 




VC §- 
D5 ™ 



R368 
R369 




vcc: 



i* 



H<h 



s 



U31 PQ070 XZ01Z 
Vin VoiU" 



i— B — I 





HL-2B00C 


HL-3450C 


C223 


18P 


IBP 


R294 


100 Q 


100 Si 


XT3 


21. 315712MHz 


21.913000MHz 



LOCBRDN +- 
1D/8-2C/8-3A 




1-5F/4-2A/5-BC/6- 



2-23] 
•1A/8- 



ADR 12-231 
k^AO 



Monitor 

r,i ™3 



1-1A/7E/6-2E 
HSCLK »— 
5-5E 
LOCBRDN »— 
2C/B-2C/8-3A 



8-2C/8-3A 

CSDEBUGN *— 
2C/5-5D 



g aH S B5 - J 

m R157 
^1^ ' 



^ MA00 



-2-) RESETn 

-3-^ X21 
IORDn 
IOWRn 



£-} SCICSn 



-Z-C DBINTn 

B7B-PH-K-S 

Debug 



s°- 



ao- 



"a 



VCC3 
B3B-PH-K-S 




^T 



CODE 



NAME 



LJ8907001 



B512137CIR(2/8) 

I 12 



IV-49 



Main PCB Circuit Diagram (3/8) 



X 



:^x 



HAfB-IPL 



IORDN* 
1-5E/6-1, 



GND45 
GND39 
GND34 
GND28 
GND21 
GND15 
GND10 
GND4 



U22 



VCC7- 
VCC18- 
VCC31- 
VCC42- 



ji^A^ 

f z hAAAj 2 



CMAllll 7-2D 



JBj£_ 



^W^tf 

J3 a hAA/^ i 

3 i £ Kyy^ — 
^yyy^ 4 — 



R363 33 



TC74LCX16374AFT 



GND45 VCC7- 
GND39 VCC18- 
GND34 VCC31 
GND28 VCC42- 

GND21 
GND15 
GND10 
GND4 



1Q1 • WV »-ADIWEN 

3 7 R230 33 BDIWEN 7-5C 

1Q2 — * 'VW^?5 »"BDIWEN 

y R231 33 ADICASN 7-7C 

— • VW — ?5 »-ADICASN 

~ R251 qq ■'-'■■" 



ADIWEN 



-.c.j. --BDICASN 7-5C 

AAA/ " -BDICASN 

B252. 33 ADIRDN 7-7C 



^ADIRDN 

" BDIRDN 7-5C 

j= CDIRDN 

f 3 TTa 7- fi CSDRASN 7-7C 



^\AA- 



- • I VVVf^ »>CSDRASN 

12 Tpr.r? CSDCASN 7-3C 
• J rWVh55 ^-CSDCASN 

13 Tir.rfi CSDWEN 7-3C 
»'L WVfe ♦CSDWEN 

1/1 -v . _ ^ L 33 mTPnw 7-3C 



TC74LCX1B374AFT 



— * j rywf^ ♦££ 

14 T4 t-aT" R CDIRDN 7-3C 

— ^yyyf_ « 



J^M^ 



-CDIRDN 




-311 ■— 
5F/7-1A 



^T 



\D[22l 



v D[2ll 



U24 



-b VC104 



VCC-7 GND-4 
VCC-18GND-10 
VCC-31GND-15 
VCC-42GND-21 
1DIR GND-28 
2DIR GND-34 
GND-39 
GND-45 



-2AB 
-2A7 



2 T a^A"^ i Y DATAl31) 

3 7 -Tat p t data[30 1 
Fi E^" A -T3 T DATA|291 

33 „— — , ~DATAl28) 



^AA/j 



yvv j 1 * 



h^t^p 



DATA [27] 



7 ^"a"T 2 T DATA [26] 
33 J^.^n ▼DATAI25] 



3 R^~a-a- 1 YDATAI25] 
3 ' _z- _ . w nATA ( O/l 1 



33 5-Fa-a-4 T DATAl241 



^-gT-a^AA ^i ^ DATA ' 231 ^ 

^KAa Zj 3 l DATA[2il - 

^VSA ^ ^ DATA ' 201 



^33^AA& 



vAA^X 
vAAAj^-T 



DATA! 191 



33 7 -Ta-71 2 T DATAllSl 



33 R ^"a-a- 3 Y DATA ( 17 1 



74LCX16245MTDX 



33 5.-a~a-a-4 T DATAl161 




74LCX1B245MTDX 



CODE 



NAME 



LJ8907001 



B512137CIR(3/8) 

I 12 



IV-50 



Main PCB Circuit Diagram (4/8) 



X 



:^x 



CompactFlash 





HBUSY(nAutoFd) 
SELIN(nSelectln) 
IPRIME(nlnit) 
STB(nStrobe) 

BUSY (Busy) 
SLCTl Select) 
PE(PError) 
ACK(nAck) 
FLT(nFault) 

+5V(Peripharal Logic High) 

GND( Logic Gnd) 

GND( Chassis Gnd) 

GND ( Signa 1 Ground ( nStrobe ) ) 

GNDtSignal Ground ( Data 1 ) ) 

GND (Signal Ground ( Data2 ) ) 

GND (Signal Ground ( Data3 ) ) 

GND ( Signa 1 Ground ( Data4 ) ) 

GND (Signal Ground ( Data5 ) ) 

GND (Signal Ground ( Data6 ) ) 

GND ( Signa 1 Ground ( Data7 ) ) 

GNDlSignal Ground ( Data8 ) ) 

GNDlSignal Ground (PEmor. Select. nAck ) ) 

GNDtSignal Ground ( Busy. nFault) ) 

GNDtSignal Ground (nAutoFd. nSelectln. nlnit) ) 

DI0(Datal) 
DIl(Data2) 
DI2(Data3) 
DI3(Data4) 
DI4(Data5) 
DI5(Data6) 
DI6(Data7) 
DI7(Data8) 

NClNot Defined) 
NClNot Defined) 
NClNot Defined) 
NClNot Defined) 



•WAIT: -WAIT :IORDY 



WP:-I0IS16=-I0IS16 




IV-51 



CODE 



NAME 



LJ8907001 



B512137CIR(4/8) 

I 12 



Main PCB Circuit Diagram (5/8) 



X 



:^i 



IV-52 



PCI (BR-NET) 




10k X IB 



IDE ( HDD ) 
CN7 



1-5F/2- 1D/4-2A/6- 1 A/8-3A 1 




SN74HCT245PW 




men — ^ 

men — 45-< 



71 



G^b 



-12-X3D8 



-12* XS 



-14_>OD10 
-15-^DDll 

-22-XDD13 
-22^<DD14 



DIOWn 
3I0RDY 



l~NC~l S^-XXX 

men — s^xx 
men — ^<xx 

men 2-XXX 

l~NC~l 3-><XX 

men ^-xxx 

men — 5-xxx 
men — s-*xx 



DMARQ 
DMACKn 



:sel 

=DIACn 
DASP 



CODE 



NAME 



LJ8907001 



B512137CIR(5/8) 

I 12 



Main PCB Circuit Diagram (6/8) 



X 



:^x 





U15 


64M MASK 


32M MASK 


MCRONICS 


SAMSUNG 


R227 


x 


x 


O 


R219 


O 


x 


x 


R218 


x 


O 


O 




U6 


64M MASK 


32M MASK 


MCRONICS 


SAMSUNG 


R169 


x 


x 


O 


R161 


O 


X 


X 


R160 


x 


O 


O 



U16 


64M FLASH 


32M FLASH 


16M FLASH 




U7 


64M FLASH 


32M FLASH 


16M FLASH 


FUJITSU 


TOSHIBA 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


FUJITSU 


TOSHIBA 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


R221 


X 


O 


o 


X 


O 


X 


R163 


X 


O 


o 


X 


o 


X 


R222 


O 


O 


o 


O 


x 


x 


R164 


O 


o 


o 


O 


x 


x 


R223 


O 


x 


x 


X 


X 


X 


R165 


O 


X 


x 


X 


x 


X 


R220 


O 


x 


x 


O 


x 


O 


R162 


O 


x 


x 


O 


x 


O 


R224 


x 


O 


x 


x 


x 


x 


R166 


x 


o 


x 


x 


x 


x 


R225 


O 


x 


x 


O 


x 


O 


R167 


O 


x 


x 


O 


x 


O 


R226 


o 


O 


O 


O 


X 


O 


R168 


o 


o 


O 


O 


x 


O 


C101 


o 


x 


x 


O 


x 


O 


C76 


o 


x 


x 


O 


x 


O 



U12 


32M FLASH 


16M FLASH 


8M FLASH 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


R195 


o 


x 


o 


x 


x 


x 


R196 


o 


O 


x 


x 


x 


x 


R199 


X 


o 


X 


O 


X 


X 


R197 


x 


o 


x 


O 


x 


O 


R198 


O 


o 


x 


O 


X 


O 


C95 


x 


o 


x 


O 


x 


O 




U9 


32M FLASH 


16M FLASH 


8M FLASH 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


FUJITSU 


INTEL 


R181 


o 


x 


o 


X 


X 


X 


R182 


o 


O 


x 


x 


x 


x 


R185 


x 


o 


X 


O 


X 


X 


R183 


x 


o 


x 


O 


x 


O 


R184 


o 


o 


X 


O 


X 


O 


C87 


x 


o 


x 


O 


x 


O 



U13 


16M FLASH 


8M FLASH 


16M MASK 


8M MASK 




U10 


IBM FLASH 


8M FLASH 


16M MASK 


8M MASK 


R8 


o 


x 


O 


x 


R7 


o 


x 


o 


x 


R208 


o 


O 


x 


x 


R186 


o 


O 


x 


x 



^T 



CODE 



NAME 



LJ8907001 



B512137CIR(6/8) 

I 12 



IV-53 



Main PCB Circuit Diagram (7/8) 



X 



_^i 



dimm (si_ot0) 



CC3 



J3l30) 
D(3ll 



SDCSN1 






^*3Q4 
-8*DQ5 
-^306 



■54^<DQ10 
-^-^<XI11 
-SZ-XX112 

-5a^<3Qi3 

■59-XXU4 
-S0^<XI15 
-3S^<X116 
-3%<XI17 

■41^<DQ19 



3^<DQ21 
5-XDQ22 



*DQ24 



-SS->OQ25 



*M26 



BTHTi 



T = 



rz 



CSDRASN » 
3-3E 
CSDCASN »— 



-4B-*3DA 
^3CL 



3N0/RASN0/E0 
3N1/RASN1/E1 
3N2/RASN2/E2 
3N3/RASN3/E3 



-!2-> 3A1/A12 
-SB-> 3A0/A11 



A13/N0tUse/A15 
A12/NotUse/A14 
All/A 13 
A 10. AP/A10 
A9 



-Z^> VDD 



-M VSS 
-12-< VSS 



-2S-< VSS 
-35-< VSS 
-^2-< VSS 
-51^ VSS 
-S2_< vss 
-Z5_< vss 
-S§-< vss 
-S2-< vss 



2Z-> :KE0/NotUse 
:KEl/NotUse 



2S-> MotUse/OE 



=IASN/NotUse 
lASN/NotUse 
CN/WEN/NotUse 



HCl 23*:|FU 

men — s^^fu 
men — IA * ^fu 



men — B2-*« 
men — 33-xmc 
men — 83-xmc 



men 1 3g > <^ic[c80] 
:lc8il 

:(C82l 
:[C83l 

men 1 34 > <kic[cs4] 
men — b^mcicss] 
men — 35-x«[c86i 
men — B5-x«[cs7i 



men — s 2 -^ mEF/Notuse 



\D[3l_ 



\D[8l 



■25-> 3K0/NotUse 
-Z5-> CKl/NotUse 



1 (sLOTl) 

VCC3 



\D[17] 



J3[22] 
Dl23l 



MMB0/CASN0/NotUse 
DQMBl/CASNl/NotUse 
DQMB2/CASN2/NotUse 
DQMB3/CASN3/NotUse 




-^*>Q3 
^*X34 
-8-*>Q5 
-2^X36 



^<DQ10 
5-X3Q11 



^H^<DQ13 
53^<DQ14 
■S0^<DQ15 
■2S-^<X116 

^9-X>ai7 

-42-* XI 18 
4i^<DQ19 



-XXI20 



£9_XXI24 
^<DQ25 



&>- 



rz 



3N0/RASN0/E0 
3N1/RASN1/E1 
3N2/RASN2/E2 
3N3/RASN3/E3 



-i 9 -^ 3A1/A12 
■£9-> 3A0/A11 



A13/NotUse/A15 
A12/NotUse/A14 
All/A 13 
A10. AP/A10 



■2^> YDO 
■^> */DD 

■36-> l/DD 



■> rtDD 



2Z-> 3KE0/NotUse 
:KEl/NotUse 



Z8_> vbtUse/OE 



^ASN/NotUse 
:ASN/NotUse 
rfEN/WEN/NotUse 



men — 23^<rfu 
men — 24*^ 
men — z^toj 



men — 32^<mc[i 
men — aa*«i 
men — 33-*mci 
men — s^-x^ci 
men — s^mci 
men — b^-xmcickj 
men — 25-xmc[c86] 
men — s5-xmc[c87] 



men — 22 ^ »/REF/Notuse 



-23-> 3K0/NotUse 
-^-> ZKl/NotUse 



DQMB0/CASN0/NotUse 
XIMBl/CASNl/NotUse 
DQMB2/CASN2/NotUse 
DQMB3/CASN3/N0tUse 



;tc8i] 

:[C82l 

;[C83l 
;[C84l 



^r 



DIMM (SLOTS) 




DIMMSDA ^ 
2C/4C/8-3E n 

DIMMSCL m-^ 
2C/4C/8-3E 



i*Xll 
4 -^<DQ2 



-3-XDQ3 
-Z-*XJ4 
-&*XE 
-9-*X6 
A2-XXI7 
52-*XI8 



■34^<DQ10 
■SLfcXJll 
■SZ-X3Q12 
■5B-*XI13 
^-*X114 

■3B-*M16 
■3S-^<DQ17 
-42-*X118 
■41^X119 



5S_^<3Q24 



&>- 



t£ 



^,,3 30 BDIWEN 

BDIWEN»> 

3-3D 



2-5D 
SDDQMI0] 



3N0/RASN0/E0 
3N1/RASN1/E1 
3N2/RASN2/E2 
3N3/RASN3/E3 



-i 9 -^ 3A1/A12 
■£9-> 3A0/A11 



13/NotUse/A15 
12/NotUse/A14 
11/A13 

A10. AP/A10 

A9 



■21^ VDD 
-3^> VDD 



-^VDD 



■21^ VDD 



■> VDD 



2Z-> :KE0/NotUse 
CKEl/NotUse 



ZS-> slotUse/OE 



3ASN/NotUse 
:ASN/NotUse 
CN/WEN/NotUse 



men — 23*^11 
men — 2±*tu 
men — z 4 -*™ 



men — 32-xsici! 
men — B2_x*:i 
men — s^-x^ci 
men — s^-x^jci 
men — 3^<ci 
men — 84_><vic[cb5] 
men — 3^<vc[c86] 
men — b5-*vic[c87] 



men — 2£ -> ^REF/Notuse 



-25^ 3K0/NotUse 
-Z5-> CKI/Notuse 



DQMB0/CASN0/NotUse 
DQMBl/CASNl/NotUse 
DQMB2/CASN2/NotUse 
3QMB3/CASN3/N0tUse 



:[C8ll 
:[C82l 
:[C83l 
:[C84l 






-RAS^Wfl^r' 









-RA23t^^fI0l^ H, 






^Wyyf^-' 



CODE 



NAME 



LJ8907001 



B512137CIR(7/8) 

I 12 



IV-54 



Main PCB Circuit Diagram (8/8) 



X 



:^x 




LOCBRDN y 
LOCBWHN Z> 



) 41 7 R1 ^ V V 3 L0CBR0N .LOCBRDN 
40 w R144 33 I OCBWRN 2-1D/2-2C/3A 



MB87F45B1PB 



VSYNCN ►■ 
4-1D/5-2C 



X ia? 



|^v-J^ 



B°- 



U25 



VDD-1 VSS-40 

VDD-41 VS 

VDD-81 VSS-120 

VDD-121 VSS-1B0 



VDD3I01 
VDD3I02 





§ 


a 


a 


' ■» ' 


§ 


a 


a 


§ 


a 


1 ■* 


























ih 


ih 


ih 


Ih 


Ih 


ih 


ih 


ih 


^ 


Ih 


8 


1 


1 


§ 


§ 


^ 


s 


§ 


§ 


1 





VDD5I01 
VDD5I02 
VDD5I03 
VDD5I04 
VDD5I05 
VDD5I06 
VDD5I07 
VDD5I08 
VDD5I09 
VDD5IO10 



VSSI01 
VSSI02 
VSSI03 
VSSI04 
VSSI05 
VSSI06 
VSSI07 
VSSI08 
VSSI09 
VSSIO10 



RVI2/FSNC CCLK/XLGT 

MSEN/SYNC CRYN/XSNC 

MRSTN/XCLK 

MIOD0/XARKD0 
MIOD1/XARKD1 
MI0D2/XARKD2 
MI0D3/XARKD3 
MICD4/XARKD4 
MICD5/XARKD5 
MI0D6/XARKD6 
MIOD7/XARKD7 





NON PAGE 


PAGE 


R241 


O 


x 


R240 


x 


O 




SLAC099F1A(LJ82S4) 





7-2C/7-4C/7-6C 



ENGINE C NGINTN 



SLAC099F1A(LJ8284 




1—^^ 



I R330 



, i_c23f]]iJ?£iaiJ 



(h ra3£ AA/v 0j2_^JX_ 



-^ 






^T 



CODE 



NAME 



LJ8907001 



B512137CIR(8/8) 

I 12 



IV-55 



2.4 Power Supply Unit 

(1) Outputs and Use 



Output Terminal 


Rated Output 


Use 


+5V-1 


+5V, 2A 


For control of the printer. 


+5V-1 R 


For control of the laser. 


+5V-2 
+5V-2D 


+5V, 8A MAX 


For control of the interface. (8A MAX) 


+24V-1 


+24V, 6.5A 


For control of printer charging. 


HP 
HN 


120V, 8A 1000W 
220V, 5A 1000W 


For connection of the fuser heater (HP). 
For connection of the fuser heater (HN). 



(2) Layout of Connector Pin Assignment 
See Fig.4-40 on the following page. 



IV-56 



Layout of Connector Pin Assignment - Power Supply Unit - 



O O O 
O Q O 


\ 


J32 


o 




Fig.4-40 



IV-57 



(3) Connector Pin Assignment 
ACN1 





Manufacture: MoLex Type: 5331 3-281 5 






Pin No 


Signal Name 


Interface 


Pin No 


Signal Name 


Interface 


1 


+5V-1 


+5V-1 Output 


2 


DCOFF2-P 


+5V-2D OFF Signal 


3 


+5V-1 


+5V-1 Output 


4 


SGND 


Signal Ground 
(+5V type ground) 


5 


+5V-D 


+5V-D Output 


6 


SGND 


Signal Ground 
(+5V type ground) 


7 


+5V-D 


+5V-D Output 


8 


SGND 


Signal Ground 
(+5V type ground) 


9 


ACSYNC-N 


AC Zero-Cross Signal 
(Open Collector Output). 


10 


SGND 


Signal Ground 
(+5V type ground) 


11 


+24V 


+24V Output 
connesponding to 
Door Switch. 


12 


DCOFF1-P 


OFF Signal 
(Pull-up required) 


13 


+5V-1R 


+5V through the relay when 
+24V-1 is shut down. 


14 


ACOFF-P 


AC Forced Shut-Down 
Signal (Pull-Up required). 


15 


HON-N 


Heater On Signal 
(Pull-up required). 


16 


Testl2 


Terminal for Dielectric 
Strength Test. 


17 


+24V-1 


+24V Output through Door 
Switch. 


18 


Test02 


Terminal for Dielectric 
Strength Test. 


19 


+24V-1 


+24V Output through Door 
Switch. 


20 


TestM 


Terminal for Dielectric 
Strength Test. 


21 


+24V-1 


+24V Output through Door 
Switch. 


22 


TestOI 


Terminal for Dielectric 
Strength Test. 


23 


+24V-1 


+24V Output through Door 
Switch. 


24 


PGND 


Power Ground 
(+24V type ground) 


25 


PGND 


Power Ground 
(+24V type ground) 


26 


PGND 


Power Ground 
(+24V type ground) 


27 


PGND 


Power Ground 
(+24V type ground) 


28 


PGND 


Power Ground 
(+24V type ground) 



ACN1 

Manufacture: MoLex Type: 53324-0710 



Pin No 


Signal Name 


Interface 


Pin No 


Signal Name 


Interface 


1 


+5V-1 


+5V-1 Output 


2 


+5V-D 


+5V-D Output 


3 


SGND 


Signal Ground 
(+5V type ground) 


4 


+24V-2 


+24V-2 Output 


5 


+24V-2 


+24V-2 Output 


6 


PGND 


Power Ground 
(+24V type ground) 


7 


PGND 


Power Ground 
(+24V type ground) 









IV-58 



ACN2 

Manufacture: MoLex Type: 5277-02A 



Pin No 


Signal Name 


Interface 


Pin No 


Signal Name 


Interface 


1 


DSW-0 


+24V Output through 
Door Switch. 


2 


DSW-I 


+24V Output through 
Door Switch. 



ACN3 

Manufacture: MoLex Type: 5566-08A 



Pin No 


Signal Name 


Interface 


Pin No 


Signal Name 


Interface 


1 


SWRUS-P 


Power Supply (OPEN) 


2 


+5V-2 


+5v-2 Output 


3 


+5V-2D 


+5V-2D Output 


4 


+5V-2D 


+5V-2D Output 


5 


+24VDO-N 


+24V Door Open 


6 


SGND 


Signal Ground 
(+5V type ground) 


7 


SGND 


Signal Ground 
(+5V type ground) 


8 


SGND 


Signal Ground 
(+5V type ground) 



IV-59 



2.5 High Voltage Power Supply Unit 

(1 ) Outputs and Function 



No. 






Power Supply (P/S) 


Function 


P/S 
Name 


Approx. Output Voltage 
Max (V) 


Approx. Output 
Typical (V) 


1 


Charging 


CHV(-) 


-7kV Max 
-650>A 


-5.5kV 
-550nA 


2 


First Transfer 


CBV(-) 


-1200V Max 


-600V 
-1 .5nA 


3 


Developing 
Bias 


Y,M 


DBV(-A) 


-1600V Max 


-240V 
-1 .5|iA 


C,K 


DBV(-B) 


-1600V Max 


4 


Second Transfer 


THV(+) 


4.0kV Max 


1.3kV 
1.3^A 


5 


Transfer Roller 
Cleaning 


THV(-) 


-1500V Max 


-800V 
-0.8nA 


6 


Paper Discharging 


ACV(~) 


5.5kV Max 


4.9kV 


DCV(+) 


-800V Max 


-800V 


7 


Drum Cleaning 


FCBV 


1200VMax 


500V 
10^A 



(2) Layout of Connector Pin Assignment 
See Fig.4-41 on the following page. 



IV-60 



Layout of Connector Pin Assignment - High Voltage Power Supply Unit 



sm ^v^ ^ pa ««> cO list 

i}^Sr S «■■""■ 

S± _ll- ittt 




Fig.4-41 



IV-61 



(3) Connector Pin Assignment 
BCN1 

Manufacture: MoLex 
Type: 53313-1815 



Pin # 


Signal Name 


Interface 


1 


+24V-1 


+24V-1 


2 


PGND 


PGND 


3 


FUCHK 


Sensor Signal of Fusing Unit 
Installation. 


4 


PGND 


PGND 


5 


ACVON-N 


AC Output ON Signal. 


6 


PWMON-N 


PWM Control ON Signal. 


7 


CHVON-ON 


CHV Output ON Signal. 


8 


CHVERR 


CHV ERROR Sensor Signal. 


9 


CBVPWM-N 


CBV PWM Control Signal. 


10 


THVRON-N 


THV ON Signal 


11 


DBVYMPWM-N 


DBV PWM Control Signal. 


12 


THVPWM-N 


THV PWM Control ON Signal. 


13 


DBVCKPWM-N 


CBV PWM Control Signal. 


14 


THV-I 


Transfer Voltage Select Signal. 


15 


FCBVPWM-N 


FCBV PWM Control Signal. 


16 


TH1 


Termistor Temperature Sensor 
Signal. 


17 


AC DCON-N 


AC, DC Control Signal 


18 


TH2 


Termistor Temperature Sensor 
Signal. 



IV-62 



2.6 Wiring Diagram 



I0D1 PWB 2 



HIGH VOLTAGE UNIT 



BCN1 



LJ 



EXF 



Cooling Fan (EX) 2 ^ S=^ 

Paper Sensor (EXF) 
Paper Sensor (F.CL) 
Paper Sensor 



^ 



FCL | ^ ^- 



PT2 



^ 




Toner Key Sensor 2 | TNK | |=i - 



Belt Sensor 
Oil Sensor 
Belt Sensor 



|DPJ | ^^- 



| OIL | ^ ^- 



| PBS | |=» - 



Paper Discheygen 



i S-Charger 



FUSING UNIT 



Fuser 
Connector 



41 



J=l TH 



Thermistor 



3 



HR.Heater 



BR. Heater 



HP 



HN 



<r\s> 

<f\s> 



>^ 



TFU 1 



TFU2 



HP 



© 




To Duplex Unit 



AC IN PUT 



SL2 PS Fan ^ 

CTFAN (1 C 



O^- 



-^- To IOD2 ECN2 



^ *E 



DCN10 DCN9 



DCN13 



DCN14 



IDCN15 
DCN16 



DCN4 



DCN17 DCN2 

DCN1 




LOWER PAPER FEEDER UNIT (LFU) 



(DM) Developer 
1 ; Motor 2 



© 



i=|T|= |~Erase Lamp"] 

I | | TPD | Toner Sensor 
Toner Sensor 



I | | PEL | Paper Sensor 



l= | | PSL~| Paper Size Sensor 2 
f PCLL) Paper Pick-up Clutch 



TTR 



LF3 Clutch D 



RT RT Sensor 



PSU 



Paper Size Sensor 2 



^ Interlock Switch (Top) 
^- Interlock Switch (Rear) 



,® 



- §=1 | OHP"| OHP Sensor 3 



L^ ^ | PEU~| Paper Sensor (P. EN) 
l | | Pfl~| Paper Sensor 



Control 
PCB 



^ N4 ^N1 ^3 ^ 



/€N2 




POWER SUPPLY UNIT 



DSW1 




ler 




© 



EN | Paper Sensor (D. EN) 



CN DUP 



-J DUP-2 
Duplex Unit 



DUPCN 



IOD2 PWB 2 



-►To Duplex Unit 



& MCTL PWB 2 

PANEL PWB 



Lexmark 

CONTROL 

PANEL 



Developer /TT^\_ 
Clutch 2 K (UULKJZZh- 

Developer /^~7^\ 
Clutch 2 Y (DCLYJrZr- 

Developer /^T^N 
Clutch 2 M \DCLMpZr- 

Developer fr, r , A- 
Clutch2C^ DCLC] - 



© 




Wast Toner , r 

Sensor (LED) l TBLE l 

Wast Toner 
Sensor (TR) 



TBFL 



1 



Main 
Motor 2 

/mm 



\ WW 1 ff# 1 lBgB 3 

ECN16® © © 
| @ ECN14 ECN13 € 



] 9 , wm 3 ,fiE3* , $jQ 



,_ Drn Cleaner 
FBCL J Clutch 3 



TR Cam 
Clutch 3 



FUCL) Fixing 
Clutch 



°<*vECN17 



ECN12 ECN11ECN10 E ^ 



SCANNER UNIT 



[f?( 



SCM 

Scanner 
Motor 



PDU 
PCB 



LCN 

LDU PCB 




TR Cam 
Clutch 3 



RFrn R egistratio 
RECL, Clutch 



Interlock Switch 



IV-63 



Cooling 



Developer Developer Developer 
FanOZ :Senso M Senso™ Solenoid Unit 



Paper 
Pick-up Clutch 



(1) DCN2: I0D1 PWB 2 - Power Supply Unit ACN1 (30 pins) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+5v-1 


2 


DCOFF2-P 


3 


+5v-1 


4 


SGND 


5 


+5v-D 


6 


SGND 


7 


+5v-D 


8 


SGND 


9 


ACSYNC-N 


10 


SGND 


11 


+24 


12 


DCOFF1-P 


13 


+5v-1 R 


14 


ACOFF-P 


15 


HON-N 


16 


TESTI2 


17 


+24V-1 


18 


TEST02 


19 


+24V-1 


20 


TESTI1 


21 


+24V-1 


22 


TEST01 


23 


+24V-1 


24 


PGND 


25 


PGND 


26 


PGND 


27 


PGND 


28 


PGND 


29 


DCOFF3-P 


30 


NC 


(2) DCN17: IOD1 PWB 2 - High Voltage Unit BCN1 (18 pins) 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


PGND 


3 


ACVERR 


4 


PGND 


5 


ACVON-N 


6 


PWMON-N 


7 


CHVON-N 


8 


CHVERR 


9 


CBVPWM-N 


10 


THVRON-N 


11 


DBV (MC) PWM-N 


12 


THVPWM-N 


13 


DBV (KY) PWM-N 


14 


THV-I 


15 


FCBVPWM-N 


16 


(Reserved) 


17 


AC_DCON-N 


18 


(Reserved) 



(3) DCN3: For Factory Use Only (4 pins) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


TEST01 


2 


TESTI1 


3 


TEST02 


4 


TESTI2 



(4) DCN5: IOD1 PWB 2 - Interlock Switch 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


REARDOPEN-P 


2 


NC 


3 


TOPDOPEN-P 



IV-64 



(5) I1CN1: 


MCTL PWB 2 - IOD1 PWB 2 DCN1 (50 pins) 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


I/OAD2 


2 


DMON-N 


3 


I/OAD1 


4 


DCOFF1-P 


5 


I/OAD0 


6 


DMCLK 


7 


I/ODATA3 


8 


ACVON-N 


9 


I/ODATA2 


10 


CHVON-N 


11 


I/ODATA1 


12 


PWMON-N 


13 


l/ODATAO 


14 


CBVPWM-N 


15 


LEDON-N 


16 


DBV (MC) PWM-N 


17 


DMRDY-N 


18 


DBV (KY) PWM-N 


19 


I/ODATA4 


20 


FCBVPWM-N 


21 


(Reserved) 


22 


THVRON-N 


23 


AC_DCON-N 


24 


THVPWM-N 


25 


PKCLL10N-P 


26 


THV-I 


27 


ELON-P 


28 


(Reserved) 


29 


PBSEN-N 


30 


(Reserved) 


31 


HPSEN-N 


32 


OILLES-P 


33 


CTFANON-P 


34 


(Reserved) 


35 


HTFANON-P 


36 


HON-N 


37 


+5v-1 R 


38 


ACOFF-P 


39 


SGND 


40 


ACSYNC-N 


41 


SGND 


42 


+24 


43 


SGND 


44 


PGND 


45 


+5v-1 


46 


PGND 


47 


+5v-1 


48 


+24v-1 


49 


+5v-D 


50 


+24v-1 



(6) DCN10: IOD1 PWB 2 - IOD2 PWB 2 ECN2 (10 pins) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


+24v-1 


3 


+24v-1 


4 


PGND 


5 


PGND 


6 


PGND 


7 


+5v-1 


8 


SGND 


9 


SGND 


10 


+5v-S 



IV-65 



(7) DCN4: I0D1 PWB 2 - Paper Sensor (D.EN), Paper Sensor (PT1 ) 

Paper Sensor (P.EN), OHP Sensor 3 (OHP) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+5v-S 


2 


HPSEN-N 


3 


SGND 


4 


+5v-S 


5 


PT1-N 


6 


SGND 


7 


+5v-S 


8 


PEU-P 


9 


SGND 


10 


+5v-S 


11 


OHPSENU 


12 


SGND 


13 


SGND 







(8) DCN6: IOD1 PWB 2 - Paper Size Sensor 2 (PSU) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+5v-D 


2 


PSU1 


3 


PSU2 


4 


PSU3 


5 


PSU4 


6 


PSU5 


7 


SGND 


8 


TH3 



(9) DCN7: IOD1 PWB 2 - Toner Sensor (Y, M, C, K), Erase Lamp 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


TLES (K)-P 


2 


TLES (Y)-P 


3 


TLES (M)-P 


4 


TLES (C)-P 


5 


TLES-G 


6 


SGND 


7 


LEDON-P 


8 


TLESCHK 


9 


SGND 


10 


+24V-1 


11 


ELON-N 







(10) DCN18:IOD1 PWB2-SL2 PS Fan 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


CTFANON-P 


2 


PGND 


3 


CTFANERR 







IV-66 



(1 1 ) DCN8: I0D1 PWB2 - Lower Paper Feeding Unit 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


PKCLL10N-N 


3 


FDCLL10N-N 


4 


PSL1 


5 


PSL2 


6 


PSL3 


7 


PSCST1 


8 


PEL1-P 


9 


OCST1-N 


10 


NC 


11 


+5v-D 


12 


SGND 


13 


NC 


14 


+24v-1 


15 


NC 


16 


NC 


17 


NC 


18 


NC 


19 


NC 


20 


NC 


21 


NC 


22 


NC 


23 


NC 


24 


+5v-D 


25 


SGND 


26 


SGND 



(12) DCN14:IOD1 PWB 2- Paper Sensor (PT2), Paper Sensor (F.CL) 

Paper Sensor (EXF), Cooling Fan (EX) 2 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+5v-S 


2 


PT2-N 


3 


SGND 


4 


+5v-S 


5 


CLROL-N 


6 


SGND 


7 


+5v-S 


8 


PEFULL-N 


9 


SGND 


10 


HTFANON-P 


11 


PGND 


12 


HTFANERR 



(1 3) DCN1 6: IOD1 PWB 2 - Belt Sensor (PBS), Oil Sensor (OIL), Belt Sensor (DPJ) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


PBSEN-N 


2 


+5v-1 


3 


SGND 


4 


OILLES-P 


5 


+5v-1 


6 


SGND 


7 


PDSEN-P 


8 


+5v-S 


9 


SGND 


10 


NC 



IV-67 



(14) I2CN: 


MCTL PWB 2 - IOD2 PWB 2 ECN1 (22 pins) 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


DCL (C) ON-P 


2 


DCL (M) ON-P 


3 


DCL (Y) ON-P 


4 


DCL (K) ON-P 


5 


PSL (KY) ON-P 


6 


PSL (MC) ON-P 


7 


MMCLK 


8 


MMON-N 


9 


MMREV-N 


10 


MMENC 


11 


RECLON-P 


12 


AHUMB 


13 


ISCK 


14 


I DATA 


15 


I LOAD 


16 


FBCLON-P 


17 


FBSLON-P 


18 


TRSLON-P 


19 


OZFANON-P 


20 


FUCLON-P 


21 


PKCLU10N-P 


22 


(Reserved) 



(1 5) ECN1 6: IOD2 PWB 2 - Developer Clutch 2 (C) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


DCL (C) ON-N 







(1 6) ECN15: IOD2 PWB 2 - Developer Clutch 2 (M) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


DCL (M) ON-N 







(1 7) ECN14: IOD2 PWB2 - Developer Clutch 2 (Y) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


DCL (Y) ON-N 







(1 8) ECN13: IOD2 PWB2 - Developer Clutch 2 (K) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


DCL (K) ON-N 







(19) ECN5:IOD2PWB2- Developer Position Sensor 1, Developer Position Sensor 2 

Developer Solenoid Unit (MC), Developer Solenoid Unit (KY) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+5v-S 


2 


GHPSENI-N(MC) 


3 


SGND 


4 


+5v-S 


5 


GHPSEN2-N (KY) 


6 


SGND 


7 


PSL (MC) ON-N 


8 


+24v-1 


9 


+24v-1 


10 


PSL (KY) ON-N 


11 


NC 







IV-68 



(20) ECN9: 


OD2 PWB2 - Fixing Clutch (FUCL) 




Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


FUCLON-N 







(21 ) ECN1 1 : IOD2 PWB2 - Cleaner Clutch 3 (FBCL) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


FBCLON-N 







(22) ECN3: IOD2 PWB2 - Cooling Fan OZ 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


OZFANON-P 


2 


PGND 


3 


OZFANERR 







(23) ECN7: IOD2 PWB2 - Registration Clutch (RECL) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


RECLON-N 







(24) ECN17: IOD2 PWB2 - Waste Toner Sensor (WTS) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


TBFL1-N 


2 


SGND 


3 


WTLEDON 


4 


SGND 



(25) ECN10:IOD2PWB2-TR Cam Clutch 3 (FBCM) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


NC 


4 


FBSLON-N 



(26) ECN8:IOD2PWB2 - TR Cam Clutch 3 (TRCM) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


NC 


4 


TRSLON-N 



(27) ECN&IOD2PWB2- Paper Pick-up Clutch (PCLU) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+24v-1 


2 


NC 


3 


PKCLU10N-N 







IV-69 



(28) ECN12:IOD2PWB2- Main Motor 2 




Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


MMRDY-N 


2 


MMON-N 


3 


MMCLK 


4 


PGND 


5 


+24v-1 


6 


SGND 


7 


+5v-1 


8 


MMENC 


9 


MMREV-N 







(29) DCN9: IOD1 PWB2 - Developer Motor 2 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


DMRDY-N 


2 


DMON-N 


3 


DMCLK 


4 


PGND 


5 


PGND 


6 


+24v-1 


7 


+24v-1 


8 


SGND 


9 


+5v-1 







(30) I3CN: 


MCTL PWB 2 - IOD1 


=>WB2DCN13(10pins) 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


NC 


2 


(Reserved) 


3 


DCOFF3-N 


4 


(Reserved) 


5 


CTFANERR 


6 


ID01VOFF-P 


7 


TH3 


8 


DCOFF2-N 


9 


(Reserved) 


10 


(Reserved) 



(31) LCN: 


MCTL PWB 2 - LDU PCB (20 pins 





Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+5v-1 R 


2 


LDREF2 


3 


LDREF3 


4 


+5v-1 


5 


LDREF1 


6 


LDREF0 


7 


LREADY 


8 


LCONT2 


9 


LCONT1 


10 


VIDEO-N 


11 


LDREF4 


12 


BDT-P 


13 


BDT-N 


14 


SGND 


15 


SGND 


16 


SCMCLK 


17 


SCMRDY-N 


18 


SCMON-N 


19 


PGND 


20 


+24v-1 



(32) ACN3: Power Supply Unit - MCTL PWB 2 POCN 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


SWRUS-P 


2 


+5v-2 


3 


+5v-2D 


4 


+5v-2D 


5 


+24VDO-N 


6 


SGND 


7 


SGND 


8 


SGND 



IV-70 



(33) ACN2: Power Supply Unit - Interlock Switch 




Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


DSW-0 


2 


DSW-I 



(35) MCTL PWB 2 PACN - PANEL PWB (16 


pins) 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


PAI/ODATAO 


2 


PAI/ODATA1 


3 


PAI/ODATA2 


4 


PAI/ODATA3 


5 


PAI/ODATA4 


6 


PAI/ODATA5 


7 


PAI/ODATA6 


8 


PAI/ODATA7 


9 


LCDRS 


10 


LCDE 


11 


PASWRDN 


12 


PALEDWRN 


13 


SGND 


14 


+5v-1 


15 


LCDBLED 


16 


NC 



(36) MCTL PWB 2 DPCN - Duplex Unit CNDUP 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


D-COMMAND 


2 


SGND 


3 


DUMBUSY2-N 


4 


SGND 


5 


D-STATUS 


6 


SGND 


7 


Reserved 


8 


DUPCHK-N 


9 


DUMBUSY1-N 


10 


PT-1 


11 


DUPRES-N 


12 


SGND 



(37) ACN4:Power Supply Unit - Duplex Unit CNDUP 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


+5v-1 


2 


+5v-D 


3 


SGND 


4 


+24v-2 


5 


+24v-2 


6 


PGND 


7 


PGND 







(38) DCN15:IOD1 PWB2 - Toner Key Sensor 2 (TNK) 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


TONEROK-N 


2 


+5v-S 


3 


SGND 







IV-71 



(39) PRINTER CNDUP - Duplex Unit 



Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


D-COMMAND 


2 


SGND 


3 


DUMBUSY2-N 


4 


SGND 


5 


D-STATUS 


6 


SGND 


7 


Reserved 


8 


DUPCHK-N 


9 


DUMBUSY1-N 


10 


PT-1 


11 


DUPRES-N 


12 


SGND 


13 


NC 


14 


NC 


15 


PGND 


16 


PGND 


17 


+24v-2 


18 


+24v-2 


19 


+5v-D 


20 


SGND 


21 


+5v-1 


22 


NC 


23 


NC 


24 


NC 



(40) Fusinc 


) Unit 






Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


HN 


2 


HP 


A1 


TH2 


B1 


GND 


A2 


TH2 


B2 


FUTEMP 


A3 


TH1 


B3 


NC 


A4 


TH1 


B4 


NC 


3 


NC 


4 


NC 



(41) Fusinc 


) Unit 






Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


2 


HP 


1 


HN 


B4 


GND 


A1 


TH1 


B3 


FUTEMP 


A2 


TH1 


B2 


NC 


A3 


TH2 


B1 


NC 


A4 


TH2 


4 


NC 


3 


NC 



(42) MCTL PWB 2 FUCN - Fusing Unit 




Pin No. 


Signal Name 


Pin No. 


Signal Name 


1 


TH1 


2 


TH1 


3 


TH2 


4 


TH2 


5 


FUTEMP 


6 


FUCHKGND 



IV-72 



CHAPTER V 

CONTROL PANEL OPERATION 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTER V CONTROL PANEL OPERATION V-1 

1. PANEL LAYOUT V-1 

2. VIDEO CONTROLLER MODE V-2 

2.1 Configuration of Operational Mode V-2 

2.2 Line Test Mode V-3 

2.3 DRAM Test Mode V-7 

2.4 Test Print Mode V-8 

2.5 NVRAM Reset Mode V-8 

3. ENGINE CONTROLLER MODE V-9 

3.1 Configuration of Operational Mode V-9 

3.2 Operation of Normal Mode V-1 1 

3.3 Service Mode V-1 8 

3.4 Adjustment Work Procedures V-41 

3.4.1 Adjustment of Top and Left Margin V-41 

3.4.2 Setting of Engine NVRAM Data V-42 

3.4.3 Confirmation and Setting of Total Number of Printouts V-43 

3.4.4 Setting of Number of Images for Each Color V-43 

3.4.5 Initial Setting of Engine NVRAM V-44 



CHAPTER V CONTROL PANEL OPERATION 



1. PANEL LAYOUT 




Fig.5-1 



No. 


LED / Button Name 


1 


LCD: 16 character by 2 lines 


2 


Power LED 


3 


Ready LED 


4 


Data LED 


5 


Go button 


6 


Job Cancel button 


7 


Alarm LED 


8 


Secure Print button 


9 


- button 


10 


+ button 


11 


Reprint button 


12 


Back button 


13 


Set button 



V-1 



2. VIDEO CONTROLLER MODE 

This section describes the operation and maintenance functions in the Video Controller 
Mode. 

2.1 Configuration of Operational Mode 

This printer has various functions as set out in Table 5-1 for users to easily perform 
general test printing, general settings and some maintenance work. 

(1 ) Normal Mode: After turning on the printer, the printer goes into Normal Mode. 

This mode provides normal printing for the end user. The 
following section describes the toner save mode and the power 
save mode. For other modes, refer to the user's guide. 

(2) Line Test Mode: This mode provides a self-test for each function in the Video 

Controller Mode mainly for use when replacing the main (video 
controller) PCB. 

Whenever the video controller is replaced, these checks should 
be carried out. 

This mode provides performance tests for the engine LCD, 
control panel buttons and various sensors. 

(3) DRAM Test Mode: This mode is provided to test installed DIMM(s) on the main 

(video controller) PCB. 

(4) Test Print Mode: This mode allows you to print the selected test pattern in order to 

check the engine. 



(5) NVRAM Reset Mode: 



This mode forces the NVRAM values of the video controller to be 
reset to the factory settings. 

When replacing the main PCB, the NVRAM value is 
automatically reset to the factory setting. However, this mode is 
effective when the video controller does not work due to errors. 



Power on 

+ button + - button + Power on 

Go button + + button + Power on 

Press the -, + and Set buttons in 
this order while holding down the 
Go button. 

Set button + Power on 



Table 5-1 


► 


Normal Mode 






► 


Line Test Mode 






► 


DRAM Test Mode 






► 


Test Print Mode 






► 


NVRAM Reset Mode 



V-2 



2.2 Line Test Mode 

This mode tests the following items; 



Item 


Self-test Description 


LCD TEST 


Displays the checker pattern 


LED TEST 


Checks that all LEDs are on / off. 


SW TEST 


Checks that all buttons work correctly. 


SENSOR TEST 


Checks that all sensors work correctly. 


RAM SIZE TEST 


Displays the NVRAM size 


TRAY 1 CHECK 


Displays the paper size of the upper cassette 
(Trayl). 


TRAY 2 CHECK 


Displays the paper size of the lower cassette 
(Tray 2). 


FLASH CARD-R/W TEST 


Checks the compact flash card. 



<Procedure> 



Note: 

• It is possible to skip the test and proceed with the next test by pressing the Go 
button. 

• If any errors occur during the following procedures, an error message appears on 
the LCD. By pressing the Go button, it is possible to proceed with the test. 



1) Turn on the power while holding down the + and - buttons. The following message 
appears. 



LINE TEST 



2) Press the Go button to implement the LCD TEST. 

All columns of the LCD are turned on as shown below and also the LEDs are all 
turned on. 

Check that the LCDs are all displayed correctly and none of the dots have 
dropped. Also, check that the LEDs are all on. 



All of the LCDs are displayed at a time. 



V-3 



3) Press the Go button to implement the SW TEST. 

The following display appears on the LCD and the LEDs are all turned off. 

Check that the LEDs are turned on and the corresponding number appears as 
follows when pressing the buttons on the control panel in order. 

Corresponding button number on the panel 



xxxxxxxx 


T 


12345678 



0© 
© ©© 
©©© 



4) Press the Go button to implement the SENSOR TEST. 
The following display appears on the LCD. 
Check that the display of each sensor is changed to the corresponding character. 




Corresponding sensor code 



ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 
QRST 



A: 


Front Cover 


B: 
C: 
D: 
E: 
F: 
G: 
H: 
1: 


Top Cover 

Rear Cover (Transfer Unit) 
Toner Cartridge (K) 
Toner Cartridge (C) 
Toner Cartridge (M) 
Toner Cartridge (Y) 
OPC Belt Cartridge 
Fuser Cleaner 


J: 
K: 


Fusing Unit 
Waste Toner 


L: 
M: 


Upper Cassette 
Lower Cassette 


N: 
0: 
P: 
Q: 


Upper Cassette Paper 
Lower Cassette Paper 
Upper Cassette Media 
Lower Cassette Media 


R: 
S: 

T 


Paper Sensor 1 
Paper Sensor 2 
Paper Sensor 3 



Note: 



For the sensor of V for HL-2600CN, the display is not changed to V and stays I. 



V-4 



5) Press the Go button to implement the RAM SIZE CHECK. 
The RAM size installed into the printer is displayed. 
Check that the RAM size is correct. 



RAM CHECK START 



RAM SIZE = 64MB 



6) Press the Go button to implement the TRAY1 CHECK. 
The paper size of the installed cassette 1 is displayed. 
Check that the paper size is correct. 



TRAY 


1 


CHK 


START 


t 


TRAY 


1 


= 


A4 



TRAY 1 = A4: A4 size cassette is installed. 

TRAY 1 = LETTER: Letter size cassette is installed. 

TRAY 1 = NO: No cassette is installed. 

TRAY 1 = SIZE ERR: The paper size is other than A4 or Letter size. 

7) Press the Go button to implement the TRAY2 CHECK. 
The paper size of the installed cassette 2 is displayed. 
Check that the paper size is correct. 



TRAY 


2 


CHK 


START 


t 


TRAY 


2 


= 


A4 



TRAY 2 = A4: A4 size cassette is installed. 

TRAY 2 = LETTER: Letter size cassette is installed. 

TRAY 2 = NO: No cassette is installed. 

TRAY 2 = SIZE ERR: The paper size is other than A4 or Letter size. 



V-5 



8) Press the Go button to implement the COMPACT FLASH - R/W TEST. 

The reading/writing test of the compact flash card is implemented. Check that no 
error occurs. 



CARD R/W START 



CARD R/W OK 



CARD R/W OK: The compact flash card works correctly. 

CARD R/W ERROR: The compact flash card has a problem. 
NO FLASH CARD: The compact flash card is not installed. 

9) Press the Go button to exit the LINE TEST mode and reset the printer. 



RAM SIZE = 



64M 



1 



Now initializing 




When this message appears, the 
printer may be turned off. 



10) Turn off the power. 



V-6 



2.3 DRAM Test Mode 

This mode tests DIMMs installed on the main (video controller) PCB. 

<Procedure> 

1 ) To start the test program: 

While holding down the Go button and + button, turn on the power. "DRAM 
CHECK START" will be displayed. Press the Job Cancel button to start the DRAM 
check. 

2) The LCD will display "START DRAM TEST", and the Data LED blinks. 

3) On satisfactory completion of all the RAM tests, the LCD will display: "DRAM OK!!", 
and the Alarm LED is on. 

4) If any DRAM error has occurred, the LCD will display a fail message as follows; 



DDDDDDDD 


DD 


-► 


DD 


t 


t 




t 


RAM Address 


WRITE data 




READ data 



5) Enter the hidden menu mode as follows to confirm the current memory map; 

i) Press the -, + and Set buttons in this order while holding down the Go button. 

ii) The LCD will display "HIDDEN PANEL" 

iii) Select the "DRAM ADDRESS" menu using the scroll buttons. 

iv) Whenever the Set button is pressed, the LCD will display the DRAM error 
address on Slot 1 , Slot 2, and Slot 3 in turn. 

6) If a DIMM DRAM has an error, replace the DIMM corresponding to the above 

memory map information. 



Note: 



There may be a case where the above sequence does not work correctly due to 
complete RAM failure, or in faulty assembly such as a solder bridge or ineffective 
soldering etc. 

"PRINT CHECK" may be displayed when exiting from the Test mode. It will disappear 
in 20 or 30 seconds, displaying "READY" on the LCD. It is not a fault. 



V-7 



2.4 Test Print Mode 

This mode prints the specified pattern in order to check the engine. 
<Procedure> 

1 ) Press the -, + Set buttons in this order while holding down the Go button to enter 
the test print mode. 

2) The PRINT MENU' message is displayed on the LCD. Select 'single test print' or 
'repeat test print' by pressing the - or + button, then press the Set button. 

3) If selecting 'single test print', select one of the following items by pressing the - 
or + button, then press the Set button. 

Single test print 

TEST PTN=A - H Halftone Reproduction 

TEST PTN=G - H Line Reproduction 

TEST PTN=K2 Color Reproduction, registration and jitter 

TEST PTN=STRIPE Fusing 

TEST PTN=NORMAL Prints the test print page normally. 

TEST PTN=GRID 10mm grid pattern (to check the magnification 

and paper skew.) 

TEST PTN=LINE Horizontal line with 2 dots and 3 spaces (to check 

the pitch of paper feeding.) 

TEST PTN=BLACK Prints the all black page, (to check the damage on 

the fusing unit.) 

TEST PTN=WHITE Prints the blank page, (to check the black spots or 

dark printing.) 

4) If selecting 'repeat test print', select one of the following items by pressing the - 
or + button, then press the Set button. 

Repeat test print (For the printed page, refer to 'single test print' described 
above.) 

TEST PTN=NORMAL 

TEST PTN=GRID 

TEST PTN=LINE 

TEST PTN=BLACK 

TEST PTN=WHITE 



2.5 NVRAM Reset Mode 

This mode forces the NVRAM value of the video controller to be reset to the factory 
settings. 

<Procedure> 

1 ) While holding down the Set button, turn on the power. 

2) Hold down the Set button until "RAM SIZE" is displayed on the LCD panel and 
the LEDs are all on momently. 

3) The printer is reset to the factory setting. 



V-8 



ENGINE CONTROLLER MODE 

This section describes the operation and setting procedures for each engine test in the 
Engine Controller Mode. 

In order to go into the Engine Controller Mode, turn on the printer while holding down the 
Secure Print, Back, Set buttons. 



3.1 Configuration of Operational Mode 

This printer has the various functions as set out in Table 5-2 for the user to easily 
understand the operation status of the printer engine during maintenance work. 



(1 ) Normal Mode: After removing the main PCB from the printer and pressing the On 
Line button under the Engine Controller Mode, the printer goes into 
the Engine Normal Mode. 

This mode provides functions to indicate the operation status of the 
printer and also messages relating to normal operations which the 
operator is controlling. 

Note: 

Be sure to remove the main PCB before the printer goes into the Engine Normal Mode. If 
you fail to do so, the printer goes into the sleep mode. 



(2) Service Mode: After turning on the printer in the off-line status, the printer goes into 
Service Mode. 

This mode is a unique mode for the serviceman only and provides 
additional functions (codes 31 through 37) to confirm the operational 
status during maintenance work and '3 9 factory mode' to 
confirm and set the operational status of the main components. 



V-9 



Table 5-2 





00 


RFAHY 








Power LED OFF 


INUillld.1 IVIUUc 




nCMU Y 


Ready LED ON 












01 


WAIT 


Power LED BLINK 














02 


PRINT 


Power LED OFF 














11 


CHK MEDIA TYPE 


Power LED ON 




CHK MEDIA for DUPLEX 




NO MEDIA 




CHK OUTER SELECTION 




12 


NO TRAY 




STACKER FULL 




13 


REPLACE TONER 




14 


CHECK FUSER OIL 




CHK CLEANING ROLLER 




CHECK WASTE TONER PACK 




15 


MISPRINT 




16 


ALIGN TONER CG 




ALIGN FU. UNIT 




ALIGN FUSER CL ROLLER 




ALIGN BELT CG 




ALIGN LFU 




ALIGN TRANSFER ROLLER 




17 


MEDIA JAM 




18 


CLOSE PANEL FRONT 




CLOSE PANEL TOP 




CLOSE PANEL REAR 




CLOSE PANEL DUPLEX 




19 


SLEEP MODE 














20 


SERVICE CALL 


Power LED ON 






















31 


TEST PRINT 




ourviuu iviuuy 






Ready LED OFF 


32 


NEXT CARE INFO. 






33 


CASSETTE TYPE 






34 


TOTAL PAGE 






35 


EACH IMAGE 






36 


CLEAR CARE 






37 


MEDIA MANAGE 






















39 


FACTORY MODE 




40 


DP CHECK 


















41 


BD CHECK 








42 


FU CHECK 






43 


MARGIN ADJUST 






44 


LIFE PERIOD SET 








45 


NVRAM TUNE UP 




LP TUNE UP 




46 


NVRAM INITIAL 


THVTUNEUP 




47 


TOTAL PAGE SET 


DBVTUNEUP 




48 


EACH IMAGE SET 


DVM TUNE UP 




49 


NEXT LITE SET 


CBVTUNEUP 




50 


ID DATA SET 


FBVTUNEUP 














REG TUNE UP 



V-10 



3.2 Operation of Normal Mode 

Normal Mode displays on the control panel the operational status of the printer when in 
the "ONLINE" state and the necessary information for the operator to implement ordinary 
maintenance work. 



Operation Procedures 



1) Press the power button to turn on the printer while holding down the Secure Print, 
Back, Set buttons Refer to Fig. 5-1 . 

2) Press the Go button so that the printer is on-line and the Power LED starts to flash. 

3) The Power LED lights approximately 250 seconds after power-on and the printer is 
ready to print. 



Normal Mode 



See Table 5-2 for details of indications available in normal mode. 



V-11 



Code No. 



LCD Message 



Description of Message 



00 



READY 
[*2 



[*1] 
[*4] 



• The Power LED is lit. 

• The engine has completed the 
warming-up process and is now ready 
to print. 

• The engine is ready to receive 
"PRREQ", signal from LPC. 

[*1]: Applicable paper feeder is indicated 
as follows; 

/UPP: Upper Cassette 
/LOW: Lower Cassette 
[*2]: Size of the paper loaded on the 
upper or lower cassette is indicated 
as follows. Indication to be 
displayed from the left in the order 
of upper cassette, lower cassette. 
LT: Letter size DL: Envelope 

EX: Executive size CM: Envelope 
PC: Post Card Commercial #1 

LG: Legal size FR: Free size 

A4: A4 size B5: B5 size 

[*4]: The code numbers of consumables 
or periodical replacement parts will 
be indicated if they have reached 
their life or should be replaced now. 
If no periodical replacement is 
required, there will be no indication 
in the LCD. 

For details of the periodical 
replacement parts, see 36. CLEAR 
CARE in the next section. 



01 



01 WAIT 
[*2 



[*1] 
[*4] 



The Power LED is lit. 

The engine is in the process of 

warming-up. 

For messages [*1], [*2] and [*4] that 
appearing in the LCD, see the 
description of code number 00 above. 



02 



02 PRINT [*5] [*1] 
[*2 ] [*4] 



• The Power LED lit. 

• The engine is ready to print. 

• For messages [*1 ], [*2], [*3] and [*4] 
that appearing in the LCD, see the 
description of code number 00 above. 

[*5]: Print color is indicated as follows; 



Y: 


Yellow 


M: 


Magenta 


C: 


Cyan 


K: 


Black 


YM: 


Yellow & Magenta 


YMCK 


Full Color 



V-12 



Code No. 


LCD Message 


Description of Message 


11-1 


CHECK MEDIA TYPE 


• Engine stands by as "CHECK MEDIA 
TYPE" status. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*1]: Applicable paper feeder is indicated 
as follows; 

/UPP: Upper Cassette 
/LOW: Lower Cassette 

• Confirm whether the applicable paper 
cassette is loaded with paper. 

• Press the Job Cancel button if the 
media needs to be changed. 


11 CHK MEDIA [*1] 
TYPE [*4] 




11-2 


NO MEDIA 


• Engine stands by as "NO MEDIA" 
status. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*1]: Applicable paper feeder paper 
empty condition is indicated as 
follows; 

/UPP: Upper Cassette 
/LOW: Lower Cassette 

• Replenish the empty cassette with 
paper. 


11 NO MEDIA [*1] 
[*4] 




11-3 


CHECK MEDIA for DUPLEX 


• Engine stands by a CHECK MEDIA 
Duplex. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*1]: Media check is indicated with the 
following messages for each feeder. 
/UPP: Upper Cassette 
/LOW: Lower Cassette 
/DPL: Duplex Unit Inside 

• Changes the applicable media. 

• Changes the designation of media. 


11 CHK MEDIA [*1] 
for DUPLEX [*4] 




11-4 


CHECK OUTER SELECTION 


• Engine stands by a CHECK OUTER 
SELECTION. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*1]: Media check is indicated with the 
following messages for each feeder. 
/UPP: Upper Cassette 
/LOW: Lower Cassette 

• Confirm the paper cassette/paper exit 
tray, and reset properly. 


11 CHK OUTER [*1] 
SELECTION [*4] 





V-13 



Code No. 


LCD Message 


Description of Message 


12-1 


NO TRAY UPP/LOW 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*1]: Paper feeder without the paper 
cassette is indicated as follows; 
/UPP: Upper Cassette 
/LOW: Lower Cassette 

• Install the applicable media cassette 
to the paper feeder indicated on the 
LCD. 


12 NO TRAY [*1] 
[*4] 




12-2 


STACKER FULL 


• Engine stands by as "STACKER 
FULL" status. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• Remove the paper on the stacker 
(paper exit tray) , and then press - 
button. 


12 STACKER 

FULL [SF] 




13 


REPLACE TONER 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*5]: The toner empty condition is 
indicated by the color code as 
follows; 

Y: Yellow 

M: Magenta 

C: Cyan 

K: Black 

• Replace the indicated toner cartridge 
with a new one of the correct color. 


13 REPLACE [*5] 
TONER [*4] 


* Display of [4] 
C : YT Y Toner Cartridge 
C : CT C Toner Cartridge 
C : MT M Toner Cartridge 
C : KT K Toner Cartridge 


14-1 


CHECK FUSER OIL 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• Replace the fuser oil bottle with a new 
one. 

• This message will be automatically 
cleared by open & close operation of 
the paper exit cover. 


14 CHECK 

FUSER OIL[*F0] 




14-2 


CHECK CLEANING ROLLER 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• Replace the cleaning roller with a new 
one. 

• Execute the Clear Care Mode after 
the replacement of the cleaning roller 
to clear the Care Code [FC]. 


14 CHK CLEANING 
ROLLER [*FC] 





V-14 



Code No. 


LCD Message 


Description of Message 


14-3 


CHECK WASTE TONER PACK 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• Replace the waste toner pack with a 
new one. 

• This message will be automatically 
cleared by open & close operation of 
the paper exit cover taking place while 
replacement of the waste toner pack. 
The message is cleared also by 
pressing the - button. 


14 CHECK WASTE 

TONER PACK [*4] 




15 


MISPRINT 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*6] The type of misprint will be indicated 
as follows; 

NOPQR: No PRREQ-N signal is 
available. 

PAPER: No paper is available in 
the feeder while executing the print 
operation after receipt of the print 
command. 

MEDIA: While executing the print 
process after receipt of print 
command, the media type of feeder 
is not consistent with the specified 
media type. 

Misprint occurred while the Duplex 
printing. 

• This message can be cleared by 
pressing the - button. 


15 MISPRINT 

[*6] [*4] 




16-1 


ALIGN FU.UNIT 


• The engine is standstill. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• The fusing unit is not installed. 
Reconfirm the installation status of the 
fusing unit. 

• This message will be automatically 
cleared by open & close operation of 
the paper exit cover. The message is 
cleared also by pressing the - button. 


16 ALIGN 

FU.UNIT [*4] 




16-2 


ALIGN FUSER CL ROLLER 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• The cleaning roller is not installed. 
Reconfirm the installation status of the 
cleaning roller. 

• This message will be automatically 
cleared by opening & closing the 
paper exit cover. The message can 
also be cleared by pressing the - 
button. 


16 ALIGN FUSER 

CL ROLLER [*4] 





V-15 



Code No. 


LCD Message 


Description of Message 


16-3 


ALIGN TONER CG 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*5]: The color of the incorrectly installed 
toner cartridge will be indicated as 
follows; 

Y: Yellow 

M: Magenta 

C: Cyan 

K: Black 

• Reinstall the toner cartridge correctly. 

• This message will be automatically 
cleared by open & close operation of 
the front cover. 


16 ALIGN [*5] 
TONER CG [*4] 




16-4 


ALIGN BELT CG 


• The engine is standstill. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• The OPC belt cartridge is not 
installed. Reconfirm the installation 
status of the OPC belt cartridge. 

• This message will be automatically 
cleared by open & close operation of 
the paper exit cover or front cover. 


16 ALIGN BELT CG 
[*4] 




16-5 


ALIGN LFU 


• Engine stands by as "ALIGN LFU" 
status. 

• Turn the power off, and then connect 
the harness between the engine and 
LFU. 

• Turn the power on. If the warming-up 
process starts, it means that proper 
connection is made. 


16 ALIGN LFU 

[*4] 




16-6 


ALIGN TRANSFER ROLLER 


• Engine stands by as "ALIGN 
TRANSFER ROLLER" status. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• Transfer roller is not installed. 
Reconfirm the installation status of 
transfer roller. 

• This message will be automatically 
cleared by open & close operation of 
back cover (L). 


16 ALIGN TRANSFER 
ROLLER [*4] 





V-16 



Code No. 


LCD Message 


Description of Message 


17 


MEDIA JAM 


• The engine is standstill. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*7]: The kind of jam (location of jam) is 
indicated as follows; 

FEED: Paper Feeder 

INNER: Inside of Printer 

OUTER: Paper Exit 

DRUM: Transfer Drum 

DPL: Jam inside the duplex 
unit. 

• This message can be cleared by 
pressing the - button after open & 
close operation of the front cover, 
back cover and paper exit cover. 


17 MEDIA JAM 

[*7] [*4] 




18 


CLOSE PANEL 


• Engine halts as "CLOSE PANEL" 
status. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*8]: One of following message appears 
to indicate the kind of cover being 
open. 

FRONT: Front Cover 

TOP: Paper Exit Cover 

REAR: Rear Cover 

DPL: Rear Cover 

• Close the indicated cover, and then 
above message is cleared. 


17 CLOSE PANEL 
[*8] [*4] 




19 


SLEEP MODE 


• The engine is idling. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

• This mode is cleared by sending a 
WAKE-UP command (EC24) from the 
LPC. 

• The printer is ready to print after the 
warming-up process of the engine. 


19 SLEEP MODE 

[*4] 




20 


SERVICE CALL 


• The engine is in standstill. 

• The Power LED is lit. 

[*9]: Service Call error code is indicated 
as follows; 

For the details of error codes, refer 
to Chapter VIII "Troubleshooting" in 
this manual. 


2 SERVICE CALL 
[*9] 





V-17 



3.3 Service Mode 



Service mode is a unique mode for the maintenance of the printer only, without the video 
controller card. In this mode, you can check the operation status of the printer engine Off- 
line and also carry out maintenance work for each of the printer components. 



Procedure 



1) Hold down the Secure Print, Back, Set buttons and turn the printer Power on. 

2) Using the -, Reprint, Back and Set buttons, select the mode necessary for the 
maintenance work from the test list shown in Table 5-2. 



How to designate the necessary mode 



1 ) Press the Back or Set button so 
that service modes (a), (b) and (c) 
show up in sequence to be 
selected. 



(a) 



2) 



3) 



After selecting the desired mode, 
execute the selected mode by 
pressing the Reprint button. 



Press the 
mode. 



button to exit the 



(b) 



(c) 



SERVICE 


MODE 


^ 


[>TEST PRINT 


^ 








SERVICE MODE 
[> NEXT CARE INFO 










SERVICE MODE 




t> FACTOI 


*Y MODE 





V-18 



31 



GRID PRINT 



A single color or two color (R,G,B) Grid Pattern and a full color Stripe Pattern can be 
printed as Test Prints. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 



LCD Message 



1 ) Press the Reprint button. 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Using the Back or Set button, select the 
desired pattern (ex. grid pattern), and then 
press the Reprint button. 

(b) -► (c) 

3) Using the Back or Set button, select the 
desired color (ex. red color), and then, press 
the Reprint button, (c) -> (d) 

4) After completion of the warming-up process, 
the desired pattern of the selected color will 
be continuously printed. (d) 

5) Print operation is suspended by pressing the 
- button. (d) -> (e) 

If it is desired to return to the previous screen 
(message), press the - button one more time. 

(e) -► (d) 

6) If it is desired to return to On-line mode, 
press the Go button. (f) -^ (g) 



b) 



c) 



d) 



e) 



9) 



SERVICE MODE 
[>TEST PRINT 



31 TEST PRINT 
[> GRID STRIPE 



31 GRID PRNT 

t> Y/M/C/K/R/G/B 



R:YM 
G:YC 
B:MC 



31 GRID PRNT [YM] 



31 GRID PRNT 

[> Y/M/C/K/R/G/B 



SERVICE MODE 
[> TEST PRINT 



01 WAIT [ ] 
[ ] [ ] 



V-19 



32 



NEXT CARE INFORMATION 



Information relating to the replacement timing of periodical replacement parts can be 
obtained. This is the life for each of the components in images or pages. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 



LCD Message 



1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
Screen (a) "NEXT CARE INFO". 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Using the Back or Set button, select the care 
code for which you need the information. 

2: Fuser Cleaner (FC) 

7: OPC Belt Cartridge (BL) 

8: Fusing Unit (FU) 

9: Transfer Drum (TD) 

10: Replacement Kit by every 120K 

(OW) 
13: Pick-up Roller (PK) 
14: Pick-up Roller (PL) 
16: Paper Discharger (PD) 
(b) 

3) After selecting the desired information's 
code, press the Reprint button. Then, the 
number of images or printouts corresponding 
to the selected code is displayed. 

(b) -> (c) through (f) 

4) Screen (c) through (f) can be cleared by 
pressing the - button. 

(f) -► (e) -► (d) -► (c) -► (b) 

Press the - button one more time at screen 
(b) to return to the service mode. 

(b) -► (a) 



a) 



b) 



b) 



c) 



d) 



e) 



SERVICE MODE 
t> NEXT CARE INFO 



32 NEXT CARE 
2^345678910- 12 • • • 16 



NEXT FC ROLL 
12000P 



NEXT BL UNIT 
60000P 



NEXT FU UNIT 
60000P 



NEXT TR DRUM 
300000P 



NEXT 12 OK KIT 
120000P 



V-20 



33 



CASSETTE TYPE 



Desired paper feeding cassette can be selected. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
Screen (a) "CASSETTE TYPE". 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Using the Back or Set button, select the 
applicable code of the desired cassette (A, B 
or C), and then press the Reprint button. 

3) Return to SERVICE MODE by pressing the - 
button. (b) -> (c) 

A: US 
B:EC 
C:JPN 






a) 


SERVICE MODE 
t> CASSETTE TYPE 






b) 


3 3 CASSETTE TYPE 
TYPE=<A / B / C> 






c) 


SERVICE MODE 
t> TEST PRINT 







V-21 



34 



TOTAL PAGE 



The total number of printouts can be confirmed. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
"TOTAL PAGE" mode. 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Select one type of page from among TOTAL 
PAGE, DPL PAGE. 

3) 6 digit number is displayed. 

This number represents the total number of 
pages that have been printed out. (b) 

3) Press the - button to clear the screen (c). 

(d) -► (e) 






a) 


SERVICE MODE 
t> TOTAL PAGE 






b) 


TOTAL PAGE 
t> TOTAL /DUPLEX 






c) 


3 4 TOTAL PAGE 

, — i — i — i — r — i — • 






d) 


3 4 DUPLEX PAGE 

. i — I — 1 i — i — i 

;_:_:__::_:_:_:_:_•_:_♦_: p 






e) 


SERVICE MODE 
|> TEST PRINT 







V-22 



35 



EACH IMAGE 



Number of created images for each color used in printing can be confirmed. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
"EACH IMAGE" mode. 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Using the Back or Set button, select the 
subject color and then press the Reprint 
button. (b) -> (c) 

3) The number of images created in the 
selected color is displayed. (Ex. Yellow) 

(c) 

4) Press the - button to exit this mode from 
screen (c). (c) -> (d) 

5) Using the Back or Set button, select another 
color and then press the Reprint button to 
confirm the number of images created in that 
color. 

6) Press the - button to return to the Service 
mode. (d) -> (e) 






a) 


SERVICE MODE 
t> EACH IMAGE 






b) 


3 5 IMAGE OF 
[> Y/M/C/K 






c) 


3 5 IMAGE OF Y 
000098P 






d) 


3 5 IMAGE OF 
[>Y/M/C/K 






e) 


SERVICE MODE 
[> TEST PRINT 







V-23 



36 



CLEAR CARE 



Care Code counters displayed on the LCD can be cleared. Make sure that you clear the 
relevant CLEAR CARE mode whenever replacing the applicable periodical replacement 
parts with new ones. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 



LCD Message 



1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
"CLEAR CARE" mode. 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Using the Back or Set button, have the 
cursor meet the applicable CARE code and 
then press the Reprint button. 

(b) -► (c) 

3) When implementing CLEAR CARE, use the 
Back or Set button to select YES and then 
press the Reprint button. (c) -> (d) 



No. 


Periodic Mentenance Parts 


Code 


2 


Fuser Cleaner 


FC 


7 


OPC Belt Cartridge 


BC 


8 


Fusing Unit 


FU 


9 


Drum Cleaner 
Transfer Roller 


120K 
OW 


10 


Transfer Drum 


TD 


13 


Paper Pick-up Roller 


PK 


14 


Paper Pick-up Roller (LFU) 


PL 


15 


Paper Discharger 


PD 



6) Press the - button to clear the CLEAR CARE 
mode. (d) -> (e) 



b) 



c) 



d) 



e) 



SERVICE MODE 
[> CLEAR CARE 



3 6 CLEAR CARE 
12345678910- 12 • • • 16 



CARED FC ROLL ? 
t> YES/NO 



3 6 CLEAR CARE 
12345678910- 12 • • • 16 



SERVICE MODE 
t> TEST PRINT 



V-24 



37 



MEDIA MANAGE 



The signal from the OHP sensor can be ignored when the media is selected to OHP. 
However, this mode should not be used under normal circumstances. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
"MEDIA MANAGE". 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Select DEFIANCE and then press the 
Reprint button if the OHP sensor signal 
should be ignored. (b) -> (c) 

In normal operation, the mode is preset to 
MANAGE. 






a) 


SERVICE MODE 
t> MEDIA MANAGE 






b) 


3 7 MEDIA MANAGE 
[> MANAGE /DEFIANCE 






c) 


SERVICE MODE 
[> TEST PRINT 







V-25 



39 FACTORY MODE 



This mode consists of 9 (nine) subordinate modes for the confirmation of operation and 
the resetting functions necessary for maintenance work. 



Basic Configuration 



39 


FACTORY MODE 






40 


DP CHECK 




















41 


BD CHECK 


















42 


FU CHECK 


















43 


MARGIN ADJUST 


















44 


LIFE PERIOD SET 


















45 


NVRAM TUNE UP 


















46 


NVRAM INITIAL 


















47 


TOTAL PAGE SET 


















48 


EACH IMAGE SET 


















49 


NEXT LIFE SET 


















bO 


ID DATA SET 







V-26 



40 


DP CHECK 



Each individual color Toner cartridge can be driven. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting "DP 
CHECK". 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Using the Back or Set button, select the 
desired color and then press the Reprint 
button. (Ex. yellow color) 

(b) -► (c) 

3) The selected color toner cartridge starts to 
drive. If no error occurs in driving, the 
message "GOOD" is displayed in the LCD, 
otherwise "FAIL". (c) 

Toner cartridge drive will automatically stop 
after 60 seconds. (c) -> (d) 

4) Press the - button to stop the DP CHECK 
mode. (d) 

Press the - button one more time to return to 
the status of screen (a). (d) -> (e) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> DP CHECK 






b) 


4 DP CHECK 
[> Y/M/C/K 






c) 


4 DP CHECK Y 
GOOD 






d) 


4 DP CHECK 
[> Y/M/C/K 






e) 


FACTORY MODE 
t> DP CHECK 







V-27 



41 


BD CHECK 



Laser beam position and laser power can be checked. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting "BD 
CHECK". (a) -> (b) 

2) The scanner motor scans the laser beam as 
it is rotating. If the scanning position of the 
laser beam is normal, "GOOD" is displayed 
on the LCD, otherwise "FAIL", (b) or (c) 

Scanner motor automatically stops rotating 
after 60 seconds. (d) 

3) Press the - button to exit the BD CHECK 
mode. (b) -> (d) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> BD CHECK 






b) 


41 BD CHECK 
GOOD 






c) 


41 BD CHECK 
FAIL 






d) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
[> DP CHECK 







42 



FU CHECK 



Availability of oil in the fusing unit can be checked. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting "FU 
CHECK". (a) -> (b) 

2) When powered on, the fusing unit starts the 
heating-up process and subsequently checks 
the fusing temperature. If the fusing 
temperature reaches the "print ready" status, 
"GOOD" message appears in LCD. If not, 
"FAIL" message. (b) 

3) Press the - button to exit the FU CHECK 
mode. (b) -> (c) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> FU CHECK 






b) 


43 FU CHECK 
TEMP : GOOD 






c) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
[> DP CHECK 







V-28 



43 



MARGIN ADJUST 



The position of the top margin and left margin can be confirmed and adjusted within the 
range -3.5mm max. and +3. 5mm max. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 



LCD Message 



1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
"MARGIN ADJUST". (a) -> (b) 

2) Using the Back or Set button, select either 
TOP or LEFT1/LEFT3 and then press the 
Reprint button. (b) -> (c) 

LEFT: For adjustment of left edge of 

upper cassette. 

LEFT1 : For adjustment of left edge of 

lower cassette. 

LEFT3: For adjustment of left edge from 

duplex unit. 

3) The margins can be adjusted by up to 3.5mm 
left and right in 0.5mm steps from the 
reference value "0". 

Using the Back or Set button, select the 
amount of adjustment by selecting a number 
displayed in screen (c) or (d). The amount of 
adjustment selected will be displayed at the 
upper right corner of Screen (c) or (d). 

After confirming the desired amount of 
adjustment is displayed, press the Reprint 
button to set the adjustment. 

4) Press the - button to exit the MARGIN 
ADJUST mode. (d) -> (e) 

5) Press the - button one more time to return to 
FACTORY MODE. (e) -> (f) 



a) 



b) 



c) 



d) 



3 9 FACTORY MODE 
L> MARGIN ADJUST 



43 MARGIN ADJUST 

[> TOP / LEFT/ LEFT1/ 
NONE/LEFT3 



43 TOP -2.0mm 
-<765i£2101>+ 



43 TOP +2. 5mm 
-<101234A67> + 



43 MARGIN ADJUST 

t> TOP/LEFT/LEFT1/ 
NONE/LEFT3 



3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> DP CHECK 



V-29 



44 LIFE PERIOD 



Replacement life of the periodical replacement parts can be set. 



Procedure 



Description of Procedures 



LCD Message 



1) Press the Reprint button after selecting "LIFE 
PERIOD" mode. (a) -> (b) 



2) 



3) 



4) 



5) 



Using the Back or Set button, select the 
desired code to be set and then press the 
Reprint button. 

2: Fuser Cleaner (FC) (a) -> (b) 

7: OPC Belt Cartridge (BC) (d) 

8: Fusing Unit (FU) (e) 

9: Transfer Drum (TD) (f) 

1 0: 1 20K Replacement Kit (OW) (g) 
13: Paper Pick-up Roller (PK) 
14: Paper Pick-up Roller (PL) 
16: Paper Discharger (PD) 

Use the Back or Set button to select the 
desired digit. 

Use the Reprint button to input value to the 
blinking digit. 

Upon completion of inputting the values to be 
set, use the Back or Set button to select SET 
on the LCD and then press the Reprint 
button to register the set value. 

Press the - button to complete the setting 
work. (g) 

Press the - button one more time to return to 
FACTORY MODE. (g) -> (h) 



b) 



c) 



d) 



e) 



g) 



h) 



3 9 FACTORY MODE 

t> LIFE PERIOD SET 



44 LIFE PERIOD 
12345678910-12- • -16 



PERIOD FC ROLL 
012000 P SET 



PERIOD BC UNIT 
60000 P SET 



PERIOD FU UNIT 
60 00 P SET 



PERIOD TR DRUM 
3 00 00 P SET 



PERIOD 12 OK UNIT 
120000 P SET 



44 LIFE PERIOD 
12345678910-12---16 



3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> DP CHECK 



V-30 



45 NVRAM TUNE UP 



This mode is not used in normal operations, but is used when fine adjustment of the 
adjust value is required. 

This mode consists of following 8 (eight) subordinate modes: 



Configuration of NVRAM TUNE UP 



45 


NVRAM TUNE UP 






45-1 


LP TUNE UP 
























45-2 


THVTUNEUP 


















45-3 


DBVTUNEUP 


















45-4 


CBVTUNEUP 


















45-5 


FBVTUNEUP 









Factory Value at Ex- 
Work 

"0" 



PPC/OHP "0" 
LABEL "0" 

"0" 

"0" 

"0" 



V-31 



45-1 



LP TUNE UP 



This mode should be used when optical density, line thickness and/or color reproduction 
needs to be adjusted. The adjustment is made by changing the laser power against the 
reference value (zero) in the range -4 to +4. 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1) Press the Reprint button after selecting "NVM 
TUNE UP". (a)->(b) 

2) After selecting LP TUNE UP Code 1 , press 
the Reprint button, (b) -> (c) 

3) After selecting the color to be adjusted, press 
the Reprint button. (Ex. Yellow). 

(c) -► (d) 

4) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8 
steps between the -4 and +4. 

After selecting the required number press the 
Reprint button. (d) 

5) Press the - button to finish the adjustment for 
yellow. (d) -> (e) 

Repeat steps 3 to 5 if adjustment work is 
required for another color. 

6) Press the - button to finish the adjustments. 

(e) -► (f) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
[> NVM TUNE UP 






b) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
A2345678910-12-'- 16 






c) 


45 LP TUNE UP 
[> Y/M/C/K 






d) 


45 YELLOW [0] 
-<432JAL234> + 






e) 


45 LP TUNE UP 
[> Y/M/C/K 






f) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
A2345678910 -12--- 16 







V-32 



45-2 


THVTUNEUP 



This mode shall be used when the transfer voltage needs to be adjusted due to errors 
such as transfer failure onto the media. The adjustment is used to change the transfer 
voltage, subject to the media to be used, against the reference value (zero) in the range 
-4 to +4. 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1) Press the Reprint button after selecting "NVM 
TUNE UP". (a)->(b) 

2) After selecting THV TUNE UP Code 2, press 
the Reprint button. (b) -> (c) 

3) After selecting the media to be adjusted, 
press the Reprint button. (Ex. PPC). 

(c) -► (d) 

4) Adjustment can be made in 8 steps between 
-4 and +4. 

After selecting a given number, press the 
Reprint button. (d) 

5) Press the - button to wrap up the adjustment 
for PPC. (d) -> (e) 

Repeat steps 3 to 5 for other media such as 
OHP or Labels. 

6) Press the - button to wrap up the 
adjustments. (e) -> (f) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> NVM TUNE UP 






b) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
^2345678910- 12---16 






c) 


45 THV TUNE UP 
[> PPC/OHP/LABEL 






d) 


45 THV PPC [ ] 
-<432X&L234>+ 






e) 


45 THV TUNE UP 
[> PPC/OHP/LABEL 






f) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
^2345678910- 12---16 







V-33 



45-3 


DBVTUNEUP 



This mode shall be used when the image optical density needs to be adjusted. 
Adjustment of the developer bias voltage against the reference value (zero) in the 
range between the step -4 and +4. 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1) Press the Reprint button after selecting "NVM 
TUNE UP". (a) -> (b) 

2) After selecting DBV TUNE UP Code 3, press 
the Reprint button. (b) -> (c) 

3) After selecting the color to be adjusted, press 
the Reprint button. (Ex. Magenta). 

(c) -► (d) 

4) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8 
steps between -4 and +4. 

After selecting a given number, press the 
Reprint button. (d) -> (e) 

5) Press the - button to finish the adjustment 
work for Magenta. (d) -> (e) 

Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each color. 

6) Press the - button to finish the DBV 
adjustment work. (e) -> (f) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
[> NVM TUNE UP 






b) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
12^5678910-12---16 






c) 


45 DBV TUNE UP 
[> Y/M/C/K 






d) 


45 MAGENTA [-1] 
-<43^01234> + 






e) 


45 DBV TUNE UP 
[> Y/M/C/K 






f) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
A2345678910-12---16 







V-34 



45-4 


CBVTUNEUP 



This mode should be used when image defects attributed to the OPC belt need to be 
improved. Adjustment is to alter the OPC belt bias voltage against the reference value 
(zero) in the range between the step -4 to +4. 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1) Press the Reprint button after selecting "NVM 
TUNE UP". (a) -> (b) 

2) After selecting CBV TUNE UP Code 5, press 
the Reprint button. (b) -> (c) 

3) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8 
steps between -4 and +4. 

After selecting a given number, press the 
Reprint button. (c) 

4) Press the - button to finish the adjustment 
work for CBV. (c) -> (d) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> NVM TUNE UP 






b) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
12344678910-12---16 






c) 


45 CBV TUNE UP 
-<432lAL234>+ 






d) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
^2345678910-12---16 







V-35 



45-5 


FBVTUNEUP 



This mode should be used when image defects attributed to the transfer drum need to be 
improved. Adjustment is to adjust the drum cleaner bias voltage against the reference 
value (zero) in the range between the step -4 and +4. 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1) Press the Reprint button after selecting "NVM 
TUNE UP". (a) -> (b) 

2) After selecting FBV TUNE UP Code 6, press 
the Reprint button. (b) -> (c) 

3) The adjustment value can be adjusted in 8 
steps between -4 and +4. 

After selecting a given number, press the 
Reprint button. (c) 

4) Press the - button to finish the adjustment 
work for FBV. (c) -> (d) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
[> NVM TUNE UP 






b) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
12345^78910-12---16 






c) 


45 FBV TUNE UP 
-<432lAL234>+ 






d) 


45 NVM TUNE UP 
^345678910-12---16 







V-36 



46 



NVRAM INITIAL 



This mode can initialize (data clear) all the data of NVRAM on MCTL PWB 2, and also 
can execute NVRAM CLEAR to clear C3 error when occurred. 



/l\ WARNING 



NVRAM INITIAL is not used under normal circumstances; Bear in mind that execution of 
this mode is beset with loss of all the data in NVRAM. 

Therefore, all the data in NVRAM should be stored prior to executing NVRAM INITIAL 



Description of Procedures 



LCD Message 



1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
"NVRAM INITIAL". 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Select YES if NVRAM should be executed. If 
not select NO. 

Press the Reprint button so that the RAM 
INITIAL will be executed. (All the data will be 
cleared.) (b) -> (c) 

4) Following modes shall be executed to set the 
RAM data. 



a) 



b) 



c) 



43 


MARGIN ADJUST 


44 


LIFE PERIOD SET 


45 


NVRAM TUNE UP 


47 


TOTAL PAGE SET 


48 


EACH IMAGE SET 


49 


NEXT LIFE SET 



* When setting NVRAM TUNE UP, LP TUNE 
UP to be set at "-3". 



3 9 FACTORY MODE 
[> NVRAM INITAL 



4 6 NVRAM INITIAL 
t> YES / NO 



3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> DP CHECK 



V-37 



47 



TOTAL PAGE SET 



This mode can reset the number of total pages in the NVRAM whenever NVRAM INITIAL 
has been executed or the MCTL PWB 2 is replaced. 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
"TOTAL PAGE SET". (a) -> (b) 

2) Select one type of page from among TOTAL 
PAGE, DPL PAGE. (b) -> (c) 

2) Use the Back or Set button to select the 
desired digit. 

Use the Reprint button to input values to the 
blinking digit. 

Upon completing the input of the values, use 
the Back or Set button to select SET 
displayed on the LCD and then press the 
Reprint button to store the set value. 

(c) -► (d) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
[> TOTAL PAGE SET 






b) 


47 TOTAL PAGE 
► total /DUPLEX 






c) 


47 TOTAL PAGE 
. — i — —i— — i- — -f — — ,— — ■ 






c) 


47 DUPLEX PAGE 

■ 1 — i — i — r — i — i 






d) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
|>DP CHECK 







V-38 



48 EACH IMAGE SET 



This mode can reset the number of total pages of each color in the NVRAM whenever 
NVRAM INITIAL is executed or the MCTL PWB 2 is replaced. 



Description of Procedures 


LCD Message 


1 ) Press the Reprint button after selecting 
"EACH IMAGE SET". 

(a) -► (b) 

2) Select the desired color to reset in EACH 
IMAGE SET. (b) -> (c) 

3) Use the Back or Set button to select the 
desired digit. 

Use the Reprint button to input values to the 
selected (blinking) digit. 

Upon completing the input of the values, use 
the Back or Set button to select SET on the 
LCD and then press the Reprint button to 
store the set value. (c) -> (d) 

4) Press the - button to exit the EACH IMAGE 
SET mode. (d) -> (e) 






a) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
t> EACH IMAGE SET 






b) 


4 8 IMAGE OF 
t> Y/M/C/K 






c) 


4 8 IMAGE OF C 
005432 P SET 






d) 


4 8 IMAGE OF 
[> Y/M/C/K 






e) 


3 9 FACTORY MODE 
[>DP CHECK 







V-39 



49 



NEXT LIFE SET 



This mode is to set the replacement timing (number of prints) of periodic replacement 
parts. 



Description of Procedures 



LCD Message 



1) After selecting NEXT LIFE SET, press 
Reprint button. 

2) After selecting the code to be set, press 
Reprint button. 

(Example : Fuser Cleaner) 
2:Fuser Cleaner (FC) 
7:OPC Belt Cartridge (BC) 
8:Fusing Unit (FU) 
9:Transfer Drum (TD) 
10:120K Volume Stack Kit (OW) 
13:Paper Pick-up Roller (PK) 
14:Paper Pick-up Roller (PL) 
16:Paper Discharger (PD) 

(a) -► (b) 

3) Designate or alter the figure with the Back or 
Set button 

(b) -► (c) 

Use the Reprint button to input the number to 
the blinking figure, (for example, 7800) 
After inputting the desired number (7800 as 
example), move the cursor to SET with the 
Back or Set button. 

Then, press Reprint button to complete the 
registration of desired number (7800 as 
example) (c) -> (d) (e) 

4) Press the - button to complete the procedure 
of NEXT LIFE SET. (e) -> (f) 



b) 



c) 



d) 



3 9 FACTORY MODE 
O NEXT LIFE SET 



49 NEXT LIFE SET 
1^345678910-12 ••• It 



PERIOD FC ROLL 
007800 P SET 



PERIOD FC ROLL 
007800 P 2^PT 



49 NEXT LIFE SET 
^2345678910-12 ■■■!( 



3 9 FACTORY MODE 
|>DP CHECK 



V-40 



3.4 Adjustment Work Procedures 
3.4.1 Adjustment of Top and Left Margin 

The top and left margins can be adjusted by button operation on the control panel. 

<Purpose> 

If there is no top margin or left margin set for the print guarantee area or when the MCTL 
PWB 2 is replaced, the adjustment of top and left margin will be required. 

<Adjustment Method> 

1) Execute "GRID PRINT" in Service Mode. 

2) Measure the position 'A' and 'B' of top margin. 

[Leading edge] (A + B) / 2 < Specification Value 4.5 ± 1 .5mm 

3) Measure the position 'C and 'D' of left margin. 

[Left edge] (C + D) / 2 < Specification Value 3.5 ± 1 .5mm 

4) If the specification value is not met, implement the adjustment. 

i) Execute "43 MARGIN ADJUST" in the FACTORY MODE. 

5) After adjustment execute "GRID PRINT" and confirm the margins. 



Left Margin 

c 



D 



Leading edge 
A B 

i i 




Feeding Direction 



Fig.5-2 



V-41 



3.4.2 Setting of Engine NVRAM Data 

As data in the NVRAM has been preset to the optimum value at the factory, it is not 
necessary to change the preset values under normal conditions. However, fine 
adjustment may be required subject to the media or operational conditions. 



<Purpose> 

Print quality can be improved by changing the preset value in the engine NVRAM. 

<Procedures of Setting> 

1) Follow the procedures set out in Section 2.3 'Service Mode' in this chapter. 

2) Select RAM TUNE UP mode. 

3) Select the desired TUNE UP mode. 

4) Adjust the preset value to the appropriate value (step). 

5) Carry out a test print to confirm the print quality. 



<SubjectTUNEUPMode> 




Mode 


Subject of Adjustment 


Purpose 


LP TUNE UP 


Adjustment of laser power 


Optical density 


THVTUNEUP 


Adjustment of transfer voltage 


Transfer efficiency 


DBVTUNEUP 


Adjustment of developer bias 


Optical density 


CBVTUNEUP 


Adjustment of OPC belt bias 


Optical density 


FBVTUNEUP 


Adjustment of cleaning roller bias 


Drum cleaning efficiency 



V-42 



3.4.3 Confirmation and Setting of Total Number of Printouts 

The total number of printouts is stored in the RAM. Confirmation and setting of total 
number of printouts can be carried out on the control panel. 



<Purpose> 

Total number of printouts will be reset when changing the MCTL PWB 2 or executing an 
NVRAM INITIAL. 



<Procedures of Setting> 

1) Execute 47 TOTAL PAGE in the Factory Mode. 

2) Reset the total number of printouts. 

3) After making the setting, execute 34 TOTAL PAGE to confirm that the desired 
number of printouts in now set. 

3.4.4 Setting of Number of Images for Each Color 

The number of printouts for each color (4 colors) is stored in the RAM. Confirmation and 
setting of the number of images for each color can be carried out on the control panel. 

<Purpose> 

Number of images for each color will be reset when changing the MCTL PWB 2 or 
executing NVRAM INITIAL. 

<Procedures of Setting> 

1) Execute 48 EACH IMAGE in the Factory Mode. 

2) Reset the number of printouts for each color. 

3) After making the setting, execute 35 EACH IMAGE SET to confirm that the desired 
number of images is now set. 



V-43 



3.4.5 Initial Setting of Engine NVRAM 

Implement the initial setting at the replacement of MCTL PWB 2 after clearing the 
contents of NVRAM. 



<Purpose> 

The number of images for each color will be reset when changing the MCTL PWB 2 or 
executing NVRAM INITIAL. 



<Procedures of Setting> 

1) Before replacing the MCTL PWB 2, confirm the contents of the NVRAM for the 
following items. 

"Factory Mode" 



Code 


Subject 


Confirmation Value 


43 


MARGIN ADJUST 


Top Margin Set Value (Default in ordinary case) 


43 


MARGIN ADJUST 


Left Margin Set Value(Default in ordinary case) 


44 


LIFE PERIOD SET 


Life Period Set Value(Default in ordinary case) 


45 


LP TUNE UP 


Adjustment Value ("0" in ordinary case) 


45 


THVTUNEUP 


Adjustment Value ("0" in ordinary case) 


45 


DBVTUNEUP 


Adjustment Value ("0" in ordinary case) 


45 


CBVTUNEUP 


Adjustment Value ("0" in ordinary case) 


45 


FBVTUNEUP 


Adjustment Value ("0" in ordinary case) 


47 


TOTAL PAGE SET 


Total Print Count 


48 


EACH IMAGE SET 


Image Count of 4 Colors 



2) Execute 46 NVRAM INITIAL in the Factory Mode. 

3) After implementing the NVRAM INITIAL, input the values obtained in procedure 1] 
into the NVRAM to complete the settings. 



V-44 



CHAPTER VI 

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 



CONTENTS 
CHAPTER VI PERIODIC MAINTENANCE VI-1 

1. GENERAL VI-1 

1.1 Handling Precautions VI-1 

1.1.1 List of Maintenance Tools VI-2 

1.1.2 List of Consumables for Maintenance VI-3 

1.2 Periodic Maintenance Cleaning VI-4 

1.2.1 Cleaning the Registration Roller 2/ Paper Pick-up Roller VI-7 

1 .2.2 Cleaning the Transfer Roller 2 VI-9 

1.2.3 Cleaning the Paper Discharger VI-1 

1.2.4 Cleaning the OPC Belt Cartridge VI-12 

1 .2.5 Cleaning the Dustproof Glass in the Optical unit 2 VI-15 

1.2.6 Cleaning the Printer Interior VI-16 

1.3 Periodic Maintenance Parts and Maintenance Cycle VI-1 7 

2. Periodic Maintenance Procedures VI-20 

2.1 OPC Belt Cartridge Replacement VI-20 

2.2 Fusing Unit Replacement VI-23 

2.3 Transfer Roller 2 Replacement VI-27 

2.4 Paper Discharger Unit Replacement VI-30 

2.5 Drum Cleaner 2 Replacement VI-32 

2.6 Ozone Filter Replacement VI-35 

2.7 Paper Pick-up Roller and Separator Pad 2 Replacement VI-36 

2.8 Transfer Drum 2 Replacement VI-37 



CHAPTER VI PERIODIC MAINTENANCE 

1. GENERAL 

1.1 Handling Precautions 

Since this high quality laser printer is a precision equipment, daily checking and 
periodic maintenance is indispensable to maintain the expected high performance. 

The following is the list of important precautions & action items for maintenance and 
periodic replacement parts: 



1) Refrain from any operation, disassembly or modification that is not set out in 
this manual. 

2) When assembling or disassembling the printer, turn off the power supply and 
unplug the power code from the power outlet before commencing any work. 

3) Whenever any parts are replaced, confirm that all the removed and replaced 
parts are re-installed correctly prior to testing the printer. 

4) Read carefully and take note of any precaution or warning labels affixed to any 
parts. 

5) Unless otherwise specified, follow exactly the reverse order of the 
disassembly procedures for re-assembly. Do not get the types of removed 
screws mixed up and check that the screw is the correct length. 

6) Do no use any solvent for cleaning, both inside and outside the printer. 

7) It is strictly forbidden to dump waste toner with flammable substances or throw 
it into a fire. This is a very important caution to respect. 



VI-1 



1 .1 .1 List of Maintenance Tools 

Table 6-1 below lists the maintenance tools required for the printer. 

Table 6-1 



No. 


Tool Name 


Function 


1 


Phillips Screwdriver #1 


ForM3 


2 


Phillips Screwdriver #2 


ForM4 


3 


Phillips Screwdriver (short shank) #2 


ForM4 


4 


Slotted Screwdriver #1 


For slotted head screw 


5 


Slotted Screwdriver #2 


For slotted head screw 


6 


Long-Nose Pliers 


For general use 


7 


Pincette 


For general use 


8 


Precision Driver Set (#1 ~ #6) 


For general use 


9 


Gap gauge 


For gap adjustment 


10 


Pliers for C Ring 


C Ring 


11 


Ruler (150mm) 


For general use 


12 


Slide Caliper (150mm) 


For general use 


13 


Digital Meter (DC1000V) 


For general use 


14 


Handy Type Cleaner unique for toner 


For cleaning 


15 


Soft Fur Brush 


For cleaning 



VI-2 



1 .1 .2 List of Consumables for Maintenance 

Table 6-2 below lists the consumables for maintenance. 

Table 6-2 



No. 


Tool Name 


Quantity 


Function 


1 


Toner Cartridge (Y) 


1 piece 


Test Print 


2 


Toner Cartridge (M) 


1 piece 


Test Print 


3 


Toner Cartridge (C) 


1 piece 


Test Print 


4 


Toner Cartridge (K) 


1 piece 


Test Print 


5 


Fuser Cleaner / Oil Bottle 


1 piece 


Test Print 


6 


OPC Belt Cartridge 


1 piece 


Test Print 


7 


Recommended Paper 
(A4 or letter) 


5 sheets 


Test Print 


8 


Recommended Paper 
(Transparency) 


2 sheets 


Test Print 


9 


Cotton Cloth 


10-1 5 pes. 


Cleaning 


10 


Cotton Swab 


10-15 pes. 


Cleaning 


11 


Grease 


10 grams 


M.G** PS265 


12 


Vinyl Bag 


2 bags 


Disposal 



M.G stands for Molybdenum Grease. 



VI-3 



1.2 Periodic Maintenance Cleaning 

See Table 6-3 for details of periodic maintenance cleaning for the following parts. 

1) Registration Roller 2 / Paper Pick-up Roller 

2) Transfer Roller 2 

3) Paper Discharger 

4) OPC Belt Cartridge 

5) Dustproof Glass of the Optical Unit 2 

6) Printer Interior 



/l\ WARNING 



• Before starting any maintenance work, make sure you have unplugged the power 
code from the power outlet 

• There is a risk of electric shock working on the printer with the power connected. 



VI-4 



Periodic Maintenance Cleaning Work 



Table 6-3 



No. 


Parts Name 


Cleaning Work 


Cleaning Cycle *1 
(Condition or Case) 


Description 


Section 


1 


Registration 
Roller 2 / Paper 
Pick-up Roller 


1 . Pull out the media cassette. 

2. Open the transfer unit 2. 

3. Clean the registration roller 2 and 
surrounding area using a dry cloth. 

4. Clean the paper pick-up roller while 
rotating it using a dry cloth. 


1.2.1 


• Defective image 

• Smeared paper 

• Periodic maintenance 


2 


Transfer Roller 
2 


1 . Open the transfer unit 2. 

2. Clean roller and surrounding area using a 
dry cloth. 


1.2.2 


• Defective image 

• Smeared paper 

• Periodic maintenance 


3 


Paper 

Discharging 

Roller 


1 . Open the transfer unit 2. 

2. Remove the paper discharger unit. 

3. Clean the corona wire and case, using a 
cotton swab. 


1.2.3 


• Defective image 

• Paper jam 

• Periodic maintenance 


4 


OPC Belt 
Cartridge 


1 . Remove the OPC belt cartridge. 

2. Clean up spilt toner around the OPC belt 
cartridge and cleaning blade. 

3. Clean the corona wire using the wire 
brush. 


1.2.4 


• Defective image 

• Periodic maintenance 



VI-5 



Periodic Maintenance Cleaning Work 



Table 6-3 



No. 


Parts Name 


Cleaning Work 


Cleaning Cycle *1 
(Condition or Case) 


Description 


Section 


5 


Dustproof 
Glass of Optical 
Unit 2 


1 . Remove the toner cartridges and the OPC 
belt cartridge. 

2. Remove the dust-proof glass. 

3. Using a dry cloth and swab, clean the dirt 
from the dust-proof glass. 


1.2.5 


• Defective image 

• Periodic maintenance 


6 


Printer Interior 
Unit 


1 . Remove the toner cartridges and OPC 
belt cartridge. 

2. Clean the printer's base, using a toner 
vacuum cleaner and dry cloth. 


1.2.6 


• Defective image 

• Periodic maintenance 


[Note] *1 : If a periodic maintenance agreement has been made, checks will be made at every periodic maintenance 
service to prevent any problems from occurring. 



VI-6 



1.2.1 Cleaning the Registration Roller 2 / Paper Pick-up Roller 

The registration roller 2 and paper pick-up roller should be cleaned according to the 
periodic maintenance cleaning cycle set out in Table 6-3. 

1) Registration Roller 2 
<Tools to Prepare> 

Cotton cloth (2-3 pieces) 

<Cleaning Procedure> 

1 ) Turn off the remote switch and power supply, and unplug the power code. 

2) Open the transfer unit 2. 

3) Using a cotton cloth, clean the registration roller 2 incorporated in the transfer 
unit 2 to remove the paper dust. 



Registration 
roller 2 




Transfer unit 2 



Fig.6-1 



A< 



\\CAUTION 

NEVER use alcohol or similar solvents for cleaning the registration roller 2. 



VI-7 



2) Paper Pick-up Roller 
<Tools to Prepare> 

Cotton cloth (1 pieces) 

<Cleaning Procedure> 

1 ) Turn off the remote switch and power supply, and unplug the power code. 

2) Pull out the media cassette. 

3) Open the transfer unit 2. 

4) With the cotton cloth, wipe off the stains such as paper dust adhered to the 
surface of paper pick-up roller. In this instance, softly wipe the roller by manually 
rotating it slowly. 




Paper pick-up roller 



Fig.6-2 



A< 



%\CAUTI0N 

• NEVER use alcohol or similar solvents for cleaning the paper pick-up roller. 

• Application of strong force to the paper pick-up roller may result in the failure of 
misfeed. 



VI-8 



1 .2.2 Cleaning the Transfer Roller 2 

The transfer roller 2 should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance 
cleaning cycle set out in Table 6-3. 

<Tools to Prepare> 

Cotton cloth (2-3 pieces) 

<Cleaning Procedure> 

1 ) Turn off the remote switch and power supply, and unplug the power code. 

2) Open the transfer unit 2. 

3) Using a cotton cloth, clean the transfer roller 2. 



Transfer roller 2 




Transfer unit 2 



Fig.6-3 



A< 



^CAUTION 

NEVER use alcohol or similar solvents for cleaning the transfer roller 2. 



VI-9 



1.2.3 Cleaning the Paper Discharger 

The paper discharger should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance 
cleaning cycle set out in Table 6-3. 

<Tools to Prepare> 

Cotton cloth (2-3 pieces) 
Cotton swab (2-3 pieces) 

<Cleaning Procedure> 

1 ) Turn off the remote switch and power supply, and unplug the power code. 

2) Open the transfer unit 2. 

3) Remove the paper discharger unit. 

i) Sliding AC charger to the arrow direction, release it from the locking craw. 

AC charger 




Locking craw 



Fig.6-4 



ii) Pull the paper discharger unit upwards to remove it from the holder of the 
transfer unit 2. 




Transfer unit 2 



Paper discharger 



Fig.6-5 



VI-10 



4) Clean the discharger case housing with a cotton cloth. 




Fig.6-6 



5) Clean the corona wire and the inside of the charger case with a cotton swab. 

6) Re-install the charger unit into the transfer unit 2. 



Cotton swab 




Corona wire 



Fig.6-7 



A< 



\\CAUTION 

Do not break the corona wire while cleaning the paper discharger unit. 



VI-11 



1 .2.4 Cleaning the OPC Belt Cartridge 

The OPC belt cartridge should be cleaned according to the periodic maintenance 
cleaning cycle set out in Table 6-3. 



/j\ PRECAUTION 



• 



// the belt is exposed for more than two minutes to a light 
source of 800 lux, the belt may be damaged. 



Do not directly touch the OPC belt surface with bare 
hands or gloves. 




<Tools to Prepare> 

Cotton cloth (2-3 pieces) 

<Cleaning Procedure> 

1 ) Turn off the remote switch. 

2) Open the paper exit unit cover 2 and the paper exit front cover 2. 

3) Release the belt cartridge lock levers to pull out the OPC belt cartridge. 

4) Clean the OPC belt cartridge with a cotton cloth. 

i) Remove any toner on the back of the OPC belt cartridge. 



OPC belt cartridge 




Fig.6-8 



VI-12 



ii) Slide the wire cleaner attached on the corona case to the right end and left 
end several times. Return the wire cleaner to the home position. 

iii) Clean the OPC belt cartridge case. 



Corona wire 



Wire cleaner 




Fig.6-9 



A 



• 



\\CAUTION 

Do not break the corona wire while cleaning the corona wire. 

Make sure that the wire cleaner is returned to the home position as shown in Fig. 
6-9 after cleaning the corona wire. 



Replacing the charge unit 

When the problem of print quality such as a blur in the image or lines still occur after 
cleaning the corona wire, replace the charge unit following the procedures below; 

<Tools to Prepare> 

1) Protective sheet (1 piece) 

2) Cotton cloth (2-3 pieces) 

<Parts to Prepare> 

Charge unit (one unit) 



VI-13 



<Replacing Procedure> 

1 ) Remove the OPC belt cartridge. 

2) Cover the belt cartridge with the protective sheet and place the belt cartridge on 
the flat surface. 



Protective sheet 



Waste toner feeder 



Charger unit 




Fig.6-10 



3) Open the green hooks at the right and left hand sides. 

4) Remove the charge unit from the OPC belt cartridge. 



Charger unit 




Fig.6-11 



5) Clean the area where the charge unit is mounted. 

6) Install the new charge unit onto the OPC belt cartridge. 

7) Close the hooks at both sides to hold the charge unit. 



A 



CAUTION 

There remains the waste toner in the OPC belt cartridge. Take care not to spill toner 
due to any shock or vibration. 



VI-14 



1.2.5 Cleaning the Dustproof Glass in the Optical Unit 2 

The dustproof glass in the optical unit 2 should be cleaned according to the periodic 
maintenance cleaning cycle set out in Table 6-3. 

<Tools to Prepare> 

1 ) Cotton cloth (2-3 pieces) 

2) Cotton swab (2-3 pieces) 

<Cleaning Procedure> 

1 ) Turn off the remote switch and power supply, and unplug the power code. 

2) Open the paper exit unit cover 2 and the paper exit front cover 2. 

3) Remove the toner cartridges and the OPC belt cartridge. 

4) Remove the cover of the dust-proof glass from the optical unit 2. 

5) Clean the surface of the dustproof glass with a cotton cloth and swab. 

6) Replace the dustproof glass by aligning the A marks on the optical unit 2 and the 
dustproof glass, ensuring it is locked correctly into place and cannot move. 



A 



CAUTION 

NEVER use alcohol or similar solvents for cleaning the dustproof glass, otherwise it 
will be a cause of image failures. 



Dustproof glass 




SL2 Inner cover C 



Laser WARNING label 



Fig.6-12 



VI-15 



1.2.6 Cleaning the Printer Interior 

The printer interior (bottom) should be cleaned according to the periodic 
maintenance cleaning cycle set out in Table 6-3. 



A 



CAUTION 

Before cleaning the printer interior, protect the transfer drum with a piece of paper so 
that the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner is not contacted directly with the surface of the 
transfer drum 2. 



<Tools to Prepare> 

1 ) Toner vacuum cleaner 

2) Cotton cloth 

<Cleaning Procedure> 

1 ) Turn off the remote switch and power supply, and unplug the power code. 

2) Open the paper exit unit cover 2 and the paper exit front cover 2. 

3) Remove the toner cartridges and the OPC belt cartridge. 

4) Vacuum up toner scattered on the bottom of printer interior with a vacuum 
cleaner designed to handle toner particles. 

5) Clean the printer interior with a cotton cloth. 

6) Replace the removed items. 



Printer interior 




Toner vacuum cleaner 



Fig.6-13 



VI-16 



1.3 Periodic Maintenance Parts and Maintenance Cycle 

Maintenance Work should be implemented according to the "Periodic Maintenance 
Parts and Maintenance Cycle" set out in Table 6-4. 



VI-17 



PR2002161 



Table 6-4: Periodic Maintenance Parts and Maintenance Cycle 



No. 


Maintenance Parts 


Description 


Replacement Cycle *1 




Parts Name 


No. 


Function 


Section 


(Condition or Case) 


1 


OPC Belt Cartridge 


Accessory 


Consists of the OPC belt and forms 
an electrostatic latent image. 


2.1 


60K images or 12 
months whichever 
comes first. 


2 


Fusing Unit 


LJ3875001(US) 
LJ3876001(EC) 


Fixes the toner image onto the 
transported paper. 


2.2 


60K prints 


3 


Transfer Roller 2 *2 


LJ3877001 


Transfers the toner image from the 
transfer drum 2 onto the transported 
paper. 


2.3 


120K prints 


4 


Paper Discharger 2 *2 


LJ3878001 


Separates paper from the transfer 
drum 2. 


2.4 


120K prints 


5 


Drum Cleaner 2 *2 


LJ3879001 


Cleans residual toner from the transfer 
drum 2. 


2.5 


120K prints 


6 


Ozone Filter E *2 


LM0310001 


Absorbs ozone. 


2.6 


120K pages or 12 
months whichever 
comes first. 


7 


Paper Pick-up Roller / 
Separator Pad 2 *2 


UH3485001 
LJ2317001 


Picks up sheets of paper one by one 
from the media cassette. 


2.7 


120K prints 


8 


Transfer Drum 2 *2 


LJ3924001 


Forms the toner image and transfers it 
onto paper. 


2.8 


120K pages or 300K 
images whichever 
comes first. 



VI-18 



PR2002161 



9 


Fuser cleaner 


Accessory 


Cleans the fusing unit. 




20,000pages 


10 


Toner cartridge 


Accessory 


Supplies toner to the OPC Belt 
cartridge. 




K: 12,000pages/CMY: 
7,200 pages 


11 


Oil bottle 


Accessory 


Supplies oil to the fuser unit. 




12,000pages 


12 


Waste toner bottle 


Accessory 


Collects the waste toner. 




18,000pages 



*2: 



These figures are based on an average of 5% coverage of the printable area for one color using laser paper. The frequency of 
replacement will vary, depending on the complexity of the prints, the percentage of coverage, and the type of media. 
Transparencies, glossy coated paper, and other specialty media will result in shortened consumable life. 

You can order these item as a 120K Kit (include, transfer roller 2 / paper discharger unit / drum cleaner 2 / ozone filter / 
paper pick-up roller / separator pad 2 / transfer drum 2) (LM0085001) 



VI-19 



PR2002161 



After completing maintenance work, clear the message displayed on the control panel. (Refer to the list below. 



LCD Maintenance 
Message 


Consumables 


(Toner nearly empty) 

Dill 

K C M Y 


Toner cartridge 
Black 


(Toner nearly empty) 

■ DDD 

K C M Y 


Toner cartridge 

Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow 


FUSER OIL LOW 


Oil Bottle 


REPLACE FCR 


Fuser Cleaner 


REPLACE OPC 
BELT 


OPC Belt Cartridge 


REPLACE PF kit 

1 


Paper feeding roller / 
separator pad 


REPLACE PF kit 
2 


Paper feeding roller / 
separator pad 


REPLACE PF kit 
3 


Paper feeding roller / 
separator pad 


REPLACE FUSER 


Fusing Unit 


REPLACE 12 OK 
KIT 


Drum Cleaner 2/ Paper 
Discharger / Transfer Roller 2 
/ Paper Pick-up Roller / 
Separator Pad 2/ Transfer 
Drum 2 



LCD Operator Call 
Message 


Consumables 


TONER EMPTY K 


Toner cartridge 
Black 


TONER EMPTY CMY 


Toner cartridge 

Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow 


WASTE TONER 


Waste Toner Pack 


OIL EMPTY 


Oil Bottle 


CHANGE FCR 


Fuser Cleaner 



VI-20 



2. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 

The printer displays messages on the control panel screen to indicate replacement is 
due for most of the periodic maintenance parts in both the Video Controller Mode 
and the Engine Controller Mode. 

However, the procedure to clear the message differs between the two modes. The 
following sections describe the Video Controller Mode messages only and should be 
used when replacing parts that have reached their life. 

If replacement parts have to be replaced for Service reasons before their life cycle is 
completed then the Engine Controller Mode should be used to reset the part life. 

2.1 OPC Belt Cartridge Replacement 

<Criterion of Replacement 

The OPC belt cartridge should be replaced with a new one at 60,000 images or 12 
months whichever comes first. 

When time is due for replacement of the OPC belt cartridge, the following message 
appears on the control panel. (The display is blinked.) 




A 



PRECAUTION 



• Do not directly touch the OPC belt surface with bare 
hands or gloves. 



If the belt is exposed for more than two minutes to a light 
source of 800 lux, the belt may be damaged. 




Replacement Procedure> 

1 ) Press the remote switch and power supply to turn off the printer. 

2) Open the paper exit front cover 2 and the paper exit unit cover 2. 



A 



CAUTION 

When installing or removing the OPC belt, be sure to open the paper exit front 
cover 2 first. Failure to do so will cause the OPC belt to be damaged due to contact 
with the toner cartridges. 



VI-20 



3) Release the belt cartridge lock levers at both sides (left & right). 




Belt cartridge lock levers 



Fig.6-14 

4) Pull out the OPC belt cartridge. 



OPC belt cartridge 




Fig.6-15 

5) Prepare a new belt cartridge. 

Pull and remove the tension release pins from both sides (left & right), and then 
remove the protective sheet from a new OPC belt cartridge. 



Tension release pin 



Protective sheet 




OPC belt cartridge 
Fig.6-16 



VI-21 



6) Install the new OPC belt cartridge into the guides at both sides in the printer. 



OPC belt cartridge 




Fig.6-17 

7) Set the belt cartridge lock levers at both sides (left and right). 




Belt cartridge lock lever 



Fig.6-18 

8) Close the paper exit unit cover 2 and the paper exit front cover 2. 

9) Turn on the printer. 

1 0) The printer starts the warming-up process. 

1 1 ) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line. 

12) Press + or - until "RESET MENU" appears. 

13) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or - until "PARTS 
LIFE" appears. 

14) Press Set, and then press + until "OPC BELT" appears. 

15) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state. 



VI-22 



2.2 Fusing Unit Replacement 

<Criterion of Replacement 

The fusing unit should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical 
maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4. 

When the time is due for replacement of the fusing unit, the following message 
appears on the control panel. (The display is blinked.) 




<Purpose of Replacement 

To prevent the print quality from declining due to the deterioration of the fixing unit's 
fuser rollers. 



A 



WARNING 



The fusing unit and its surrounding area are very hot. Make sure prior to starting the 
replacement work that the fusing unit and its surrounding area are well cooled down, 
otherwise you may get burned. 



<Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials> 

1 ) Two or three pieces of cotton cloth for cleaning 

2) Fusing Unit (one unit) 



VI-23 



<Work Procedure> 



Sequence of Disassembling 



1 ) After turning off the remote switch and power supply, unplug the power code 
from the power outlet. 

2) Open the paper exit unit cover 2. 

3) Slacken the two securing screws securing the fusing unit. 

4) Holding the handles at both ends of the fusing unit and remove the fusing unit 
from the printer. 

5) Remove the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner. 



Screw 




Fig.6-19 



VI-24 



/l\ PRECAUTION 



When removing the fusing unit, take care to keep the unit level so that no oil leakage 
or spillage occurs. 

When shipping the printer, remove the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner from the fusing 
unit After removing the oil bottle, be sure to remove the oil remaining in the fusing unit 
following the procedure below. Failure to do so will cause severe damage to the 
printer. 

i) Absorb the oil with the supplied syringe. 

ii) After absorbing the oil, stuff the soft paper into the oil pan so that no oil leakage 
occurs. 




Fig.6-20 



Sequence of Replacement 



1 ) Prepare a new fusing unit before starting the replacement work. 

2) Return the roller tension release levers at both sides to the direction of the 
arrows. 

3) Install the oil bottle and fuser cleaner onto the new fusing unit. 



Oil bottle 




Fuser cleaner 



Fig.6-21 



VI-25 



Sequence of Assembling 



1 ) Install the new fusing unit onto the printer, 
i) Tighten the securing screws, 
ii) Close the paper exit unit cover 2. 




Fig.6-22 



A 



PRECAUTION 

When replacing the fusing unit, take time and great care to complete the job 
properly. Application of strong force to the fusing unit may result in the failure of the 
fusing unit and other parts. 



2) Plug the power code into the power outlet and turn on the printer. 

3) Upon completion of the warming-up process. 

4) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line. 

5) Press + or - until "RESET MENU" appears. 

6) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or - until "PARTS 
LIFE" appears. 

7) Press Set, and then press + until "FUSER UNIT" appears. 

8) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state. 

Note: 

When installing the new fusing unit into the printer, you have to wait approximately 
for 30 minutes after the unit is installed to allow the fusing oil to circulate in the unit. 



VI-26 



2.3 Transfer Roller 2 Replacement 

<Criterion of Replacement 

The transfer roller 2 should be replaced at the same time as a new discharger unit 
according to the periodical maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4. 

When time is due for replacement of the transfer roller 2, the following message 
appears on the control panel. (The display is blinked.) 




<Purpose of Replacement 

To prevent the transfer efficiency declining due to deterioration of the transfer roller 
2. 

<Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials> 

1 ) Two or three pieces of cotton cloth for cleaning. 

2) Transfer roller 2 (one unit) 

<Work Procedures> 



Sequence of Disassembling 



1 ) After turning off the remote switch and power supply, unplug the power code 
from the power outlet. 

2) Open the transfer unit 2. 




Transfer unit 2 



Fig.6-23 



VI-27 



Sequence of Replacement 



1) Lift the transfer roller 2 lock levers at both sides (right & left) to the arrow 
direction A. (Fig. 6-25) 

2) Holding the lock levers at both sides, pull them upwards to remove the transfer 
roller 2. 




Transfer roller 



Fig.6-24 

3) Install a new transfer roller 2 into the printer. 

i) Prepare a new transfer roller 2. 

ii) Hold the lock levers at both sides and align both ends of the shaft to the slit on 
the transfer base. 

iii) Push the transfer roller 2 shaft into the slit and place the bearing of the roller 
onto the spring. Ensure that the spring is not bent as shown in Fig. 6-25. 

iv)Fix the transfer roller 2 by pulling down the lock levers at both sides to the 
arrow direction B. 



A /v-^ 



Lock lever 



Spring 





Proper assembly 



Wrong assembly 



Fig.6-25 



VI-28 



Sequence of Assembling 



1 ) Close the transfer unit 2. 

2) Plug the power code into the power outlet and turn on the printer. 

3) Upon completion of the warming-up process. 

4) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line. 

5) Press + or - until "RESET MENU" appears. 

6) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or - until "PARTS 
LIFE" appears. 

7) Press Set, and then press + until "120K KIT" appears. 

8) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state. 



VI-29 



2.4 Paper Discharger Unit Replacement 

<Criterion of Replacement 

The paper discharger should be replaced with a new discharger unit at the same 
time as the transfer roller 2 according to the periodical maintenance cycle set out in 
Table 6-4. 

When time is due for replacement of paper discharger unit, the following message 
appears on the control panel. (The display is blinked.) 




<Purpose of Replacement 

To prevent the discharging efficiency from declining due to deterioration of the paper 
discharger unit. 



^PRECAUTION 

Do not touch the corona wire of the paper discharger unit 



A< 



<Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials> 

1 ) Two or three pieces of cotton cloth for cleaning 

2) Paper discharger (one unit) 

<Work Procedures> 



Sequence of Disassembling 



1 ) After turning off the remote switch and power supply, unplug the power code 
from the power outlet. 

2) Open the transfer unit 2. 



VI-30 



Sequence of Replacement 



1 ) Remove the paper discharger referring to section 1 .2.3 'Cleaning the Paper 
Discharger'. 




Paper discharger 

Fig.6-26 

2) Clean the area where the paper discharger unit is mounted. 

3) Install a new paper discharger unit into the transfer unit 2. 

Make sure to replace the transfer roller 2 with a new one at this time. 




Fig.6-27 



Sequence of Assembling 



1 ) Close the transfer unit 2. 

2) Plug the power code into the printer, and turn on the printer. 

3) Upon completion of the warming-up process. 

4) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line. 

5) Press + or - until "RESET MENU" appears. 

6) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or - until "PARTS 
LIFE" appears. 

7) Press Set, and then press + until "120K KIT" appears. 

8) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state. 



VI-31 



2.5 Drum Cleaner 2 Replacement 

<Criterion of Replacement 

The drum cleaner 2 should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical 
maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4. 

When time is due for replacement of the drum cleaner 2, the following message 
appears on the control panel. (The display is blinked.) 




<Purpose of Replacement 

To prevent the cleaning efficiency from declining due to deterioration of the drum 
cleaner 2. 



/l\ PRECAUTION 



When installing the drum cleaner 2, firstly locate the bearing and the bias pole into 
the contacts. Reconfirm this connection prior to testing the printer. 



<Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials> 

1 ) Two or three pieces of cotton cloth for cleaning. 

2) Drum cleaner 2 (one unit) 

<Work Procedure> 



Sequence of Disassembling 



1) Turn off the printer. 

2) Open the paper exit unit cover 2 . 



VI-32 



Sequence of Replacement 



1 ) Remove the cleaner cover by releasing the two hooks. 



Cleaner cover 



Hook 




exit unit cover 



Fig.6-28 

2) Pull the drum cleaner 2 upwards to remove both ends of the cleaner from the 
bearings. 

3) Holding the handle located on the top of the drum cleaner 2, lift the cleaner to 
remove it. 



Drum cleaner 2 




Fig.6-29 



VI-33 



4) 
5) 



Clean the area where the drum cleaner 2 is mounted. 

Install a new drum cleaner 2 to the printer. 

Align both ends of the drum cleaner 2 to the bearings in the printer and push the 
drum cleaner 2 into the printer. 



Spring 




Shaft of drum cleaner 2 



Shaft of counter 



Fig.6-30 



A 



CAUTION 

When installing the drum cleaner 2, be sure to put it into the printer correctly, 
indicated by a click. 



Sequence of Assembling 



1 ) Install the drum cleaner cover. 

2) Close the paper exit unit cover 2. 

3) Plug the power code into the printer, and turn on the printer. 

4) Upon completion of the warming-up process. 

5) Press any of the Menu buttons (+, -, Set or Back) to take the printer Off Line. 

6) Press + or - until "RESET MENU" appears. 

7) Press Set to proceed to the next menu level, and then press + or - until "PARTS 
LIFE" appears. 

8) Press Set, and then press + until "120K KIT" appears. 

9) Press Set, and then press Go. The printer is now in the READY state. 



VI-34 



2.6 Ozone Filter Replacement 

<Criterion of Replacement 

The ozone filter should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical 
maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4. This is to prevent ozone from being 
exhausted due to the deterioration of the ozone filter. 



A 



CAUTION 

Ozone filter should be replaced with a new filter every 12 months, otherwise it may 
cause an offensive smell. 



<Necessary Tools and Replacement Materials> 

No special tools and equipment are necessary for the replacement of the ozone 
filter. 

<Work Procedure> 

1 ) Remove the ozone filter case provided at the rear of the side cover (R) 2. 

2) Remove the ozone filter from the ozone filter case. 

3) Install a new ozone filter to the filter case. 

4) Install the ozone filter case to the side cover (R) 2. 



Ozone filter 




Filter case 



Fig.6-31 



VI-35 



2.7 Paper Pick-up Roller and Separator Pad 2 Replacement 

<Criterion of Replacement 

The paper pick-up roller and separator pad 2 should be replaced with new ones 
according to the periodical maintenance cycle set out in Table 6-4. 

When time is due for replacement of the paper pick-up roller and separator pad 2, 
the following message appears on the control panel. (The display is blinked.) 




They also should be replaced when paper feed jams occur. 

<Work Procedure> 

1) Whenever paper feed jams occur, confirm the cause by following the information 
in Section 3 of Chapter VIII. 

2) If the paper jam still occurs, replace the paper pick-up roller and separator pad 2 
referring to Section 4.6.6 of Chapter VII. 



Separator pad 2 




Paper pick-up roller 



Fig.6-32 



A 



CAUTION 

• This is one of the periodic replacement items, not customer service. It should be 
implemented upon request of the customer or at periodic maintenance. 

• After replacement, confirm the improvement of feeding for the normal paper, 
transparency, thick paper, etc. 



VI-36 



2.8 Transfer Drum 2 Replacement 

<Criterion of Replacement 

The transfer drum 2 should be replaced with a new one according to the periodical 
maintenance cycle set out in the Table 6-4. 

When time is due for replacement of the transfer drum 2, the following message 
appears on the control panel. (The display is blinked.) 




It should be also replaced when an image failure occurs due to transfer drum 2 
damage. 

<Work Procedure> 

1) Whenever an image failure occurs, confirm the cause by following the 
information in Section 5 of Chapter VIII. 

2) If the image failure still occurs, replace the transfer drum 2 referring to Section 
4.1.12 of Chapter VII. 



Transfer drum 2 




Fig.6-33 



/\\ CAUTION 



• This is one of the periodic replacement items, not customer service. It should be 
implemented upon request of the customer or at periodic maintenance. 

• After replacement, confirm the improvement of print quality failure by test printing. 



VI-37 



CHAPTER VII 

DISASSEMBLY 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTER VII DISASSEMBLY VIM 

1. BEFORE STARTING DISASSEMBLY VII-1 

1.1 Precautions VII-1 

1 .2 Preparation of Disassembly VII-1 

2. PARTS NAME VII-3 

2.1 Cover VII-3 

2.2 Circuit Boards (PCBs) VII-4 

2.3 Motor Units VII-4 

2.4 Clutches and Solenoids VII-5 

2.5 Sensors VII-5 

3. DISASSEMBLY FLOW VII-6 

4. DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE VII-7 

4.1 Top of the Printer VII-7 

4.1.1 BC Lock Lever VII-7 

4.1 .2 Upper Side Cover (L) 2 VII-8 

4.1 .3 Panel PWB (including LCD) VII-9 

4.1 .4 Side Cover (R) 2 VII-10 

4.1 .5 Top Cover ASSY 2 VII-1 1 

4.1.6 IOD1 PWB 2 VII-12 

4.1.7 Interlock Switch (Front) (for Front Cover 2) VII-13 

4.1 .8 SL2 PS Fan ASSY VII-14 

4.1.9 Interlock Switch (Top) VII-15 

4.1.10 Drum Cleaner 2 VII-15 

4.1 .1 1 Waste Toner Feeder Unit / Belt Sensor (PBS) VII-16 

4.1.12 Transfer Drum 2 VII-17 

4.1 .13 WT U Spring / DEV, Drive Gear 2 VII-18 

4.1.14 Erase Lamp VII-19 

4.1 .15 SL3 Paper Guide D VII-19 

4.2 Right Side of the Printer VII-20 

4.2.1 Base Cover (R) 2 VII-20 

4.2.2 IOD2 PWB 2 (with Base) VII-21 

4.2.3 TR Cam Clutch 3 (FBCM) VII-22 

4.2.4 Fixing Clutch (FUCL) VII-22 

4.2.5 Cleaner Clutch 3 (FBCL) VII-22 

4.2.6 TR Cam Clutch 3 (TRCM) VII-23 

4.2.7 Registration Clutch (RECL) VII-23 

4.2.8 Main Motor 2 / BD Gear ASSY 2 VII-24 

4.2.9 Developer Motor 2 VII-25 

4.2.10 Main Gear Unit 2 VII-26 

4.2.1 1 WT Holder ASSY 2 VII-27 

4.2.12 Developer Clutch 2 (C, M, Y, K) VII-27 

4.2.13 Cooling Fan OZ VII-28 



4.2.14 Paper Pick-up Clutch (PCLU) VII-29 

4.2.15 Developer Drive Unit 2 VII-30 

4.2.16 Toner Sensor ASSY (TPD) VII-30 

4.2.17 FP2 Gear ASSY VII-31 

4.2.18 Waste Toner Feeder (U) 2 VII-31 

4.3 Left Side of the Printer VII-32 

4.3.1 Video Controller PCB VII-32 

4.3.2 Side Cover (L) 2 VII-34 

4.3.3 Base Cover (L) 2 VII-35 

4.3.4 MCTL PWB 2 VII-36 

4.3.5 Fuser Connector 2 VII-38 

4.3.6 High Voltage Unit 2 VII-40 

4.3.7 TR Terminal Base ASSY/ Interlock Switch (Rear) VII-41 

4.3.8 Paper Sensor (D. EN) VII-42 

4.3.9 Rear Cover 2 / Rear Cover (U) 2 VII-42 

4.3.10 Power Supply Unit / SW Button VII-43 

4.3.1 1 FP Cassette Guide L/R VII-45 

4.3.12 Paper Size Sensor 2 (PSU) VII-46 

4.3.13 Toner Sensor ASSY (TTR) VII-47 

4.3.14 Toner Key Sensor 2 (TNK) VII-47 

4.3.15 Belt Sensor (DPJ) /Oil Sensor (OIL) VII-48 

4.4 Paper Exit Unit VII-49 

4.4.1 Paper Exit Unit Cover 2 / Paper Exit Front Cover 2 VII-49 

4.4.2 Cooling Fan (EX) 2 VII-51 

4.4.3 Paper Sensor (F. CL) VII-52 

4.4.4 Paper Sensor (EXF) VII-52 

4.4.5 Discharging Brush VII-53 

4.4.6 Paper Exit Roller VII-53 

4.4.7 P.EX Switch Guide VII-54 

4.4.8 Paper Sensor (PT2) VII-55 

4.5 Front of the Printer VII-56 

4.5.1 Optical Unit 2 VII-56 

4.5.2 Front Cover 2 VII-58 

4.5.3 Front Cover Catch VII-58 

4.5.4 FD2 Arm ASSY VII-59 

4.5.5 Front Cover Unit 2 VII-60 

4.5.6 Hinge Base 2 (L, R) VII-61 

4.5.7 DE Solenoid ASSY VII-62 

4.6 Rear of the Printer VII-63 

4.6.1 Transfer Unit 2 VII-63 

4.6.2 Transfer Roller 2 VII-65 

4.6.3 Registration Roller 2 VII-65 

4.6.4 Paper Sensor (P.EN) / OHP Sensor 3 VII-66 

4.6.5 Paper Sensor (PT1) VII-67 

4.6.6 Paper Pick-up Roller / Separator Pad 2 VII-67 

4.7 Fusing Unit VII-68 



CHAPTER VII DISASSEMBLY 

1 . BEFORE STARTING DISASSEMBLY 

1.1 Precautions 

Follow the precautions described below during maintenance work. 

1) Do not implement any operation, disassembly or modification which is not set out 
in this manual. 

2) When assembling or disassembling the printer, turn off the power supply and 
unplug the power cable from the power outlet before commencing any work. 

3) This printer incorporates dangerous parts subject to warnings such as "High 
Temperature", "High Voltage" and "Laser Radiation". Before starting any work on 
this printer, make sure you have read and understand the warnings set out in this 
manual. 

4) Collect and dispose of any waste toner cartridges removed during maintenance 
correctly in accordance with local regulations. Do not dispose of them with 
inflammable materials or dispose of them into a fire. 

5) The grounding wire is disconnected when replacing or removing the DC power 
supply unit. After completing the replacement work, confirm that the grounding 
wire is reconnected correctly to the earth mark (J). 

6) Ensure that the type and length of screws removed during replacement of 
maintenance parts is noted and the correct screws are used during re-assembly. 
(See Table 7-1.) 

7) Do not use any solvent such as alcohol for the maintenance of this printer. 

8) Confirm that all the parts and covers are installed or assembled correctly before 
starting the test run after replacement of maintenance parts. 

9) The re-assembly order is the reverse of the dis-assembly order. In all cases, 
follow the flow chart in reverse to re-assemble the printer. Where there is any 
change to the order, this is noted in the relevant section. 



1 .2 Preparation of Disassembly 

Follow the procedure described below for preparation before commencing any 
work. 

(1 ) Ensure that the power cable is disconnected from the power outlet. 

(2) Remove all consumable parts (OPC belt cartridge, fuser cleaner, oil bottle, all 
toner cartridges, ozone filter) and the Main (Video Controller) PCB, and then 
store them correctly before starting disassembly. 



/j\ PRECAUTION 



Do not directly touch the OPC belt 
surface with bare hands or gloves. 



If the belt is exposed for more than two 
minutes to a light source of 800 lux, the 
belt may be damaged. 




VIM 



Table 7-1 : Table of Screw Sizes Used in the Printer 



Class 
Code 


Name of Scerw 


Size and shape of Screw 


Remarks 


M-Threed 
TS 


Length 


Sharp 


BT3x8 


Cross recessed 
head tapping 
screw. 


T3 


8mm 


(+) Qmqd 


To be used 
for installation 
of plastic parts. 


BT4x8 


T4 


8mm 


© n 


m 


BT4x10 


T4 


10mm 


© 1 


ma 


ST3x6 


S tight screw 


ST 


6mm 


©0 


m 


To be used 
for installation 
of parts to 
steel plate. 


ST4x6 


© 


m 


ST4x10 


10mm 


(+) Qui 


To be used 
for flame and 
fuser connector. 


F3x6 


Cross recessed 
head with 
flange. 


M3 


6mm 


# P 


m 


Fan case. 


F3x10 


M3 


10mm 


<§>^ 




Optical Unit 


M3x6 


Cross recessed 
head screw with 
washer. 


M3 


6mm 


© ( 


|» 


For fuser wiring. 


M4x6 


Cross recessed 
head screw 
(Brass). 


M4 


6mm 


® ( 


fu 


ForGND. 



VII-2 



2. PARTS NAME 

2.1 Cover 

<Front View> 



Paper Exit Unit Cover 2 
4.4.1 



Top Cover ASSY 2 
4.1.5 



Upper Side Cover (L) 2 
4.1.2 



Side Cover (L) 2 
4.3.2 



Base Cover (L) 2 
4.3.3 




Front cover 2 



Media Cassette 



Side F Cover (L) 



Power Button 

Fig.7-1 



<Rear View> 



Control Panel 



Cleaner Cover 



Side Cover (R) 2 
4.1.4 



Base cover (R) 2 
4.2.1 




Controller Box 



Rear Cover 2 
4.3.9 



Rear Cover (U) 2 
4.3.9 



Transfer Unit 2 



Fig.7-2 



VII-3 



2.2 Circuit Boards (PCBs) 



High-voltage Power 
Supply PCB (HVU) 
4.3.6 



MAIN PCB ASSY 
HL-2600CN 

BRNET PCB 
UNIT4100H 



Panel PWB 
4.1.3 



IOD2 PWB 2 
4.2.2 




MCTL PWB 2 
4.3.4 



DC Power Supply PCB 
(LVPS) 4.3.10 



IOD1 PWB 2 
4.1.6 



Erase Lamp 
4.1.14 



Fig.7-3 



2.3 Motor Units 



Cooling Fan (EX) 2 
4.4.2 



SL2 PS Fan ASSY 
4.1.8 



Main motor 2 
4.2.8 




Developer Motor 2 
4.2.9 



Cooling Fan OZ 



Scanner Motor 



Fig.7-4 



VII-4 



2.4 Clutches and Solenoids 



Developer clutch 2 (K) 
4.2.12 



Developer clutch 2 (Y) 
4.2.12 



Developer clutch 2 (M) 
4.2.12 



Developer clutch 2 (C) 
4.2.12 




TR Cam Clutch 3 (FBCM) 
4.2.3 



Fixing Clutch (FUCL) 
4.2.4 

Cleaner Clutch 3 (FBCL) 
4.2.5 



TR Cam Clutch 3 (TRCM) 
4.2.6 



Registration Clutch (RECL) 
4.2.7 



Paper Pick-up Clutch (PCLU) 
4.2.14 



2.5 Sensors 



Fig.7-5 



Paper Sensor (PT2) Belt Sensor (DPJ) 



Paper Sensor (F.CL) 
4.4.3 



Paper Sensor (EXF) 
4.4.4 



Toner Sensors ASSY 
(TPD/TTR) 4.2.16, 4.3.13 



Oil Sensor (OIL) 
4.3.15 



Interlock Switch (Top) 
4.1.9 

Interlock Switch (Rear) 
4.3.7 

Paper Sensor (D. EN) 
4.3.8 



Paper Sensor (PT1) 
4.6.5 




Interlock Switch (Front) 
4.1.7 



Developer Position Sensor 



Waste Toner Sensor (WTS) 



Paper Sensor (P. EN) 
4.6.4 



OHP Sensor 
4.6.4 



Paper Size Sensor (PSU) 

Fig.7-6 



VII-5 



3. DISASSEMBLY FLOW 



I.Top 



BC Lock Lever 

1 



Upper Side Cover (L) 2 

1 



Panel PWB (including LCD) 

1 



Side Cover (R) 2 



I 



Top Cover ASSY 2 

1 



IOD1 PWB 2 

I 



Interlock Switch (Front) 
(for Front Cover 2) 

1 



SL2 PS Fan ASSY 



Interlock Switch (Top) 



Drum Cleaner 2 



Waste Toner Feeder Unit 
/ Belt Sensor (PBS) 



Transfer Drum 2 



WT U Spring / 
DEV, Drive Gear 2 



T 



Erase Lamp 

~~r~ 



SL3 Paper Guide D 



Video Controller PCB 



4. Paper Exit Unit 



Side Cover (L) 2 

i 



Paper Exit Unit Cover 2 / 
Paper Exit Front Cover 2 



Base Cover (L) 2 



Cooling Fan (EX) 2 

I 



MCTL PWB 2 

i 



Paper Sensor (F.CL) 

i 



Fuser Connector 2 



Paper Sensor (EXF) 



Discharging Brush 



High Voltage Unit 2 



I 



Paper Exit Roller 



TR Terminal Base ASSY 
/ Interlock Switch (Rear) 



I 



Paper Sensor (D. EN) 

I 



P.EX Switch Guide 



Paper Sensor (PT2) 



Rear Cover 2 / 
Rear Cover (U) 2 

I 



Power Supply Unit 
/ SW Button 



FP Cassette Guide Sel L/R 



Paper Size Sensor 2 (PSU) 



Toner Sensor ASSY (TTR) 



Toner Key Sensor 2 (TNK) 

i 



Belt Sensor (DPJ) 
/Oil Sensor (OIL) 



2. Right 



Base Cover (R) 2 



Optical Unit 2 



IOD2 PWB2 (with Base) 



Transfer Unit 2 



Front Cover 2 



TR Cam Clutch 3 (FBCM) 



Fixing Clutch (FUCL) 

I 



Transfer Roller 2 



Front Cover Catch 



Cleaner Clutch 3 (FBCL) 

I 



FD2 Arm ASSY 



TR Cam Clutch 3 (TRCM) 

I 



Front Cover Unit 2 



Registration Clutch (RECL) 



Hinge Base 2 (L,R) 



Main Motor 2 / 
BD Gear ASSY 2 

I 



DE Solenoid ASSY 



Developer Motor 2 



Main Gear Unit 2 



I 



WT Holder ASSY 2 



Developer Clutch 2 (C.M.Y.K) 

I 



Cooling Fan OZ 

I 



Paper Pick-up Clutch (PCLU) 



Developer Drive Unit 2 



Toner Sensor ASSY (TPD) 

I 



FP2 Gear ASSY 

I 



Waste Toner Feeder (U) 2 



Resistration Roller 2 



Paper Sensor (P.EN) 
/OHP Sensor 3 



T 



Paper Sensor (PT1) 

I 



Paper Pick-up Roller 
/ Separator Pad 2 



7. Fusing Unit 



VII-6 



4. DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 

4.1 Top of the Printer 
4.1.1 BC Lock Lever 

1 ) Remove the set screws (2 pes.) to remove the BC lock levers at the right and left 
hand sides. 



BC lock lever 



lever 




Fig.7-7 



VII-7 



4.1 .2 Upper Side Cover (L) 2 

1 ) Open the paper exit unit 2. 

2) Remove the set screw BT4X8 securing the side cover (L) 2. 



Upper side cover (L) 2 



Paper exit unit 2 




Fig.7-8 



3) Press the exterior of the side cover inwards(L) and unlock the hooks (three locations) 
from the side cover (L) 2. 



Side Cover (L) 2 




Fig.7-9 



VII-8 



4.1 .3 Panel PWB (including LCD) 

1 ) Disconnect the connector from the panel case ASSY. 

2) Release the two hooks on the panel base to remove the panel case ASSY and panel 
base from the printer. 



Panel case ASSY 



Hook 




Fig.7-10 

3) Remove the set screw BT4X1 (1 pc.) to remove the panel case ASSY from the 
panel base. 

4) Remove the set screws BT3X12 (4 pes.) to remove the panel shield plate, panel 
PWB and panel button from the panel case ASSY. 



Panel case ASSY 



Panel button 



Panel PWB 




Panel shield plate 



Panel base 



Fig.7-11 



VII-9 



4.1.4 Side Cover (R) 2 

1 ) Remove the set screw BT4X8 (1 pc.) of side cover (R) 2 at the rear of the printer. 



Side Cover (R) 2 




Fig.7-12 

2) Slide the side cover (R) 2 in the direction of the arrows as shown in Fig. 7-1 3. 

3) Remove the side cover (R) 2 by releasing the two hooks. 




Hook 



Front cover 2 Unit 



Cover (R) : 



Fig.7-13 



VII-10 



4.1.5 Top Cover ASSY 2 

1) Remove the set screws BT4X8 (2 pes.) from the top cover ASSY 2. (Top X 1 and 
Right hand side X1) 

2) Remove the top cover ASSY 2 from the printer. 



Top cover ASSY 2 




Fig.7-14 



3) Push the paper stopper set up from the back side of the top cover ASSY 2 to remove 
the paper stopper set. 

4) Remove the set screw BT3X8 (1 pc.) and remove the P. EX button from the top cover 
ASSY 2. 



Paper stopper set 



P. EX button 




Top cover ASSY 2 



Fig.7-15 



VII-11 



4.1.6 I0D1 PWB2 



1) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) to remove the shield upper from the printer. 

2) Disconnect all the harness connectors (15 pes.) connected to the IOD1 PWB 2. 

3) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (6 pes.) to remove the IOD1 PWB 2 from the printer. 



Shield upper 




IOD1 PWB 2 



Fig.7-16 



A< 



^PRECAUTION 

When handling the IOD1 PWB 2, take care that no damage is caused due to electrostatic 
charges. 



VII-12 



4.1 .7 Interlock Switch (Front) (for Front Cover 2) 

1 ) Remove the set screw (1 pc.) to remove the SW ASSY from the printer. 

2) Disconnect the connector. 



sw ASSY 




Fig.7-17 

3) Release the two hooks and remove the interlock switch from the SW base F. 

Hook 



SW base F 




Interlock switch 



Fig.7-18 



A< 



^CAUTION 

Since the interlock switch is an important safety item, after installation confirm that the 
switch operates correctly. 



VII-13 



4.1.8 SL2 PS Fan ASSY 

1) Disconnect the connector from the PS fan ASSY. 

2) Remove the set screw FT3X6 (1 pc.) to remove the SL2 PS fan ASSY from the 
printer. 



SL2 PS fan ASSY 




Fig.7-19 



3) Remove the tape to remove the PS fan case and PS fun duct from the cooling fan 
(EX) 2. 



PS fan case 

Fig.7-20 



PS fan duct 




VII-14 



4.1 .9 Interlock Switch (Top) 

1 ) Remove the set screw BT3X8 (1 pc.) to remove the switch holder case from the PS 
fan case. 

2) Remove the interlock switch from the switch holder case. 



A- 



^CAUTION 

Since the interlock switch is an important safety item, after installation confirm that the 
switch operates correctly. 



PS fan case 




Interlock switch 



Switch holder case 



Fig.7-21 



4.1.10 Drum Cleaner 2 



1 ) Push the two hooks on the cleaner cover backwards to release them and remove the 
cleaner cover. 

2) Remove the drum cleaner 2 by pushing the handle backwards until it releases from 
the contacts at the left and right hand ends, then lift out the drum cleaner assembly. 



Drum cleaner 2 




Fig.7-22 



VII-15 



4.1 .1 1 Waste Toner Feeder Unit / Belt Sensor (PBS) 



1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) from the waste toner feeder unit. 

2) Remove the waste toner feeder unit complete with the belt sensor. 

3) Unclip and remove the belt sensor from the waste toner feeder unit. 

Hook 



Hook 



Waste toner feeder unit 




Fig.7-23 



VII-16 



4.1.12 Transfer Drum 2 



1 ) Open the transfer unit cover 2. 

2) Protect the surface of the transfer drum 2 by covering it with paper. 

3) Lift the transfer drum 2 up and forwards from the transfer unit 2 side. 

4) Release the transfer drum 2 from the shaft supports. 

5) Pull up and remove the transfer drum 2 from the top of the printer. 

Note: 

• For easier removal, push the drum upwards and diagonally forwards. 

• When re-assembling the transfer drum 2, slide the drum shaft between the metal 
plates and ensure the drum is fully located into the correct retaining position. 



A< 



^PRECAUTION 

Do not touch the transfer drum 2 surface with your bare hands or scratch it. Protect the 
drum surface during handling. 



Transfer drum 2 




Fig.7-24 



VII-17 



4.1.13 WT U Spring / DEV, Drive Gear 2 

1 ) Remove the C ring and remove the four DEV, drive gears 2 from the (gear base). 



DEV, drive gear 2 




DEV, drive gear 2 



DEV, drive gear 2 



DEV, drive gear 2 



Fig.7-25 



2) Remove the set screw (1 pc.) to remove the (gear) and (gear holder) from the shaft. 

3) Remove the end of the WT U spring from the shaft of the frame to remove the WT U 
spring from the frame. 



(Gear holder) 




WT U spring 



Fig.7-26 



VII-18 



4.1.14 Erase Lamp 



1 ) Remove the both ends of the erase lamp from the erase holder. 

2) Disconnect the connector of the erase lamp. 



Erase Lamp 




Erase holder 



Fig.7-27 



Erase holder 



4.1.15 SL3 Paper Guide D 

1 ) Release the two hooks of the SL3 paper guide D. 

2) Slide the SL3 paper guide D upwards and remove it from the frame. 



SL3 paper guide D 



SL3 paper guide D 




Fig.7-28 



VII-19 



4.2 Right Side of the Printer 
4.2.1 Base Cover (R) 2 

1 ) Remove the set screws BT4X8 (2 pes.) from the base cover (R) 2. 

2) Remove the base cover (R) 2 from the base. 

Note: 

If the optional lower tray unit is fitted, it will be necessary to remove the lower tray clamp 

screw and locking bar to release the base cover (R) 2. 




Base cover (R) 2 



Fig.7-29 



/l\ PRECAUTION 



• When assembling the base cover, insert the leading edge of the base cover (R) 2 into 
the hook provided at the bottom (left and right) of the base plate. 

• Ensure that projecting part ( £b ) of the base cover (R) 2 goes into the hole in the 
base plate bottom. 



VII-20 



4.2.2 I0D2 PWB 2 (with Base) 

1) Disconnect all the harness connectors (16 pes.) connected to the IOD2 PWB 2. 

2) Remove the IOD harness guide. 

3) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the IOD2 PWB 2 (with base) from 
the printer. 

4) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) to remove the IOD2 PWB 2 from the (base). 



A< 



^PRECAUTION 

When handling the IOD2 PWB 2 take care not to cause electrostatic damage to the PWB. 




IOD harness guide 



IOD2 PWB 2 (with base) 



Fig.7-30 




IOD2 PWB 2 



Fig.7-31 



VII-21 



4.2.3 TR Cam Clutch 3 (FBCM) 

1 ) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft. 

2) Pull out the TR cam clutch 3 (FBCM) from the shaft. 

4.2.4 Fixing Clutch (FUCL) 

1 ) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft. 

2) Pull out the fixing clutch (FUCL) from the shaft. 

4.2.5 Cleaner Clutch 3 (FBCL) 

1 ) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft. 

2) Pull out the cleaner clutch 3 (FBCL) from the shaft. 



TR cam clutch 3 (FBCM) 




Fixing clutch (FUCL) 



& — C ring 



C ring 
Cleaner clutch 3 (FBCL) 



Fig.7-32 



VII-22 



4.2.6 TR Cam Clutch 3 (TRCM) 

1 ) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft. 

2) Pull out the TR cam clutch 3 (TRCM) from the shaft. 

4.2.7 Registration Clutch (RECL) 

1 ) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft. 

2) Pull out the registration clutch (RECL) from the shaft. 




TR cam clutch 3 (TRCM) 



C ring 
Registration clutch (RECL) 



Fig.7-33 



VII-23 



4.2.8 Main Motor 2 / BD Gear ASSY 2 

1 ) Remove the connector (1 pc.) from the main motor 2 PCB. 

2) Remove the screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) holding the main motor 2 to the BD gear ASSY 2. 

3) Remove the main motor 2 from the BD gear ASSY 2. 

4) Remove the screws ST3X6 (3 pes.) holding the BD gear ASSY 2. 

5) Remove the BD Gear ASSY 2. 



BD Gear ASSY 2 




Main motor 2 



Fig.7-34 



VII-24 



4.2.9 Developer Motor 2 



A< 



^CAUTION 

Take care not to stress the motor drive PCB when removing the connector or handling 
the motor / PCB assembly. 



1 ) Remove the connector (1 pc.) from the developer motor 2 PCB. 

2) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) holding the developer motor 2 to the 
developer drive unit 2. 

3) Remove the developer motor 2. 




Developer motor 2 



Fig.7-35 



VII-25 



4.2.10 Main Gear Unit 2 



1 ) Remove the screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) to remove the main gear unit 2 from the printer. 




Main gear unit 2 



Fig.7-36 



VII-26 



4.2.11 WT Holder ASSY 2 

1 ) Open the front cover 2. 

2) Remove the waste toner box. 

3) Remove the set screw BT3X8 (1 pc.) to remove the cover (FR) by pulling the cover 
(FR) forwards to release the lower hook. 

4) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pc.) to remove the WT holder ASSY 2 from the 
frame. 




Plastic tube 



WT holder ASSY 2 



Front cover 2 



Lower hook 



Fig.7-37 



4.2.12 Developer Clutch 2 (C, M, Y, K) 



1 ) Remove the outer plastic C ring of each developer clutch 2 from the shaft. 

2) Pull out the developer clutch 2 from the shaft. 




Developer clutch 2 



C ring 



Fig.7-38 



VII-27 



4.2.13 Cooling Fan OZ 



1 ) Remove the tape holding the cable harness to the top of cooling fan OZ. 

2) Remove the set screw F3X6 (1 pc.) from the fan case assembly. 

3) Remove the fan case assembly from the printer. 




Fan case assembly 



3§fc 



Fig.7-39 



4) Remove the cooling fan OZ from the fan case. 



Cooling fan OZ 




Fan case 



Fig.7-40 



VII-28 



4.2.14 Paper Pick-up Clutch (PCLU) 

1) Remove the screws (2 pes.) holding the inner plastic cover and remove the cover. 

2) Remove the screws ST3X8 (3 pes.) and BT4X8 (1 pc.) to remove the ozone fan duct 
and stay (R). 




Ozone fan duct 



Stay (R) 



Fig.7-41 

3) Remove the outer plastic C ring from the shaft. 

4) Remove the paper pick-up clutch from the shaft. 




Paper pick-up clutch 



®-^_ 



C ring 



Fig.7-42 



VII-29 



4.2.15 Developer Drive Unit 2 

1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) from the developer drive unit 2. 

2) Remove the developer drive unit 2 from the frame. 




Developer drive unit 2 



Fig.7-43 



4.2.16 Toner Sensor ASSY (TPD) 



1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) from the toner sensor ASSY. 

2) Disconnect the connector to the toner sensor ASSY. 

Note: 

If the optional lower tray unit is fitted, remove the left hand screw of the front cross rail to 

release the media cassette guide. 




Toner Sensor ASSY (TPD) 



Fig.7-44 



VII-30 



4.2.17 FP2 Gear ASSY 



1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the FP2 gear ASSY from the 
frame. 




FP2 gear ASSY 



Fig.7-45 



4.2.18 Waste Toner Feeder (U) 2 



Note: 

The waste toner feeder (L) is composed of plastic tube and auger spring gear unit 

1 ) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pc.) to remove the waste toner feeder plate from 
the frame. 

2) Pull the waste toner feeder (U) 2 out of the printer. 




Waste toner feeder plate 



Fig.7-46 



VII-31 



4.3 Left Side of the Printer 



4.3.1 Video Controller PCB 



A< 



^CAUTION 

• Turn off the printer power switch and unplug the power cable from the outlet. 

• Remove the interface cable connector. 



1) Remove the two screws to remove the main controller board from the printer. 




Main controller board 



Fig.7-47 



2) Remove the two screws securing the NC-41 OOh and remove the NC-41 OOh by 
pulling it upwards. 



NC-41 OOh 




Fig.7-48 



VII-32 



3) Remove the DIMM. 

4) Remove the screw at the center of the main PCB base plate. 

5) Remove the CPU heatspred. 

6) Remove the sheet (GP1 -2.0-025025Y). 

7) Remove the two screws on the CDCC IF. 

8) Remove the two screws to remove the main PCB base plate. 



CPU heatspred 



Main PCB base plate 



CDCC IF 



GP1-2.0-025025Y 




Fig.7-49 



VII-33 



4.3.2 Side Cover (L) 2 



1 ) Remove the set screw BT4X8 (2 pes.) of side cover (L) 2. 

2) Remove the side cover (L) 2. 

(Slowly pull up the side cover (L) 2, and release the hook from the front of the Upper 
cover.) 



Side cover (L) 2 




Fig.7-50 



VII-34 



4.3.3 Base Cover (L) 2 



1 ) Remove the set screws TS4X8 (2 pes.) from the base cover (L) 2. 

2) Remove the base cover (L) 2 from the base. 



Note: 

If the optional lower tray unit is fitted, it will be necessary to remove the lower tray clamp 
screw and locking bar to release the base cover (R). For further information, refer to the 
User Guide. 




Base cover (L) 2 



Fig.7-51 



A< 



^PRECAUTION 

• When re-assembling the base cover, insert the leading edge of the base cover (L) 2 
into the hook provided at the bottom (left and right) of the base plate. 

• Ensure that the projecting part ( £b ) of the base cover (L) 2 goes into the hole in the 
base plate bottom. 



VII-35 



4.3.4 MCTL PWB 2 



A- 



\\CAUTION 

Remove the Main (Video Controller) PCB before starting this disassembly. 



1) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pa). Open the shield cover B as shown in Fig. 7-49 
to release the three hooks and remove the shield cover B from the printer. 



/l\ PRECAUTION 



• Read the internal RAM counter information from the MCTL PWB 2 prior to replacing 
the MCTL PWB 2. 

• When handling the MCTL PWB 2, ensure that no damage is caused due to 
electrostatic charges. 



Shield cover B 




Fig.7-52 



VII-36 



2) Disconnect all the harness connectors (8 pes.) connected to the MCTL PWB 2. 

3) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) to remove the MCTL PWB 2 from the frame. 




VII-37 



4.3.5 Fuser Connector 2 

1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) to remove the shield cover A from the shield 
case ASSY. 

2) Remove the set screw BT4X1 (1 pc.) to remove the side F cover (L) from the frame. 

3) Remove the set screws BT3X6 (4 pes.) to remove the shield case ASSY from the 
frame. 




^ 



Side F cover (L) 



Shield cover A 



Fig.7-54 



VII-38 



4) Disconnect the PN/PH connectors connected to the power supply unit. 

5) Remove the set screws M4X1 (2 pes.) to remove the fuser connector 2 from the 
frame. 

* The set screw of the fuser connector 2 is unique. 



Fuser connector 2 




PN connector 
PU connector 



Fig.7-55 



VII-39 



4.3.6 High Voltage Unit 2 

1 ) Disconnect all the harness connectors (3 pes.) connected to the high voltage unit 2. 

2) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (1 pc.) and BT3X8 (8 pes.) from the high voltage unit 
2. 

3) Remove the high voltage unit 2 from the frame. 




Fig.7-56 



A< 



\\WARNING 

The high voltage power supply unit generates high voltages of up to 5KV. You can get an 

electric shock if you touch the unit while it is powered on. 

Turn on the power to the unit only after having refitted and secured side cover (L) 2. 



VII-40 



4.3.7 TR Terminal Base ASSY / Interlock Switch (Rear) 

1) Open the backdoor. 

2) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the TR terminal base ASSY from 
the printer. 

3) Disconnect the harness connector (1 pc.) connected to the interlock switch. 

4) Remove the interlock switch from the TR terminal base ASSY. 



Interlock switch 




TR terminal base ASSY 



Fig.7-57 



A< 



^CAUTION 

Since the interlock switch is an important safety item, after installation confirm that the 
switch operates correctly. 



VII-41 



4.3.8 Paper Sensor (D. EN) 

1 ) Disconnect the connector (1 pc.) connected to the paper sensor (D. EN). 

2) Release the three hooks inside the frame to remove the paper sensor (D. EN) from 



the frame. 



Hook 



Hook 



Paper sensor (D. EN) 




Fig.7-58 



4.3.9 Rear Cover 2 / Rear Cover (U) 2 

1 ) Remove the set screw BT4X8 (1 pc.) of rear cover 2. 

2) Remove the rear cover 2 from the frame. 

3) Push the two hooks downwards to release them and remove the rear cover (U) 2 
from the frame. 




Rear cover 2 



Fig.7-59 



VII-42 



4.3.1 Power Supply Unit / SW Button 

1 ) Disconnect all the harness connectors connected to the power supply unit. 

2) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the bottom stay (L) from the frame. 




Bottom 



Fig.7-60 



VII-43 



3) Pull the SW unit upwards to remove it from the frame. 

4) Remove the set screw M4X6 (1 pc.) complete with the shakeproof washer to release 
the earthing harness. 

5) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (4 pes.) to remove the power supply unit from the 
frame (two hooks at bottom). 




Hook 
Power supply unit 



SW button 



SW unit 



Fig.7-61 



A< 



\\WARNING 

The earthing wire is very important for the safety of users. 

Upon replacement of the power supply unit, confirm that the earthing wire (green and 

yellow color) is securely connected to the (J) connector. 



VII-44 



4.3.1 1 FP Cassette Guide L/R 

Note: 

If the optional lower tray unit is fitted, remove the left hand screw of the front cross rail to 

release the media cassette guide. 

1 ) Close the front cover unit 2. 

2) Remove the set screw ST3X8 (1 pc.) from the FP cassette guide L assembly. 

3) Move the FP cassette guide L to the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure 
below and release the plastic catches (4 pes.)- Disconnected the cable to remove 
the FP cassette guide L from the frame. 

4) Remove the set screw ST3X8 (1 pc.) from the FP cassette guide R assembly. 

5) Move the FP cassette guide R to the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure 
below and release the plastic catches (4 pes.). Disconnected the cable to remove 
the FP cassette guide R from the frame. 



FP cassette guide L 




FP cassette guide R 
Fig.7-62 



Note: 

When assembling the FP cassette guide, be sure to correctly locate the 4 (four) catches. 



VII-45 



4.3.1 2 Paper Size Sensor 2 (PSU) 

1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X8 (2 pes.) to remove the paper size sensor 2 from the 
FP cassette guide L. 



Paper size sensor 



FP cassette guide L 




RT sensor 



Fig.7-63 



VII-46 



4.3.1 3 Toner Sensor ASSY (TTR) 

1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) from the toner sensor. 

2) Disconnect and remove the toner sensor. 



Toner Sensor ASSY 
(TTR) 




Fig.7-64 



4.3.1 4 Toner Key Sensor 2 (TNK) 



1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the toner key sensor 2 from the 
frame. 



Toner key sensor 2 




Fig.7-65 



VII-47 



4.3.15 Belt Sensor (DPJ) / Oil Sensor (OIL) 

1 ) Release the three hooks. Then release the one hook by lifting the oil sensor cover 
slightly. 



Hook 




Oil sensor cover 



Fig.7-66 



2) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (2 pc.) to remove the oil sensor from the frame. 

3) Release the two hooks to remove the belt sensor from the frame. 

Hook Hook 

Belt sensor 




Oil sensor 



Fig.7-67 



VII-48 



4.4 Paper Exit Unit 

4.4.1 Paper Exit Unit Cover 2 / Paper Exit Front Cover 2 

1 ) Open the paper exit unit cover 2. 

2) Slide the four hooks to the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure below and 
remove the (P. EX harness cover) from the printer. 

3) Disconnect the cable harness. 

4) Remove the support pin SP4X3 (2 pes.) from both sides of the frame to remove the 
paper exit unit from the frame. 



(P. EX harness cover) 



Paper exit unit cover 2 




Cable harness 



Fig.7-68 



VII-49 



5) Remove the set screws BT3X8 (4 pes.)- Bend the top of the paper exit unit slightly as 
shown in the figure below and release the top end of the paper exit front cover 2 from 
the paper exit unit to remove it. 

6) Remove the set screws (2 pes.) to remove the (P. EX frame holders R/L) from the 
paper exit cover 2. 



(P. EX frame holders R) 



(P. EX frame holders L) 



Paper exit front cover 2 



Paper exit cover 2 




Fig.7-69 



7) Remove the set screws (4 pes.) to remove the P. EX frame ASSY from the paper exit 
cover 2. 



P. EX frame ASSY 



Paper exit cover 2 




Fig.7-70 



VII-50 



4.4.2 Cooling Fan (EX) 2 

1 ) Remove the paper exit filter (with case) from the cooling fan (EX) 2. 

2) Remove the set screws (3 pes.) and disconnect the harness connector of the cooling 
fan (EX) 2 to remove the cooling fan (EX) 2 from the P. EX frame assembly. 



P. EX frame assembly 




Cooling fan (EX) 2 



Paper exit filter (with case) 



Fig.7-71 

Note: 

When assembling the cooling fan (EX) 2, be sure that the motor face attached the rating 

label is set to the outside. 



VII-51 



4.4.3 Paper Sensor (F. CL) 

1 ) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pc.) and lift the FCS cover ASSY to release the 
three hooks. Remove the paper sensor (F. CL) from the FCS cover ASSY. 

2) Disconnect the harnesses connector connected to the paper sensor (F. CL). 

Hook Hook 
Paper sensor (F. CL) 



FCS cover ASSY 




Fig.7-72 



4.4.4 Paper Sensor (EXF) 



1 ) Disconnect the harnesses connector connected to the paper sensor (EXF). 

2) Release the three hooks to remove the paper sensor (EXF) from the P. EX frame 



ASSY. 



Hook 



Hook 



Paper sensor (EXF) 




Fig.7-73 



VII-52 



4.4.5 Discharging Brush 

1 ) Remove the set screws BT4X6 (2 pes.) from the discharger brush. 

2) Remove the discharger brush and the plastic retainer. 



^PRECAUTION 

Do not deform the fur brush of the discharger brush. 



A< 




Discharger brush 



Plastic retainer 



Fig.7-74 



4.4.6 Paper Exit Roller 



1 ) Remove the C ring and plastic bush from the left and right hand sides. 

2) Remove the shaft support at both sides. 

3) Remove the paper exit roller from the paper exit guide. 



C ring 



Plastic bush 



Paper exit roller 




Plastic bush 



C ring 



Fig.7-75 



VII-53 



4.4.7 P. EX Switch Guide 

1 ) Remove the set screws BT3X8 (4 pes.) to remove the (paper exit sensor base) from 
the paper exit frame ASSY. 




Paper sensor (PT2) 



(paper exit sensor base) 



Fig.7-76 



2) Remove the P. EX switch spring from the paper exit frame and P. EX switch guide. 

3) Bend the P. EX switch guide slightly to remove it from the paper exit frame. 




P. EX switch spring 



Fig.7-77 



VII-54 



4.4.8 Paper Sensor (PT2) 

1 ) Remove the set screws BT3X8 (2 pes.) to remove the (guide) from the (paper exit 
sensor base). 

2) Disconnect the harnesses connector connected to the paper sensor (PT2). 

3) Release the three hooks to remove the paper sensor (PT2). 




Paper sensor (PT2) 



(paper exit sensor base) 



Fig.7-78 



VII-55 



4.5 Front of the Printer 
4.5.1 Optical Unit 2 

1 ) Open the front cover 2. 

2) Release the two hooks at the front and three hooks at the top to remove the inner 
cover C from the printer. 



Inner cover C 




Hook 



Fig.7-79 



VII-56 



3) Remove the set screws F3X1 (4 pes.) from the optical unit 2. 

4) Disconnect the harness connector (1 pc.) to remove the optical unit 2 from the printer. 



Optical unit 2 




Fig.7-80 



/\\ WARNING 



• There is a class 1 1 lb laser within the optical unit 2. Do not attempt to disassemble the 
laser. 

• The optical unit 2 is replaced as a complete unit No adjustment is required to the 
replacement optical unit 2. 

• Confirm that all the covers have been correctly installed prior to any test run or 
operation in order to prevent any laser radiation escaping from the printer. 



VII-57 



4.5.2 Front Cover 2 



1 ) Remove the set screws BT4X1 (2 pes.) from the front cover unit 2. 

2) Release the four hooks to remove the front cover 2 from the front cover unit 2. 



Front cover unit 2 



Hook 



Front cover 2 




Fig.7-81 



Hook 



4.5.3 Front Cover Catch 



1 ) Release the hook to remove the front cover catch from the front cover unit 2. 



Front cover catch 




Fig.7-82 



VII-58 



4.5.4 FD2 Arm ASSY 



1 ) Release the hook to remove the FD2 arm ASSY from the front cover unit 2. 

2) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pc.) of the FD arm ASSY. 

3) Incline the FD arm ASSY toward you and release the hook to remove the FD arm 
ASSY from the printer. 



FD2 arm ASSY 



Hook 




Front cover unit 



Fig.7-83 



VII-59 



4.5.5 Front Cover Unit 2 



1 ) Close the front cover unit 2. 

2) Disconnect the connector from the front cover unit 2. 

3) Remove the set screws M4X6 (6 pes.)- 



Front cover unit 2 




Fig.7-84 



A< 



^CAUTION 

• When removing the hinge of front cover unit 2, watch out the rebound of spring. 

• In above instance, holding the fixture of hinge, remove the hook from the frame. 



4) Open the front cover unit 2. Incline the front cover unit 2 upwards while holding the 
hinge bases 2 (L, R) to release the hooks of the hinge bases 2 (L, R). Then, remove 
the front cover unit 2 from the printer. 



Hinge base 2 (L, R) 




Front cover unit 2 



Fig.7-85 



VII-60 



4.5.6 Hinge Base 2 (L, R) 

1 ) Remove the C ring (1 pc.) to remove the (shaft) from the hinge base 2. 

2) Remove the hinge base 2 from the front cover unit 2. 




(shaft) 
Hinge base 2 



Fig.7-86 



3) Remove the pin (1 pc.) of the bearing to remove the two bearings and (spring) from 
the hinge base 2. 

4) Remove the hinge base 2 at the other side as well. 



Hinge base 2 



Bearing 



(spring) 




Bearing 



Fig.7-87 



VII-61 



4.5.7 DE Solenoid ASSY 

1 ) Remove the set screws BT4X1 (4 pes.) to remove the front inner cover from the front 
unit base. 

2) Remove the set screws BT4X1 (4 pes.) to remove the DE solenoid ASSYs and 
developer cam ASSY from the front unit base. 

3) Remove the developer cam ASSYs (4 pes.) from the DE solenoid ASSY. 



developer cam ASSY 



Front unit base 



Front inner cover 




DE solenoid ASSY 



Fig.7-88 



VII-62 



4.6 Rear of the Printer 
4.6.1 Transfer unit 2 



1 ) Open the transfer unit 2. 

2) Remove the end of the TR3 rear band being attached to the frame as shown in the 
figure below. 

3) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pc.) to remove the TR3 hinge support from the 
printer. 

4) Remove the transfer unit 2 from the printer. 

TR3 rear band 



TR3 hinge support 



Transfer unit 2 




Fig.7-89 



VII-63 



5) Remove the set screw BT4X1 (1 pc.) to remove the TR3 rear band from the transfer 
unit 2. 

6) Remove the set screws BT3X8 (4 pes.) to remove the transfer unit 2 cover 2 from the 
transfer unit 2. 



Transfer unit 2 




TR3 rear band 



Transfer unit cover 2 



Fig.7-90 



Note: 

When assembling the transfer unit cover 2 onto the transfer unit 2, push the (lever) of the 
transfer unit 2 and put the lever on the back side of the transfer unit 2 into the square 
hole on the transfer unit cover 2. 



VII-64 



4.6.2 Transfer Roller 2 



1 ) Lift the transfer roller lock levers at the right and left hand sides to remove the transfer 
roller 2 from the transfer unit 2. 



Transfer roller 2 




Transfer unit 2 



Fig.7-91 



4.6.3 Registration Roller 2 



1 ) Remove the roller fixing C rings from both ends of the roller. 

2) Remove the gear from the shaft (right hand side). 

3) Remove the plastic bushes at both ends. 

4) Remove the shaft support from the frame while pressing down on the pressure roller 
to release the pressure from the registration roller 2. 

5) Remove the registration roller 2. 



Registration roller 2 



C ring ® 

Plastic bush 




Transfer unit 2 



Fig.7-92 



VII-65 



4.6.4 Paper Sensor (P. EN) / OHP Sensor 3 

1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the paper guide L from the printer. 

2) Remove the set screws BT3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the paper guide (UL) ASSY 2. 

3) Disconnect the connectors (2 pes.). 




Paper guide 



Paper guide (UL) ASSY 2 
Fig.7-93 



4) Release the three hooks to remove the paper sensor (P. EN). 

5) Remove the set screws BT3X8 (2 pes.) to remove the OHP sensor 3. 

Hook 



Hook 




Paper sensor (P. EN) 



OHP sensor 3 



Fig.7-94 



VII-66 



4.6.5 Paper Sensor (PT1 ) 

1 ) Release the three hooks to remove the paper sensor from the frame. 

2) Disconnect the connector connected to the paper sensor. 




Fig.7-95 



Paper sensor (PT1) 



4.6.6 Paper Pick-up Roller / Separator Pad 2 

1 ) Move the paper pick-up roller to the direction of the arrow in the figure below to 
remove it. 

2) Move the separator pad 2 to the direction of the arrow in the figure below to remove it. 




Separator pad 2 



Fig.7-96 



Paper pick-up roller 



/l\ PRECAUTION 



• Do not touch the surface of the paper pick-up roller and separator pad 2. 

• Never remove the torque screws indicated in the figure above. 



VII-67 



4.7 Fusing Unit 



/\\ danger 

[Note in Parts Replacement] 



• The fuser unit consists of important safety parts. 

Replacement of parts or disassembly and maintenance work should only be done at 
an appropriate service facility by skilled service personnel acquainted with electrical 
safety. After re-assembly the product safety should be reconfirmed. 

• Since the fuser unit is very hot, make sure that the fuser unit and surrounding area 
are well cooled down prior to starting the replacement of parts. You may get burned 
when touching hot areas. 

• The fusing unit contains silicone oil. Take care not to spill the silicone oil, especially 
on the floor, as the floor will become very slippery and dangerous. 



1 ) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pc.) to remove the fuser cover (R) from the fusing 
unit. 

2) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pc.) to remove the fuser cover (L) from the fusing 
unit. 

3) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the fuser cover B from the fusing 
unit. 

4) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (3 pes.) to remove the BR felt ASSY 2 from the 
fusing unit. 

5) Remove the set screws (2 pes.) to remove the fu paper guide from the fusing unit. 



Fuser cover (L) 



Fu paper guide 




Fuser cover (B) 



BR felt ASSY 2 



Fuser cover (R) 



Fig.7-97 



VII-68 



6) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the oil pan unit 2 and FU felt 
ASSY 2 from the fusing unit. 

7) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the FU felt ASSY 2 from the oil 
pan unit. 

8) Remove the set screws (2 pes.) to remove the low guide from the fusing unit. 



FU felt ASSY 2 




Oil pan unit 2 



Low guide 



Fig.7-98 



9) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the heater wire (white) from the 
fusing unit. 

10) Remove the set screw ST3X6 (1 pes.) from the left hand side of the terminals on 
each of the fusing heater 2 (2pcs.). 

1 1 ) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (2 pes.) to remove the lamp holders (2 pes.). 

12) Remove the fusing heaters 2 (2 pes.), then remove the heater wire. 




Fusing heater 2 

Lamp holder 



Fig.7-99 



VII-69 



13) Remove the set screws ST3X6 (3pcs.). Open the fusing unit as shown in the figure 
below. 



Fusing unit 




Fig.7-100 



14) Remove the back-up roller 2 from the fusing unit. 

15) Remove the C ring from the gear to remove the gear (FU) (BR) 2. 

16) Remove the ball bearing FU2 (2 pes.) from the back-up roller 2. 



C ring 



Ball bearing FU2 



Back-up roller 2 



Gear (FU) (BR) 2 



Ball bearing FU2 




Fig.7-101 



VII-70 



1 7) Remove the fusing roller 2 as shown in the figure below. 

18) Remove the release levers (R) and (L). 

19) Remove the Crings on both ends of the fusing roller 2. 

20) Remove the gear (FU) (BR) 2 and FU2 gear 63. 

21 ) Remove the C rings at both sides. 

22) Remove the ball bearing FU2 (2 pes.) from the fusing roller 2. 



Gear (FU) (BR) 2 



Fusing roller 2 



Release lever (R) 



C ring 
Ball bearing FU2 



Ball bearing FU2 



FU2 gear 63 




Fig.7-102 



VII-71 



23) Remove the E rings (1 pc.) to remove the (gear A) from the fusing unit. 

24) Remove the E rings (1 pc.) to remove the (gear B) from the fusing unit. 

25) Remove the E rings (1 pc.) to remove the (gear C) from the fusing unit. 

26) Remove the E rings (1 pc.) to remove the (gear D) from the fusing unit. 

27) Remove the E ring (1 pc.) to remove the (shaft). 
Ering (gear C) 

(gear B) 




(gear A) 



Fig.7-103 



A< 



^PRECAUTION 

• Do not touch the surface of the heater lamp with your hands, the small traces of oil 
you leave on the lamp will affect the life of the lamp. 

• The wattage of the heater lamp is different between the fuser roller and the back-up 
roller. The wattage is marked on the insulator of the lamp electrode. 

Fuser roller: 560W 

Back-up roller : 420 W 

Note: 

When installing the new fusing unit into the printer, you have to wait approximately for 30 

minutes after the unit is installed to allow the fusing oil to circulate in the unit. 



VII-72 



C ring 



FU2 gear 63 



C ring 



Frame 



Fusing roller 2 



C ring 




Ball bearing FU2 



Gear (FU) (BR) 2 



C ring 



Frame 



Back-up roller 2 



Frame 




Ball bearing FU2 



Fig.7-104 



C ring 



Gear (FU) (BR) 2 
Frame 



/\\ CAUTION 



When re-assembling the fusing roller 2 and back-up roller 2, ensure to assemble the ball 
bearing FU2 correctly referring to the figures above. 



VII-73 



CHAPTER VIM 

TROUBLESHOOTING 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTER VIM TROUBLESHOOTING VIII-1 

1. OUTLINE OF TROUBLESHOOTING VIII-2 

2. OPERATOR CALL VIII-3 

2.1 Video Controller Mode VIII-3 

2.2 Engine Controller Mode VIII-6 

3. PAPER TRANSPORT ERROR VIII-8 

3.1 Feed Jam VIII-8 

3.2 Inner Jam VIII-9 

3.3 Outer Jam VIII-9 

3.4 Others VIII-9 

4. SERVICE CALL VIII-10 

4.1 Video Controller Mode VIII-1 1 

4.2 Engine Controller Mode VIII-15 

5. IMAGE FAILURE VIII-43 



CHAPTER VIM TROUBLESHOOTING 

This chapter contains troubleshooting information for both the Video Controller Mode and 
the Engine Controller Mode. 

If any problem occurs during the normal usage of the printer, which means the printer is 
being used in the Video Controller Mode, clear the problem by referring to the 
troubleshooting information in the following sections for the Video Controller Mode or the 
user's guide. 

However, if a problem occurs in the video controller itself, use the Engine Controller 
Mode information as it may be easy to understand the cause of the problem because the 
Engine Controller mode can separate the problem in the video controller from the printing 
operations. 

The error messages used in the Video Controller Mode basically contain the same ones 
that are used in the Engine Controller Mode. All error status messages are displayed in 
the Video Controller Mode other than when an error occurs in the video controller itself or 
in the communication between the video controller and the engine controller. 

Note: 

The operation of the control panel and the display on the LCD vary depending on the 

mode selected. 



VMM 



OUTLINE OF TROUBLESHOOTING 



Printer Problem 



V 



Operator Call 



[Section 2.1] 



V 



X 



Paper Transport 
Error 

[Section 2 & 3] 



\ / Enter the Engine Controller Mode \ / 



Service Call 



Turn on the power while holding 
down the Mode, Back and Set 
buttons after turning off the main 
switch. 



; 



[Section 2.2] 



jL 



Image Failure 



[Section 5] 



v 



Turn on the power 
after turning off the 
printer. 



v 



I Probjem .Repeat] 



v 



Is power supply operating normally? 



Engine Controller 
Mode 



Yes 



No 



Check power cable. 



[Section 4.2] 



Yes 



Video Controller 
Mode 

[Section 4.1] 



VIII-2 



2. OPERATOR CALL 

2.1 Video Controller Mode 

The Ready LED is lit and an applicable message appears on the liquid crystal display 
(LCD) in the following cases; 

1) Consumables require to be replenished. 

2) Waste toner pack is full of waste toner. 

3) Paper jam. 

4) Periodic maintenance. 

5) Maintenance work incomplete. 

The above cases are not regarded as a breakdown, and should be treated in accordance 
with Table 8-1 ; 



Table 8-1 



Display Message 


Remarks 


TONER EMPTY X 
Replace the X toner cartridge. 


X = C, M, Y, K 


NO TONER X 

Install the X toner cartridge. 


X = C, M, Y, K 


COVER OPEN 
Close the Front Cover. 




COVER OPEN 
Close the Top Cover. 




COVER OPEN 

Close the Rear Access Cover. 




COVER OPEN 

Close the Lower Feeder Unit Cover. 




COVER OPEN 

Close the Duplex Unit Cover. 




JAM X 

Refer to the diagram, and check the location. Remove the 
jammed paper. 


X = A1,A2, B, C, D, E1 ,E2 


NO PAPER Tl/2 
Load paper into Tray 1/2. 




WASTE TONER 

Replace the waste toner pack. 




OIL EMPTY 
Replace the oil bottle. 




CHANGE FCR 

Replace the cleaning roller. 




NO OPC BELT 
Install the OPC belt. 




NO FC ROLLER 
Install the cleaning roller. 





VIII-3 



Display Message 


Remarks 


NO LFU 

Install the lower tray unit. 




NO TR ROLLER 
Install the transfer roller 2. 




ILLEGAL TONER 

Use only Brother genuine toner cartridges. 




NO TRAY 1/2 

The indicated paper Tray was not detected, install it, or 
ensure it is inserted correctly. 




SIZE ERROR Tl/2 

Specify the correct paper size for the indicated tray. 




SIZE ERROR DX 

The duplex unit can only print in the sizes specified. 
Specify the correct paper size. 




STACKER FULL 

Remove the paper from the output tray. 




MEDIA MISMATCH 

Media mismatch between the Printer and the Printer 
Driver setting. Load XX into Tray <1/2>. 


XX = Plain Paper, 

Transparencies, Thick 
Paper 


SIZE MISMATCH 

Paper mismatch between the Printer and the Printer 
Driver setting. Load Paper <size> size into Tray <1/2>. 




MANUAL FEED 

Load paper <size> into trayl and press GO. 




MEDIATYPE ERROR 

Specify the correct media type : XX. 


XX = T1 , T2, DX 


NO FUSING UNIT 

A fusing Unit was not detected, please install one. 




CARD ERROR 

An error when accessing the Flash card, check the drive 
is formatted and not in Write Protect mode. 




HDD ERROR 

An error occurred accessing the HDD, power cycle the 
printer and check that it is formatted. 




DIMM ERROR 

Ensure that the DIMM is installed correctly. 




CARD REMOVAL 

The Flash card was removed while the printer was 
powered on. Power cycle the printer. 




BUFFER ERROR 

Check the cable connection between the computer and 
printer. 




STORAGE FULL 

There is no space on the Hard Disk. 





VIII-4 



Display Message 


Remarks 


STORAGE FULL 

The RAMDISK SIZE is set to 0MB there is no more space 
to store jobs. 




STORAGE FULL 

There is no space in the Compact Flash. 




STORAGE FULL 

There is no space on the Flash Memory. 




DOWNLOAD FULL 

The download buffer of the printer is full. Add more 
memory to the printer. 




FONT FULL 

The font memory area is full. Delete fonts or add more 
memory to the printer. 




MEMORY FULL 

The printer memory is full and the printer is unable to print 
the page. Add more memory. 




PRINT OVERRUN 

Select a lower resolution or set the page protect option in 
the driver to the correct size. 




IGNORE DATA 

Check that the correct driver is being used and/or try 
adding more printer memory. 




MEMORY SHORTAGE 
Add memory. 


Install additional DIMM 
memory so that the total 
memory size is 32MB or 
less. 



VIII-5 



2.2 Engine Controller Mode 

The Ready LED is lit, and applicable messages appear on the liquid crystal display (LCD) 
in the following cases; 

1) Consumables require to be replenished. 

2) Waste toner pack is full of waste toner. 

3) Paper jam. 

4) Periodic maintenance. 

5) Maintenance work being incomplete. 

The above cases are not regarded as a breakdown, and should be treated in accordance 
with Table 8-2; 

Table 8-2 



Display Message 


Meaning 


Countermeasure 


11 NO MEDIA UPP/LOW 


No paper in the upper 
cassette / lower 
cassette 


Replenish paper. 


11 CHK MEDIA 
UPP/LOW 


Inconsistency of 
media 


Change media. 


12 NO TRAY UPP/LOW 


No upper / lower 
media cassette 


Install cassette(s). 


13 REPLACE TONER 
Y/M/C/K 


Toner (Y, M, C, K) 
empty 


Replace with new toner 
cartridge(s). 


14 CHECK WASTE 
TONER 


Waste toner pack full 
of toner 


Replace with a new waste 
toner pack. 


14 CHECK FUSER OIL 


Change the oil bottle 


Replace with a new oil bottle. 


14 CHK CLEANING 
ROLLER 


Change the fuser 
cleaner 


Replace with a new fuser 
cleaner 


15 MISPRINT 
PAPER/PRREQ/MEDIA 


Misprinting occurred 


Confirm status of media 

cassette. 

Confirm correct paper size. 

Confirm consistency of 

media. 


16 ALIGN TONER CG 
Y/M/C/K 


Toner cartridge not 
installed 


Confirm the installation of the 
toner cartridge(s). 


16 ALIGN FU UNIT 


Fusing unit not 
installed 


Remove the fusing unit and 
refit it. Confirm it is correctly 
installed. 


16 ALIGN BELT CG 


OPC belt cartridge not 
installed 


Confirm the installation of the 
OPC belt cartridge. 


17 MEDIA JAM FEED 


Paper jam at feeding 
area 


Remove the media cassette, 
and remove paper jammed at 
feeding entrance. 


17 MEDIA JAM INNER 


Paper jam inside 
printer 


Open the transfer unit 2, and 
remove paper jammed inside. 



VI 1 1-6 



Display Message 


Meaning 


Countermeasure 


17 MEDIA JAM OUTER 


Paper jam at paper 
exit area 


Open the transfer unit 2 / 
paper exit unit and remove 
paper jammed inside. 


17 MEDIA JAM DRUM 


Paper jam wound 
around the transfer 
drum 2 


Open the transfer unit 2 and 
remove the OPC belt 
cartridge. Remove the paper 
jam by unwinding the paper 
from the transfer drum 2. 


18 CLOSE PANEL 
FRONT/TOP 


Covers open 


Confirm that the covers are 
firmly closed. 


18 CLOSE TR UNIT 


Transfer unit 2 open 


Confirm that the transfer unit 
2 is firmly closed. 


19 SLEEP MODE 


Printer under idling 
condition 


Printer automatically returns 
to the operating condition 
when a PRINT signal is sent. 


01 WAIT 


Printer warming-up 


These are normal operation 
modes. 


00 READY 


Printer ready to print 
in standby status 


02 PRINT 


Printing in progress 



VIII-7 



PAPER TRANSPORT ERROR 



Paper is transported through the path shown in Fig. 8-1 . Paper jams at the following 
locations are easily cleared. 

• Paper Pick-up Roller • Fusing Unit 

• Transfer unit 2 • Paper Exit Unit 



Fusing Unit 



Paper Exit Roller 
Oil Bottle 



Paper Exit Unit 



Transfer unit 

Paper discharger Unit 

Transfer roller 2 
Transfer drum 2 

Registration roller 2 
Paper Pick-up Roller 



Top Cover 




Toner Cartridge 



Media 
Cassette 



3.1 



Feed Jam 



Fig.8-1 



Table 8-3-1 



Problem Item 


Step 


Check Item 


Result 


Action 


Print Paper 


1 


Is the print paper a 
recommended paper? 


NO 


Use a recommended 
paper. 


2 


Is the print paper damp? 


YES 


Replace the existing 
paper with new. 


3 


Was the paper fanned before 
loading in the media cassette? 


NO 


Fan the paper before 
loading. 


Media Cassette 


4 


Is the print paper set in place? 


NO 


Set the paper in the 
correct place. 


5 


Is the end plate properly set up? 


NO 


Set the end plate to meet 
the paper size. 


6 


Is the paper stacked above the 
line on the paper guide? 


YES 


Stack the paper below the 
line. 


7 


Is there paper dust around the 
paper guide? 


YES 


Clean the paper guide 
with a cotton cloth. 


Paper Pick-up 

Roller 

/ Separation Pad 

2 


8 


Is the print paper caught in the 
paper feeding part? 


YES 


Remove the paper. 


9 


Is the paper pick-up roller 
damaged? 


YES 


Service call required to 
replace the damaged 
paper pick-up roller. 



VIII-8 



3.2 Inner Jam 



Table 8-3-2 



Problem Item 


Step 


Check Item 


Result 


Action 


Transfer unit 2 




Open the transfer unit 2 and 
check. 






1 


Is there any paper inside the 
unit? 


YES 


Remove the paper 
inside. 


2 


Is the transfer roller 2 firmly 
locked by the lock lever? 


NO 


Fix the transfer roller 2 
with the lock lever. 


3 


Is the paper discharger unit 
installed in place? 


NO 


Install the paper 
discharger unit firmly 
in place. 


4 


Is there paper dust around the 
registration roller 2? 


YES 


Clean the registration 
roller 2 with a cotton 
cloth. 


5 


Is the wire of the paper 
discharger unit damaged? 


YES 


Replace the existing 
paper discharger unit 
with a new one. 


Fusing Unit 


6 


Is the fusing unit installed in 
place? 


NO 


Install the fusing unit 
firmly in place. 


7 


Is there any paper trapped 
between the rollers? 


YES 


Remove the trapped 
paper. 


8 


Is there fuser oil still in the oil 
bottle? 


NO 


Replace the existing 
oil bottle with a new 
one. 



3.3 



Outer Jam 



Table 8-3-3 



Problem Item 


Step 


Check Item 


Result 


Action 


Print Paper 


1 


Is the print paper a 
recommended paper? 


NO 


Use a recommended 
paper. 


Paper Exit Unit 


1 


Is the paper exit unit firmly 
locked by the lock lever? 


NO 


Open and close the 
paper exit unit again. 


2 


Is there paper dust around the 
exit roller? 


YES 


Clean the exit roller 
with a cotton cloth. 



3.4 



Others 



Table 8-3-4 



Problem Item 


Cause 


Result 


Action 


The edge of 
print paper is 
creased. 


Is the curled paper edge creased when 
the paper is loaded through the pick-up 
roller? 


YES 


Turn over the paper in 
the media cassette. 



VIII-9 



SERVICE CALL 

If errors or failures occurred inside the printer, the applicable error message will be 
displayed on the control panel, and the printer stops. If errors or failures repeat even after 
resetting the power button, confirm the error code and then call your Service provider. 




Confirm the error message 



Reset the power button. 




NO 



YES 



Call the maintenance 
company for service. 



Since this is a temporary error, 
you may use the printer 
without corrective action. 



VIII-10 



4.1 



Video Controller Mode 



PR2001053 



Table 8-4-1 



Service Call Message 


Meaning 


Countermeasure 


ERROR SOI 
SERVICE CALL 


FATAL ERROR EX 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR S02 
SERVICE CALL 


ADRL ERROR EX 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR S03 
SERVICE CALL 


ADRS ERROR EX 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR S04 
SERVICE CALL 


BUS ERROR EX 
(INSTRUCT) 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR S05 
SERVICE CALL 


BUS ERROR EX 
(DATA L/S) 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR SO 6 
SERVICE CALL 


SYSCALL EX 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR SO 7 
SERVICE CALL 


BREAKPOINT EX 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR SO 8 
SERVICE CALL 


RESERVED INSTRUCT 
EX 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR SO 9 
SERVICE CALL 


COPROCESSOR 
UNUSAB EX 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR S10 
SERVICE CALL 


ARITHMETIC 
OVERFLOW EX 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR Sll 
SERVICE CALL 


UNDEFINED 
INTERRUPT 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR S12 
SERVICE CALL 


SOFTWARE 1 
INTERRUPT 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR S13 
SERVICE CALL 


SOFTWARE 2 
INTERRUPT 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR E41 
PRINT CHECK 


Engine interface error 


Update with a new Firmware. 


ERROR H6 
BUS ERROR 


Bus error 


Replace with a new main 
(video controller) PCB. 


ERROR H61 
PROG ERROR 


Program ROM checksum 
error 


Replace with a new main 
(video controller) PCB. 



VIII-11 



Service Call Message 


Meaning 


Countermeasure 


ERROR H63 
D-RAM ERROR 


DIMM error 


Replace with a new DIMM. 


ERROR H6 6 
NV_W ERROR 


NVRAM write error 


Replace with a new main 
(video controller) PCB. 


ERROR H6 7 
NV_R ERROR 


NVRAM read error 


Replace with a new main 
(video controller) PCB. 


ERROR H6 8 
NV_B ERROR 


NVRAM read/ write error 


Replace with a new main 
(video controller) PCB. 


ERROR H73 
FLASH_R ERROR 


FLASH ROM read error 


Replace with a new main 
(video controller) PCB. 


ERROR H74 
FLASH_W ERROR 


FLASH ROM write error 


Replace with a new main 
(video controller) PCB. 


PCI BUS ERROR 


PCI BUS error 


Replace with a new NC-4100h. 



Table 8-4-2 



Status Display 


Description 


ERROR EC3 
WARNING 


NVRAM error 


ERROR EC4 
WARNING 


Engine controller hardware error 


ERROR EC7 
WARNING 


Process timing clock error 


ERROR EDI 
WARNING 


Yellow Switching clutch error 


ERROR ED2 
WARNING 


Magenta Switching clutch error 


ERROR ED3 
WARNING 


Cyan Switching clutch error 


ERROR ED4 
WARNING 


Black Switching clutch error 


ERROR ED5 
WARNING 


YK Switching solenoid error 


ERROR ED6 
WARNING 


MC Switching solenoid error 



VIII-12 



Status Display 


Description 


ERROR EE1 
WARNING 


Developing motor error 


ERROR EE2 
WARNING 


Main motor error 


ERROR EE3 
WARNING 


Drum error 


ERROR EE4 
WARNING 


Toner empty sensor error 


ERROR EE5 
WARNING 


Transfer roller 2 solenoid error 


ERROR EE6 
WARNING 


Drum cleaning solenoid error 


ERROR EE7 
WARNING 


Drum cleaning clutch error 


ERROR EE8 
WARNING 


Fuser unit clutch error 


ERROR EE9 
WARNING 


Belt marker sensor error 


ERROR EEL 
WARNING 


Erase LED error 


ERROR EFO 
WARNING 


Cooling fan error 


ERROR EF2 
WARNING 


Ozone fan error 


ERROR EF4 
WARNING 


Fuser fan error 


ERROR EF5 
WARNING 


Charger HV unit error 


ERROR EHO 
WARNING 


Fuser thermistor error 


ERROR EH2 
WARNING 


Fuser temperature 2 error 


ERROR EH3 
WARNING 


Fuser temperature 3 error 



VIII-13 



Status Display 


Description 


ERROR EH4 
WARNING 


Fuser temperature 4 error 


ERROR ELI 
WARNING 


Beam detector error 


ERROR EL2 
WARNING 


Scanner motor error 


ERROR ELL 
WARNING 


Laser power error 


ERROR EP1 
WARNING 


Duplex controller hardware error 


ERROR EP3 
WARNING 


Feeder pass select solenoid error 


ERROR EP4 
WARNING 


Duplex motor error 


ERROR EP5 
WARNING 


Outer pass select solenoid error 


ERROR EP6 
WARNING 


Optional fan error 



Note: 

For further actions for the error messages described in Table 8-4-2, refer to the flow 

charts later in this section. 



VIII-14 



4.2 Engine Controller Mode 



Table 8-4-3 



Code 


Description 




NVRAM Error (MCTL PCB) 




Engine Controller MCTL PCB Hardware Error 




Process Timing Clock Error (Main Motor Clock Error) 




Clutch Error of the Yellow Developing Unit 




Clutch Error of the Magenta Developing Unit 


D3 


Clutch Error of the Cyan Developing Unit 


D4 


Clutch Error of the Black Developing Unit 




HPSI Signal Error (Retract Error of Black and Yellow Toner 
Cartridge) 


D6 


HPSI Signal Error (Retract Error of Cyan and Magenta Toner 
Cartridge) 




Developing Motor Error 




Main Motor Error 




Transfer drum 2 Rotational Error 




Toner Sensor PCB Error 




Transfer roller 2 Solenoid Error 




Brush Cleaner Solenoid Error 




Brush Cleaner Clutch Error 




Fusing Unit Clutch error 




Belt Sensor Error 




Erase Lamp Error 




Control Fan Error 




Ozone Fan (1) Error 


F4 


Fuser Fan Error 




Charging HV (DC High Voltage) Error 




Fuser Thermistor Error 




Fusing Temperature Error (Warming-up Time Error) 




Fusing Temperature (3) Error (Heater Continuous ON Time Error) 


H4 


Fusing Temperature (4) Error (Heater Continuous ON Time Error) 




Beam Sensor Error 




Scanner Motor Error 




Laser Power Error 



Note: 

For further actions for the error messages described in Table 8-4-3, refer to the flow 

charts later in this section. 



VIII-15 



o 



Chart 8-4 Troubleshooting 



Code 


Description of Error 


Cause of Error 


Clearance Method 


C3 


NVRAM Error 


1. Failure of MCTL PWB 2. 

• CPU 

• EEPROM 


1 . Turn on and off the power switch. 

2. Above method 1 does not work, implement "C3 Error Clearance Procedure". 

3. Replace the failed MCTL PWB 2 with a new MCTL PWB 2. 



C3 



^Does the error repeat despite of implementing "On/Off of Power Switch" ?y 

I YES 



Continue to drive the engine. 



Does the error repeat despite of implementing "NVRAM INITIAL" ? V 



i 



Continue to drive the engine. 



YES 



Replace the failed MCTL PWB 2 with a new MCTL PWB 2. 



Code 


Description of Error 


Cause of Error 


Clearance Method 


C4 


Hard Error of MCTL 
Control Circuit. 


1. Failure of MCTL PWB 2. 


1 . Turn on and off the power switch. 

2. Replace the failed MCTL PWB 2 with a new MCTL PWB 2. 



C4 



<^ Does the error repeat despite of implementing "On/Off of Power Switch" ? ^ > 

I YES 



NO 



Continue to drive the engine. 



Replace the failed MCTL PWB 2 with a new MCTL PWB 2. 



Code 


Description of Error 


Cause of Error 


Clearance Method 


C7 


Process Timing Error. 


1. Power Feeding Failure 

2. MM Failure 

3. MM Input Circuit Failure 


1 . Implement the same clearance procedures employed for E2 error. 
[Note]: MM stands for OPC Belt Drive Main Motor. 



C7 



Implement the same clearance procedures employed for E2 error. 



00 



Error Code 



Name of Part 



D1 



Developer Clutch 2 (DCLY) 



Confirm the connection of Connector. 



i 



Is the connection proper between ECN14 of I0D2 and Clutch (DCLY) ? 



NO 



Is the harness of Clutch (DCLY) broken ? 



Connect the harness. 



Connect the connector properly. 



YES 



< 



i 



Is D1 Error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Complete 



NO 



Check the voltage at DCLY ON-N. 



j 



< ^Does the voltage drop (^L_ +24V ) between ECN14-3 and ECN2-6? ) YES ► Replace the clutch (DCLY) with a new clutch. 



j 



i 



< ^Does the voltage jump (_f~) between ECN1-3 and ECN2-8 ? ) > — YES ► Replace I0D2 PWB 2 with a new I0D2 PWB 2. 



NO 



Replace current MCTL PWB 2 with a new PWB. 



< 



i 



< 



i 



Is D1 Error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Complete 



NO 



Is D1 Error cleared ? 



> 



NO 



Re-check 



rYES 



Complete 



MCTL 




I0D2 






12CN 
3 


DCL(Y)ON-P 


ECI\ 
3 

ECI\ 
3 
6 
8 


1 ECN14 
1 

3 
2 


+ 24V-1 DeVe 


+24V-1 


DCL(Y)ON-N (P 






PGND 






SGND 

















CD 





Error Code 


D2 




\ N 






Name of Part 


Developer Clutch 2 (DCLM) 






i 








Confirm the connection of Connector. 






i 










<Js the connection proper between ECN15 of IOD2 and Clutch (DCLM) ? 


^ * 


Connect the harness. 






— ► 




<Js 


the harness of Clutch (DCLM) broken ? 


Connect the connector properly. 






YES 




V 


\ 








^ 


YES 


S lo HO Prrnr- HckorckH 9 


YES 


Complete 


V 




\ -O^^MV,, — — — = 


W 


Check the voltage at DCLM ON-N. 






NO 








Sd 


i 


\ 








^^o +k^ wsnI+o^sn j*I.>sm-i / I +24V\ l~~+,.,~~,-» CPNHC O ^^rJ CPMO CO 


' fc 


Replace the clutch (DCLM) with a new clutch. 




n. Uuco li ic vunayc uiup ^ ^ j uoivvooii i_v-yi m i vJ - o ai iu i_oi\m-u: 


\ 


YES 


P 




<° 


4 NO 




V 




oes the voltage jump ( _f~~ ) between ECN1 -2 and ECN2-8 ? ^ 


fc 


Replace IOD2 PWB 2 with a new IOD2 PWB 2 




/ 




V 






NO 




i 


\ 








^ 





S \r* PlO ^.rr^v rsXr^^v^rA O 


YES ^ 


Complete 


ir 




X. IC5 L^^. L^IIUI UICCIICU f .X" 


V 


Replace current MCTL PWB 2 with a new PWB. 






NO 








/" 


i 


N 






l<^ P^O Ck^ak J^lst<-IW<lJ-J O \ 


^ 


Re-check 




\ IDI^LIIUIWOaiOU! / 

^ YES 






P 










Complete 






MCTL 




IOD2 










12CN 
2 


DCL(M)0N-P 


ECI\ 
2 

ECI\ 
3 
6 
8 


J1 ECN15 
1 

3 
J2 


Devel 
+24V-1 


Dper Clutch 2 (M) 

dclm) 




+24V-1 


DCL(M)ON-N ( 










PGND 








SGND 





















O 



Error Code 


D3 


Name of Part 


Developer Clutch 2 (DCLC) 



l 



Confirm the connection of Connector. 



i 



Is the connection proper between ECN16 of IOD2 and Clutch (DCLC) ? 



NO 



Is the harness of Clutch (DCLC) broken ? 



Connect the harness. 



Connect the connector properly. 



YES 



< 



i 



Is D3 Error cleared ? 



J NO 



> 



YES 



Complete 



Check the voltage at DCLC ON-N. 



i 



< Does the voltage drop (^L_ +24V ) between ECN16-3 and ECN2-6^ — ^ ► Replace the clutch (DCLC) with a new clutch. 

< JDoes the voltage jump (_f~ ) between ECN1-1 and ECN2-8 ? ^ 



YES 



i 



NO 



Replace current MCTL PWB 2 with a new PWB. 



Replace IOD2 PWB 2 with a new IOD2 PWB 2. 



< 



Is D3 Error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Complete 



NO 



< 



Is D3 Error cleared ? 



> 



NO 



Re-check 



rYES 



Complete 



MCTL_ IOD2 

N 

■ DCL(C)0N-P 



ECN1 ECN16 



+24V-1 Developer Clutch 2 (C) 








Error Code 


D4 








Name of Part 


Developer Clutch 2 (DCLK) 








i 










Confirm the connection of Connector. 








c k 


i 


?\ 










tha mnnaptinn nrnnor hohA/oon PP.M1Q nf IHnO anH Plutoh /nP.I l^\ ' 


NO 


► 


Connect the harness. 






C^ls the harness of Clutch (DCLK) broken ? 


^ 










Connect the connector properly. 






1 


YES 


/ 


4 


\ 










^ 


/ ¥ ^ 


YES ^ 


Complete 






<^ lou-t^nui ucaicu : ^ 


W 








J NO 








r 








< 


Check the voltage at DCLK ON-N. 






1 


<"D~o 


1 


r 


YES 










^o +h^ wrJ+on^ Hr™ / — 1 +24V\ h^+. fl/ ^^ n CPNMQ Q onH CPMO fio\ 


^ 


Replace the clutch (DCLK) with a new clutch. 






\LJ\j^s<d u iu v wiiciyt^ ui u|j ^ ^ ) k^^ivv^^i i i — v_y i \ i \j \j cti iu i — v-/ 1 ^c v-> : y 


YES 


w 






^ 


^NO 




i 






>es the voltage jump (_f~~ ) between ECN1-4 and ECN2-12 ? ^> 


^ 


Replace IOD2 PWB 2 with a new IOD2 PWB 2 








p 








NO 






1 


\ 










J 


^ 


•C Iq DA Frrnr pIpptpH ? 


YES ^ 


Complete 






f 






W 






Replace current MCTL PWB 2 with a new PWB. 






J NO 














/~ 


i 


NO 








1^ R/l Ci-k/^k r*\r\r%rr\rl O \ 


^ 


Re-check 






X YES 




w 










MCTL 




IOD2 






Complete 






12CN 


DCL(K)0N-P 


ECN1 ECN13 


OA\l 1 Develo P er Clutch 2 


(K) 










4 


+24V-1 
PGND 
SGND 


4 

ECI\ 
3 
6 
8 


12 


I 
3 


DCL(K)ON-P (DCLK) 






v. — / 






















Error Code 


D5 


Name of Part 


Developer Solenoid (PSL KY) 



I 



Confirm the connection of Connector. 



i 



Is the connection proper between ECN5 of IOD2 and Solenoid (PSL KY) ? 
Is the harness of Solenoid (PSL KY) broken ? 



NO 



Connect the harness. 



Connect the connector properly 



YES 



Check the voltage at (PSL KY) ON-N. 



j 



<^ Is D5 Error cleared ? ^ > 

I NO 



YES 



Complete 



<' \ YES I 

Does the voltage drop (~t_!" 24V ) between ECN5-10 and ECN2-6? / > p \ Replace the front cover unit with a new unit. 



I NO 



i 



< J3oes the voltage jump (_f~) between ECN1-5and ECN2-8 ? ^ X§g ►Replace IOD2 PWB 2 with a new IOD2 PWB 2. 



NO 



Replace current MCTL PWB 2 with a new PWB. 



< 



i 



< 



i 



Is D5 Error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Complete 



NO 



Is D5 Error cleared 



> 



NO 



Re-check 



rYES 



Complete 



MCTC 




IOD2 






12CN 


PSL(KY)ON-P 


ECIN 
5 

ECIS 
3 
6 
8 


1 ECN5 


,OA\/ 1 






5 


J2 


9 
10 


+£. e t\i- I 






PSLKY 


+24V-1 


PSL(KY)ON-N 




















PGND 






SGND 

















CO 



Error Code 


D6 


Name of Part 


Developer Solenoid (PSL MC) 



I 



Confirm the connection of Connector. 



Is the connection proper between ECN5 of IOD2 and Solen oid (PSL MC) ? 
Is the harness of Solenoid (PSL MC) broken ? 



NO 



Connect the harness. 



Connect the connector properly. 



YES 



Check the voltage at (PSL MC) ON-N. 



j 



< 



i 



Is D6 Error cleared ? 



J NO 



> 



YES 



Complete 



\ YES I 

Does the voltage drop (~L_ +24V ) between ECN5-7and ECN2-6? } P \ Replace the front cover unit with a new unit. 

^NO T 



j 



i 



< ^Does the voltage jump (_T~ ) between ECN1-6and ECN2-S i?_^ >— ^ — ►Replace IOD2 PWB 2 with a new IOD2 PWB 2. 



NO 



Replace current MCTL PWB 2 with a new PWB. 



< 



i 



< 



i 



Is D6 Error cleared ? 



J NO 



> 



YES 



Complete 



Is D6 Error cleared ? 



> 



NO 



Re-check 



,YES 



Complete 



MCTC 



IOD2 







Error Code 


E1 


Concerned Part 


Developer Motor 2 (DM) 







<Q Is there any unusual rotation noise while printing ? \ 

Tno 



yes 



Confirm the connection of connector. 



i 



< 



Replace the toner cartridge. 
Is the noise cleared ? 



<^ Is DCN9 of IOD1 properly connected with connector of DM1? 

TTes 

<Js DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 1 1CN of MCTL? ^> 



NO 



I NO 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



Replace developer gear unit and motor. 



NO, 



i 



Connect the connectors properly. 



Check the voltage: +24V-1 and +5V-1 . 



i 



Is E1 error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



NO 



C+24V-1: Is the voltage +24V between DM1-4 and 6,DCN9-4 and 6, DCN10-3 and 4 ?) 
C+5V-1: Is the voltage +5V between DM1 -5 and 9,DCN9-5 and 9, DCN10-7 and 9 ? ) 



YES 



Replace the developer motor 2. 



"^W 



Replace the IOD2. 



MCTL 



DCN1 



DCN9 



Is E1 error cleared ? 



Tno 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



11CN 



DMCLK 



DMON-N 



+24V-1 



<c 



Replace the IOD1. 



PGND 



+5V-1 



Is E1 error cleared ? 



j 



YES 



> 



NO 



SGND 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



IOD1 / DM1 

IDMRDY-NI 



DMON-N 



DMCLK 



PGND 



PGND 



+24V-1 



+24V-1 



SGND 



+5V-1 



DCN10 



Job is complete. 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



E2 



Main Motor 2 (MM) 



Confirm the connection of connector. 



Is the harness connector pin #1 (MMRDY-N) properly connected \ 4 NO 
between IOD2 and MM? 



YES 



Replace the main motor 2. 



Ol 



< 



Is E2 error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



NO 



Replace the IOD2 PWB 2. 



NO 



< 



Is E2 error cleared ? 



> 



Adjust the harness (pin #1). 



MCTL 



12CN 



7 
8 
9 
1GL 



MMCLK 



IOD2 



MM1 



MMON-N 



MMREV-N 



MMENC 



IOD1 



YES 



Job is complete. 



DCN10 1 
5 

7 
9 



+24V-1 



PGND 



+5V-1 



SGND 



ECN1 



ECN12 
ECN2 



IMMRDY-N 



MMON-N 



MMCLK 



PGND 



+24V-1 



SGND 



+5V-1 



MMENC 



MMREV-N 



j(mm) 






Error Code 



Concerned Part 



< 



E3 



Paper Sensor (D.EN) 



Is a belt cartridge properly installed ? 



<c 



J 



> 



NO 



Re-install or replace the belt cartridge. 



YES 



Does a transfer drum rotate lightly ? 

E 



'YES 



> — N0 , pS Is an encoder plate deformed ? ^> — T ES 

^—^ — ^ ^-^ 



Confirm the connection of connector. 



i 



Is a rotation torque excessive ? 




Replace the transfer drum. 



NO 



<Ms DCN4 of I0D1 properly connected with a connector of paper sensor (D.EN) ? \ 



NO 



Connect them properly 



Check the voltage: +5V-1 



<z 



1 



NO/ 



I 



<^ Is E3 error cleared ? ^> 



YES 



Is E3 error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



Is the voltage +5V between DCN4-1 and 3 ? 



<; 



INO 



> 



YES 



Replace the paper sensor (D.EN). 



Is the voltage +5V between DCN2-1 and 4 ? 



j 



> 



YES 



NO 



Replace a low voltage power supply (LVPS). 



NO/ 



i. 



Is E3 error cleared ? 



> 



Replace the IOD1 PWB 2. 

. E = 

Is E3 error cleared ? ^ > 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



MCTL 



^fYES 



Job is complete. 



1LCN 






IOD1 




Paper Sensor (D.EI\n 




31 


HPSEN-N 


31 
DC 


DCN4 












N1 


1 
2 
3 


Relay connector 


+5V-S 




1 
2 
3 




1 
2 
3 




LVPS 




DCN2 


HPSEN-N 


1 
4 




SGND 


ACN1 

1 
4 


+5V-1 












SGND 

















^1 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



E4 



Toner Sensor PCB.(LED side) 

4 



Confirm the connection of a toner sensor PCB.(LED side) connector. 



<1s DCN7 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of the toner sensor 7\ 



NO 



2 



Connect them properly. 



YES 



Check the voltage(LEDON-N/P) 



i 



NO 



< 



Is E4 error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



\\s a signal voltage between DCN7-7 and 9 to be a rising edge(+24V) ?V 

^NO 

\\s a signal voltage between DCN1-15 and 41 to be a trailing edge 7\\- 



YES 



NO 



Replace the toner sensor PCB. 

4 



Replace the IOD1 PWB 2. 



< 



YES 



Is E4 error cleared ? 



> 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Toner Empty PCB. 



Job is complete. 







IOD1 












MCTL 


DCN1 DCN7 
















LEDON-P 


7 
8 
9 


7 
8 
9 




1ICN 


SGND 


41 
15 




7 
8 
9 


1 
2 
3 






41 
15 


TLSCHK 




LEDON-N 


SGND 



































Error Code 


E5 


Concerned Part 


TR Cam Clutch 3 (TRCM) 



00 



Confirm the connection of a TR cam clutch 3 connector. 



£ 



YES 



Is ECN8 of I0D2 properly connected with a connector of the solenoid ? 
Is ECN1 of I0D2 properly connected with 12CN of MCTL PWB 2? 



NO 



Connect them properly. 



i 



"YES 



Check the voltage(TRSLON-N/P) 



I 



NO 



<^ Is E5 error cleared ? "^> 



YES 



<4 s a single voltage between ECN8-4 and ECN2-5 of I0D2 to be a trailing edge ly - 



YES 



Replace TR cam clutch 3. 



<1s a single voltage between 5 of ECN2 and 18 of I0D2 to be a rising edge ? \- 



YES 



Replace the I0D2 PWB 2. 



< 



yNO 



Is E5 error cleared ? 



i 



> 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Job is complete. 




MCTL I0D2 

TRSLON-P 



+24V-1 
PGND 



ECN1 



18 



ECN2 



ECN8 



Job is complete. 



+24V-1 



TR Cam Clutch 3 



TRSLON-N (TRCl 



CD 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



E6 



TR Cam Clutch 3 (FBCM) 



Confirm the connection of a TR cam clutch 3 connector. 



i 



YES 



Is ECN10 of I0D2 properly connected with a connector of the solenoid ? 
Is ECN1 of I0D2 properly connected with 12CN of MCTL PWB 2? 



NO 



i 



Connect them properly. 



YES 



NO 



Check the voltage (FBSLON-N/P) 



i 



<^ Is E6 error cleared ? \- 



YES 



Job is complete. 



^L 



^js a single voltage between ECN1 0-4 and ECN2-5 of IOD2 to be a trailing edge J>- 
\\s a single voltage between ECN1-17 and ECN2-5 of IOD2 to be a rising edge Ty 



YES 



Replace the transfer solenoid. 



YES 



<c 



Replace the IOD2 PWB 2. 



NO 



Is E6 error cleared ? 



i 



> 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Job is complete. 



IOD2 




TR Cam Clutch 3 



CO 

o 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



E7 



Cleaner Clutch 3 



Confirm the connection of a cleaner clutch 3 connector. 



i 



Js ECN1 1 of I0D2 properly connected with a connector of the clutch ? 
Is ECN2 of IOD2 properly connected with DCN10 of IOD1 ? 



NO 



Is ECN1 of IOD2 properly connected with 1 1CN of MCTL PWB 2? 



j 



> 



YES 



Connect them properly. 

i — 

<^ Is E7 error cleared ? ^ >- 

INO 



YES 



Job is complete. 



Check the voltage (FBCLON-N/P) 



i 

<l s a single voltage between ECN1 1-3 and ECN2-5 of I0D2 to be a trailing edge? > 



YES 



I 



Replace the cleaner clutch 3. 



<^ Is a single voltage between ECN2-5 and 1 6 of ECN1 to be a rising edge ? ^> 



YES 



Replace the IOD2 PWB 2. 



< 



^NO 



Is E7 error cleared ? 



i 



> 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Job is complete. 



MCTL 



IOD2 



11CN 



16 



FBCLON-P 1R 



+24V-1 
PGND 



ECN1 



ECN11 



ECN2 

1 

5 



+24V-1 



Cleaner Clutch 3 



FBCLON-N1FBCL 



T~ 
CO 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



E8 



Fixing Clutch(FUCL) 



Confirm the connection of a fixing clutch connector. 



i 



Js ECN9 of IOD2 properly connected with a connector of the clutch ' 
Is ECN1 of IOD2 properly connected with 12CN of MCTL PWB 2? 



NO 



'YES 



Check the voltage (FUCLON-N/P) 



Connect them properly. 
<T Is E8 error cleared ? ^> 



YES 



NO 



<^ [s a single voltage between ECN9-3 and ECN2-5 of I0D2 to be a trailing edge ? )> 



YES 



I 



Replace the fixing clutch(FUCL). 



NO 



< ^ Is a single voltage between ECN1-20 and ECN2-9 of I0D2 to be a rising edge ? ^ > 



YES 



Replace the IOD2 PWB 2. 



NO 



<c 



Is E8 error cleared ? 



i 



> 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Job is complete. 



MCTL 




IOD2 






12CN 
20 


FUCLON-P 


ECI\ 

20 

ECI\ 
5 
8 
9 


11 ECN9 

1 
3 

12 


Fix 
+24V-1 / 


fuclon-nI f 


+24V-1 






PGND 






SGND 

















Job is complete. 



Fixing Clutch 



FUCL 



CO 



Error Code 


E9 


Concerned Part 


Belt Sensor (PBS) 



< 



I 



Is a belt cartridge leaned to one side ? 



<c 



INO 



> 



YES 



Is a belt sensor stained ? 



i 



> 



YES 



Replace the belt cartridge. 



Install the printer to be leveled out. 



Clean the belt. 



NO 



Confirm the connection of connector. 



i 



<Q Is E9 error cleared ? ^> 

Ino 



Js DCN16 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of the sensor p 
Is DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 1 1CN of MCTL PWB 2? 



NO 



'YES 



Check the voltage (+5V-1 ) 



Connect them properly. 

< ^ Is E9 error cleared ? ^> 

I NO 



YES 



Job is complete. 



/ 




n^KHc o ^>nri o ^f mnno 


v 


YES 




\ 


is ine voiidge +ov Deiween l^v^im iu-^. cuiu o ui iwl^ i : 


YES 


— p- ntjpiciufc; int? ut;ii stMisur ^rooj. 




Ino 






< 


Is the voltage +5V between DCN2-1 and 4 of IOD1? 


v 


^ Rrnhrr thr IDD1 PWR ° 










^ 








^ 
^ 




^ 


r 




NO 




< 


Is E9 error H^pmrl ? 


v 


^ r?rkr»lnr>rk thr* MOTI D\A/R O 








-p riepiace me iviu i l r vvd ^. 



I 



YES 



Job is complete. 



11CN 



29 



MCTL_ IOD1 

.IPBSEN-N 



+5V-1 
SGND 



DCN1 DCN16 



29 



DCN2 



Belt Sensor 



PBSEN-N 



+5V-1 



SGND 



PBS 
Sensor 



CO 
CO 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



EL 



Erase Lamp (EL) 



Confirm the connection of a erase lamp connector. 



a. 



sjs DCN7 of I0D1 properly connected with a connector of the erase lamp 
' Is DCN1 of I0D1 properly connected with 1 1 CN of MCTL PWB 2? 



NO 



Connect them properly. 



j 



YES 



Check the voltage (ELON-N/P) 



c 



I 



Is EL error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



NO 



\Js a single voltage between DCN7-1 1 and DCN2-25 to be a trailing edge ?J> 



YES 



i 



Replace the LED PCB. 



NO 



<(js a single voltage between DCN1-27 and 44 of I0D2 to be a rising edge p> 



YES 



Replace the IOD1 PWB 2. 



< 



y NO 



Is EL error cleared ? 



i 



> 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Job is complete. 



Relay Connector 



MCTL 




IOD1 






Erase L 


11CN 


PGND 


DCN1 DCN7 




V 




EL 




44 


44 
27 

DCh 

17 

25 




10 
11 
9 


+24V-1 


1 
2 


1 
2 


+24V-1 


ELON-N 


27 


ELON-P 


ELON-N 










+24V-1 


J2 








PGND 











CO 



Error Code 


FO 


Concerned Part 


SL2 PS Fan 



I 



Confirm the connection of a fan motor connector. 



i. 



Is DCN18 of IOD1 properly connected with a connector of the fan motor ?^ 
Is DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 11CN of MCTLPWB 2? 



NO 



Connect them properly. 



j 



YES 



Check the voltage (CTFANON-P) 



<Q Is FO error cleared ? "^> 

I NO 



YES 



<^ Is the voltage between DCN18-1 and 2 to be a trailing edge ? ^> 



YES 



i 



Replace the fan motor. 



NO 



<^ Is the voltage between DCN1-33 and 44 to be a trailing edge ?^> 



YES 



Replace the IOD1 PWB 2. 



NO 



<c 



Is FO error cleared ? 



j 



> 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Job is complete. 



11 



CN 



44 



33 



MCTL IOD1 

PGND 



CTFANON-P 



+24V-1 
PGND 



DCN1 DCN18 



44 



33 



DCN2 

17 
25 



Job is complete. 



CTFANON-P 



PGND 



CTFANERR 



SL2 PS Fan 



_/6?LN 
=\FAN/ 



CO 

en 



Error Code 


F2 


Concerned Part 


Coolinf Fan OZ (OZFAN) 



I 



Confirm the connection of a fan motor connector. 



i 



Is ECN5 of I0D2 properly connected with a connector of the fan motor ' 
Is ECN1 of IOD2 properly connected with 12CN of MCTL PWB 2 ? 



NO 



i 



YES 



Check the voltage (OZFANON-P) 



<c 



Connect them properly. 
Is F2 error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



NO 



v r~ 






<^ Is the voltage between ECN5-1 


\ YES 


Replace the fan motor (OZFAN). 


-*] 


ana d. to ue a trailing euge < ? p 


^NO f~ 




<Ms the voltage between ECN1-19 an 


c\ EON°-8 tn ho n tmilinn peine ° \ ^^ ^ 


Replace the IOD2 PWB 2. 






^ 






^ 
^ 






1 


fkio 






<^ Is F2 error 


rlnnrnH ? \ ^ 


Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 





3 



YES 



Job is complete. 



MCTL 



IOD2 



12CN 



19 



OZFANON-P 



+24V-1 
SGND 



ECN1 ECN5 



19 

T~ 
8 



ECN2 



OZFANON-P 



PGND 



0ZFANERR 



Cooling Fan OZ 

.fan; 



CO 

o 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



F4 



Cooling Fan (EX) 2 (HTFAN) 



Confirm the connection of a heater fan connector. 



i 



Js DCN14 of I0D1 properly connected with a connector of the heater fan ? , 
Is DCN1 of IOD1 properly connected with 1 1 CN of MCTL PWB 2? 



NO 



'NO 



Check the voltage (HTFANON-P). 



i 



Connect them properly. 

i 

Is F4 error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



NO 



\Js the voltage between DCN 14-10 and 1 1 to be a rising edge ?^>- 

^NO f~ 

<^ls the voltage between DCN1-35 and 44 to be a rising edge ? \- 



YES 



Replace the heater fan. 



YES 



Replace the IOD1 PWB 2. 



NO 



<c 



Is F4 error cleared ? 



i 



> 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Job is complete. 



11CN 



44 



35 



MCTL IOD1 

PGND 



HTFANON-P 



+24V-1 
PGND 



DCN1 DCN14 



44 
35 

"DCN2 

17 
25 



10 
11 
12 



HTFANON-P 



PGND 



HTFANERR 



Cooling Fan (EX) 2 
, HTFAN , 




Error Code 


F5 


Concerned Part 


High Voltage Unit (HVU) 



CO 

^1 



Confirm the status of a charger unit. 



< 



I 



Is the charger unit properly installed ? 



c 



J 



> 



NO 



Re-install the charger unit. 



YES 



Is a corona wire cut or shorted ? 



> 



YES 



Replace the charger unit or belt cartridge. 



^TNO 



Confirm the connection of high voltage wiring. 



\|s there any contract failure of the high voltage (CHV) output terminal ?> 



< 



Is F5 error cleared ? 



> 



YES. 



Job is complete. 



J NO 



YES 



I 



Have the electric pole properly contact. 



NO 



<^ Is there any contract failure or short of CHV socket part ? \ 



YES 



Clean the socket part. 



VNO 



Replace the high voltage (HVU) 



< 



Is F5 error cleared ? 



> 



YES, 



Job is complete. 



J NO 



c 



Is F5 error cleared ? 



i 



> 



NO 



Replace the IOD1 or MCTL PWB 2. 



YES 



Job is complete. 



MCTL 




IOD1 








HVL 








11CN 
10 


CHV ON 
-/■ 


10 


DCN17 

1 
7 
8 


+24V-1 


BCN1 ( 

1 
7 
8 


3HV 


HV 


Charaer L 


CHVON-N 








CHVERR 




































O 



CO 
00 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



HO (wire cut/ short error of thermistor) 



Fusing Unit 



Confirm the connection of a fusing unit connector. 



i 



Is the fusing unit properly installed 



NO 



YES 



Is there any contact failure due to damaged connector of fusing unit 7, 
'Are the connectors properly connected between the fusing unit\ ) __NP_ 
and FUCN of MCTL PWB 2? 



Re-install the fusing unit. 



Replace the charger unit or belt cartridge. 



Connect them properly. 



NO, 



Replace the fusing unit. 



<c 



5 



'<_ 



Is HO error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



Job is complete. 



Is HO error cleared ? 



Replace the I0D1 or MCTL PWB 2. 



i 



YES 



Job is complete. 



MCTL 




a 



Fusing Unit 



CO 
CD 



Error Code 


H2,H3,H4 


Concerned Part 


Fusing Unit and Others 



Confirm that a fusing heater is lit. 



i 



/ \ NO I 

<^ Is the fusing heater controlled for On/Off. ^> p \ Confirm the wiring and connector of the heater. 



i 



YES 



Is the line voltage to be the default value 



YES 



, ^ 

\ls the rating of fusing heater correct 



Confirm the input voltage. 



Confirm the rating and replace 
the fusing heater. 



<^ Is the connector HP/HN connected ? ^>^ Q P' Connect them properly. - 



j 



YES 



<^ Is the fuser unit properly installed ? ^>^> > Install it properly 



Are H2,H3 and H4 errors cleared ? 



YES 



i 



YES 



NO 



Replace the fusing unit. 



< 



Are H2,H3 and H4 errors cleared ? 



y 



NO 



YES^ 



< ^ Is the fuser connector damaged ? 

^NO 
<ls there any contract failure of the lamp holder? 
4 NO 

/ \ YES 

<T Is the heater wiring cut or damaged ? 



Replace the connector. 



Replace the lamp and lamp holder, 



Replace the heater. - 



'NO 



X 



YES 



YES / ' v. 

<^ Are 1-12,1-13 and H4 errors cleared ? J> 



NO 



Replace the power supply unit (LVPS). 



YES 



j 



*/ \ 

<^ Are 1-12,1-13 and H4 errors cleared ? J> 



i 



NO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



£ 



Job is complete. 



o 



Error Code 


L1 (Beam Detecting Error) 


Concerned Part 


Scanner Unit 



i 



Confirm the connection of an scanner unit connector. 



i 



v Is the connector PDCN properly connected ? y 

^Are the connector LCN1 and LCN of MCTL properly connected 7) 



NO 



< 



YES 



Replace the scanner unit. 



5 



Is L1 error cleared ? 
Tno 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



< 



> 



YES 



Connect the connector properly. 



Is L1 error cleared ? 



NO 



Job is complete. 



> 



YES 



MCTL 



LCN 



PD 



SGND 



+5V-1R 
BDT 



20 



LDU 



PDCN 



LCN1 



LCN3 



SM 



Scanner Unit 
Laser Diode 

& (5) 



T~ 



Error Code 



Concerned Part 



<c 



< 



L2 



Scanner Unit 



Is the connector LCN3 properly connected ? 



YES 



Replace the scanner unit. 

g 



Is L2 error cleared ? 



INO 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2. 



> 



NO 



< 



> 



YES 



Connect the connector properly. 



Is L2 error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



NO 



Job is complete. 



MCTL 


pn i ni i 




LCN 






























SCMCLK 


1 
2 
3 
4 
5 


SM 


Scanner Unit 

("siVM 






SCMRDY 




SCMON 








GND 


/ 


+24V-1 


/ 
20 




LCN3 








Error Code 



Concerned Part 



LL 



Scanner Unit 



Confirm the connection of an scanner unit connector. 



i 



YES 



Replace the scanner unit. 



< 



s 



Is LL error cleared ? 



Ino 



Replace the MCTL PWB 2 or 
DC power supply (LVPS). 



MCTL 




Is the connector LCN3 properly connected ? 

Is the connector PDCN properly connected ? 

Are the connector LCN1 and LCN properly connected ? 



NO 



<c 



> 



YES 



PD 



3 



20 



Connect the connector properly. 



Is LL error cleared ? 



> 



YES 



NO 



1 



Job is complete. 



LDU LCN3 



PDCN 



LCN1 



5 
-h 



Scanner Unit 



(^smJ) 



5. IMAGE FAILURE 



(D 



(2) 



(3) 




— o 





(4) 



(5) 



(6) 






(7) 



(8) 



(9)-a 







(9)-b 



(10) 





(1 


1) 













































































































































































(12) 



(13) 



(14) 




-.- 




L- 

Registration 



VIII-43 



(15)-a 



(15)-b 



(16) 



(17) 





wm^ mm \ 




(18) 



(19) 



(20) 





PE MoitleatTPE Mold 

1 t * 



(21) 




(22) 



^# ^ ■ " ^tfj.- r*}S^iift*|ia^^ 



(23) 







(24) 



(25) 



(26) 










(27) 



(28) 



■ 



Fig.8-2 



VIII-44 



1-1 Background 



Phenomenon 

Background is smeared due to toner spread as shown in print sample (1) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Too small toner mass and charging level in the developing process. 

2) Poor contact of the developer roller's bias pole. 

3) Life expired or failure of the OPC belt cartridge. 

4) Failure of the high voltage power supply unit (HVU). 

Countermeasures 

1) Replace the toner cartridge. (See Section 3.3 of Chapter III.) 

2) Confirm if the developer bias pole is deformed or not. 

3) Replace the OPC belt cartridge. (See Section 2.1 of Chapter VI.) 

4) Replace the high voltage unit (HVU). 



I-2 Missing Image at Edge 



Phenomenon 

There is missing or peeling toner found in the image at the edge as shown in the print 
sample (2) of Fig.8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Too small toner mass and charging level in the developing process. 

2) The OPC belt is deformed (waving). 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. 

2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. 



VIII-45 



1-3 


Jitter 



Phenomenon 

Uneven optical density appears periodically in the horizontal direction on the printed 
image as shown in print sample (3) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 
Failure of main motor. 

1) Irregular rotation of the drive motor. 

2) Failure of the gears. 

3) Variation of OPC belt running speed due to above reasons. 

4) Too much rotational load of the OPC belt. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Replace the main motor with a new one. (See Section 4.2.8 of Chapter VII.) 

2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 2.1 of Chapter VI.) 



I-4 


Ribbing 



Phenomenon 

Light print occurs on the right or left hand side of the image as shown in print sample (4) 
of Fig.8-2. 



Main Causes 

1 ) Slight tilt on the surface of printer 
installation table. 

(Tilt should be less than 1°.) 

2) Toner amount in the toner 
cartridge is insufficient. 

(The amount in a full cartridge 
should be 1 75g for Y, M, & C and 
275g for K.) 

3) Toner cartridge is not laid as 
level, and as the result, toner 
concentrates to one side. 




Fig.8-3 



Countermeasures 

1) Confirm that the printer installation table is flat and level. 

2) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. 

3) Shake the toner cartridge horizontally for several times to remedy the concentration. 



VIII-46 



1-5 Wrinkle / Image Migration 



Phenomenon 

Banding shadows of different optical density appear due to wrinkle, image migration and 
color misregistration occurring on the print paper as shown in print sample (5) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Print paper other than the recommended paper is being used. 

2) The paper discharger unit of the transfer unit 2 is not functioning. 

3) One side of the fusing unit is lifted up slightly. 

4) Fusing unit reaches to the end of life. 

Countermeasures 

1) Use a recommended paper. 

2) Confirm if the transfer unit 2 is properly installed to the paper discharger unit and 
functioning normally. 

2-1) Confirm the installation status. 

2-2) Clean the paper discharger unit, or replace it with a new one. (See Section 1 .2.3 
and 2.4 of Chapter VI.) 

3) Refit the fusing unit correctly and lock it in position or replace the fusing unit with a 
new one. (See Section 2.2 of Chapter VI.) 

4) Replace the fusing unit with a new unit. 



VIII-47 



1-6 


White Line (1) 



Phenomenon 

Vertical white line appears in the specific color area when test-printed in the four color 
mode (Stripe Mode), as shown in print sample (6) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Foreign particles adhering to the following places around the developer roller. (Refer 
to Fig.8-8.) 

• Between the cartridge cover and developer roller (a) 

• On the surface of the developer roller (b) 

• Between the blade fixing plate and the developer roller (c) 

• Between the blade and the developer roller (d) 

2) Foreign particles adhering to the toner cartridge's main blade of the color in question. 



Developer roller 




Blade fixing plate 



Developer blade 



Fig.8-4 

Countermeasures 

1) Implement the test print. 

2) Confirm the color of the toner cartridge in question that has caused the white line. 

3) Remove the foreign particles adhering to the developer roller. 

If foreign particles adhere to (d) of Fig.8-8, remove them referring to one of the figures 
below. 



Approx. 1cm 




Developer roller 



Fig.8-5 



Fig.8-6 



VIII-48 



1-7 


White Line (2) 



Phenomenon 

Vertical white line appears from the leading edge to the trailing edge of the printed image 
as shown in print sample (7) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

The dustproof glass of the optical unit 2 is smeared with toner or foreign particles. 

Countermeasures 

Clean the dustproof glass. 

1) Remove the OPC belt cartridge and toner cartridges. (See Section 2.1 of Chapter 
VI.) 

2) Remove the dustproof glass from the optical unit 2. 

3) Clean the dustproof glass. (See Section 1 .2.5 of Chapter VI.) 



I-8 Vertical White Band 



Phenomenon 

White band appears in the vertical direction of printed image as shown in print sample (8) 
of Fig.8-2. 



Main Causes 

Silicone oil adhering to the transfer drum 2. 



Transfer drum 2 




Transfer unit 2 



Drum cleaner 2 




Transfer drum 2 



Fig.8-7 

Countermeasures 

1) Wipe off the oil adhering to the transfer unit 2 and its perimeter. 

2) Replace the transfer drum 2 with a new one. (See Section 2.8 of Chapter VI.) 

3) If the oil adhesion is excessive, replace the OPC belt cartridge and drum cleaner 2 
with new ones. (See Section 2.1 and 2.5 of Chapter VI.) 



VIII-49 



1-9 Black Line / Blur in the Image 



Phenomenon 

Fine black line or blur appears in the printed image as shown in print sample (9) of Fig.8- 
2. 

Main Causes 

1) The corona wire of the charger unit is dirty. 

2) OPC belt surface is damaged. 

3) Foreign particles (paper dust, etc.) are stuck between the cleaning blade and OPC 
belt. 

4) Debris adhering to the base of the toner cartridge's developer roller where it contacts 
with the OPC belt. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Remove the OPC belt cartridge. 

1 -1 ) Clean the charger unit (corona wire). (See Section 1 .2.3 of Chapter VI.) 

1-2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 2.1 of Chapter VI.) 

2) Clean the surface of the developer roller. 



1-10 



Vertical Line 



Phenomenon 

Vertical line appears in the printed image as shown in print sample (10) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1 ) Foreign particles (dust, etc.) adhering to the parts located around the transfer drum 2, 
and consequently in contact with the toner image on the transfer drum 2. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Clean the paper discharger unit. (See Section 1 .2.3 of Chapter VI.) 

2) Clean the charger unit (corona wire) of the OPC belt cartridge. (See Section 1 .2.4 of 
Chapter VI.) 

3) Remove the drum cleaner 2, and then, clean the inside and outside of waste toner 
feeder. 

4) Clean the separator pawl. 



VIII-50 



1-1 1 Vertically Staggered Image 



Phenomenon 

Printed image staggered in the vertical direction as shown in print sample (1 1) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Shock or vibration applied to the printer. 

2) Failure of the optical unit 2; Vibration from rotation of the scanner motor. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Do not apply shock or vibration to the printer body. 

2) Installation location should be appropriate with no possibility of shock or vibration. 

3) Replace the optical unit 2 with a new one. (See Section 4.5.1 of Chapter VII.) 



1-12 


Banding 



Phenomenon 

Banding line appears in the horizontal direction as shown in print sample (12) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

This is a transfer failure due to the shock caused when the OPC belt seam passes over 
the cleaning blade. 



Belt seam 




Fig.8-8 

Countermeasures 

Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 2.1 of Chapter VI.) 



VIII-51 



1-13 



White Band 



Phenomenon 

White banding line appears in the horizontal direction, and consequently causes a 
missing image as shown in print sample (13) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Installation failure of the transfer unit 2, and deformation of the transfer roller 2. 

2) Contact failure of the transfer roller 2 bias pole. 

3) Transfer solenoid failure. 

Countermeasures 

1) Confirm if the transfer unit 2 is properly locked in position and that both ends of the 
transfer unit 2 are held by the hooks. 

2) Confirm if the transfer unit 2 is properly installed or not. 

3) Replace the TR cam clutch 3 with a new one. (See Section 4.2.6 of Chapter VII.) 

4) Replace the transfer unit 2 with a new one. (See Section 4.6.1 of Chapter VII.) 



VIII-52 



1-14 Toner Drop 



Phenomenon 

Toner spot stain is caused on the print by toner dropping within the printer engine as 
shown in print sample (14) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1 ) Toner drops onto the transfer drum 2 due to the breakdown of the waste toner feeder. 

1 -1 ) Mylar of the waste toner feeder is deformed. 

1-2) Waste toner is not properly collected by the waste toner feeder. 



Drum cleaner 2 

Cleaning brush 
Toner drop 




Mylar 



Waste toner feeder 



Fig.8-9 



2) Toner adhering to the developer roller drops on the OPC belt 



Countermeasures 



1 ) Check the cleaning brush and waste toner feeder. 

1-1) Clean the perimeter of the cleaning brush installation location. 

1-2) Check if the seal is deformed or damage. If there is any deformation or damage, 
replace the waste toner feeder with a new one. 

1 -3) Check if waste toner is stuck in the printer engine. Remove the waste toner with a 
vacuum cleaner designed to manage toner. 

2) Remove the toner cartridge. 

2-1) Clean the surface of the developer roller. 
2-2) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. 



VIII-53 



1-15 White Spot / Black Spot 



Phenomenon 

White spots and black spots appear on the print as shown in print sample (15) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1 ) Foreign particles adhering to the OPC belt or transfer drum 2. 

2) The OPC belt or transfer drum 2 is damaged. 

3) Foreign particles mixed in the toner. 

4) Foreign particles adhering to the transfer roller 2, or local deformation of the transfer 
roller 2. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Remove the OPC belt cartridge. 

1-1) Lightly wipe off the foreign particles adhering to the OPC belt using a cotton cloth. 

1-2) Replace the damaged OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 2.1 of 
Chapter VI.) 

2) Open the transfer unit 2, and check the transfer drum 2. 

2-1) Lightly wipe off the foreign particles adhering to the transfer drum 2 using a cotton 
cloth. 

2-2) Replace the damaged transfer drum 2 with a new one. (See Section 4.1 .12 of 
Chapter VII.) 

3) Remove the toner cartridge. 

3-1) Clean the surface of the developer roller. 
3-2) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. 

4) Replace the transfer unit 2 with a new one. (See Section 4.6.1 of Chapter VII.) 



1-1 6 Mixed Color Image 



Phenomenon 

Mixed color image appears in the print as shown in print sample (16) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Failure of toner cartridge: Blade pressure of the developer roller is incorrect or the 
blade is deformed. 

2) Restitution error of toner cartridge. 

Countermeasures 

1) Confirm the toner cartridge can be inserted smoothly. 

2) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. 

3) Reconfirm that the front cover unit is locked. 



VIII-54 



1-17 



Color Misregistration 



Phenomenon 

Color misregistration is caused between two colors as shown in print sample (17) of 
Fig.8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) The OPC belt cartridge is not properly installed. 

2) The OPC belt cartridge is deformed. 

3) The cleaning brush of the drum cleaner 2 is unstable in operation. 

4) Rotational load on the OPC belt cartridge is excessive. 

** This problem might occur in the first page printed in color mode immediately after 
printing in monochrome mode, or the first page immediately after turning on the 
printer. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Reset the OPC belt cartridge properly. 

2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 2.1 of Chapter VI.) 

3) Replace the drum cleaner 2 with a new one. 



1-18 



Toner Streak 



Phenomenon 

Brush mark line of uneven scanning density is caused in the image as shown in prir 
sample (18) of Fig.8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Main blade of the developer unit and the reset roller is not normal. 

2) Location of the toner cartridge is not correct. 

3) Transport paddle in the toner cartridge is deformed. 

4) Brush mark line appears in the continuous printing of high coverage (solid) patterns. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. 

2) Temporarily suspending the printing, agitate the toner cartridge and stabilize the 
replenishment of toner. 



VIII-55 



1-19 Mottle 

Phenomenon 

Variation of the scanning density is found in the image as shown in print sample (19) of 
Fig.8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) The transfer unit 2 is not fixed in place. 

2) Assembly of the transfer roller 2 is inaccurate. 

3) THV output of high voltage unit is not normal. 

4) Failure of the toner cartridge. 

5) Deformation of the print paper. 

Countermeasures 

1) Confirm that the transfer unit 2 is firmly locked in place. 

2) Confirm that the transfer roller 2 is properly installed. 

3) Replace the high voltage unit with a new one. (See Section 4.3.6 of Chapter VII.) 

4) Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. 

5) Replace the paper with new paper from a freshly opened ream. 



I-20 Residual Image 



Phenomenon 

Image of the preceding page appears on every other page as shown in print sample (20) 
of Fig.8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Cleaning failure due to lifting of the cleaning brush of the drum cleaner 2. 

2) Contact failure of the drum cleaner 's bias pole. 

3) Failure of high voltage unit. 

Countermeasures 

1) Check if the drum cleaner 2 is properly installed or not. 

2) Replace the failed high voltage unit with a new one. (See Section 4.3.6 of Chapter 
VII.) 



VIII-56 



1-21 



Insufficient Gloss 



Phenomenon 

Gloss of the print is not sufficient as shown in print sample (21) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) The fuser cleaner is stained. 

2) The fusing roller 2 is deteriorated. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Replace the fuser cleaner with a new one. (See Section 3.1 of Chapter III.) 

2) Replace the fusing unit with a new one. (See Section 2.2 of Chapter VI.) 

Note: 

When replacing the fusing unit, wait approximately for 30 minutes after the new unit is 

installed to allow the fusing oil to circulate in the new fusing unit 



I-22 


Back Stain 



Phenomenon 

Back side of the print paper is stained as shown in print sample (22) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 
Fusing unit: 

1) The cleaning pad of the fuser cleaner is stained. 

2) Silicone oil in the oil bottle is short. 

3) The fusing roller 2 and back-up roller are dirty. 



Countermeasures 

1 ) Replace the fuser cleaner with a new one. (See Section 3.1 of Chapter 

2) Clean the fusing roller 2 and back-up roller. 

3) Replace the fusing unit with a new one. (See Section 2.2 of Chapter VI.; 



VIII-57 



1-23 


White Print 



Phenomenon 

A blank page (no print at all) is output or a specific color is missing (not printed) as shown 
in print sample (23) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1) Laser light path is blocked by paper or other material stuck at the opening of the 
optical unit 2. 

2) The transfer solenoid is broken (not functioning). 

3) There is no belt bias voltage (CBV). 

4) There is no output from the high voltage unit (HVU) due to breakdown. 

Countermeasures 

1) Confirm that there are no foreign objects stuck in the opening of the optical unit 2. 

2) Replace the TR cam clutch 3 with a new one. (See Section 4.1.14 of Chapter VII.) 

3) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. (See Section 2.1 of Chapter VI.) 

4) Replace the high voltage unit with a new one. (See Section 4.3.6 of Chapter VII.) 



I-24 Insufficient Fusing 



Phenomenon 

Printed image is partially missing as shown in print sample (24) of Fig. 8-2. This proves 
that the fusing is insufficient. 

Main Causes 

1) Wrong selection of print media (label or envelope, etc.) at the Host (driver) side. 

2) Recommended paper is not being used. 

3) Double-feed paper. 

4) Failure of the fusing unit. 

Countermeasures 

1) Adjust the mode of Host side to suit the print media in use. 

2) Use the recommended paper. 

3) Fan the paper before loading in the media cassette. 

4) Replace the failed fusing unit with a new one. (See Section 2.2 of Chapter VI.) 



VIII-58 



1-25 Vertical Smear 



Phenomenon 

Printed image is smeared vertically as shown in print sample (25) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

1 ) Paper dust between the cleaning blade and OPC belt. 

2) Debris adhering to the base of a toner cartridge's developer roller where it contacts 
with the OPC belt. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Remove paper dust between the cleaning blade and OPC belt referring to the figure 
below. 



OPC belt 




Fig.8-10 

2) Replace the OPC belt cartridge with a new one. 



I-26 



Black Toner Light 



Phenomenon 

Black color of printed image is light as shown in print sample (26) of Fig. 8-2, and the 
printer clatters at the same time. 

Main Causes 

Black toner in the cartridge has solidified because the printer is used under high 
temperature circumstance or due to continuous printing. 

Countermeasures 

Replace the black toner cartridge with a new one. 



VIII-59 



1-27 Color Missing 



Phenomenon 

Color is missing in the printed image as shown in print sample (27) of Fig. 8-2. 

Main Causes 

Fusing failure due to using damp paper or using the printer under high humidity 
conditions. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Use the paper immediately after open the paper bag. 

2) Change the NVRAM setting. (Refer to THV TUNE UP' in Section 3.4.2 of Chapter V. 



I-28 Vertical Lines on OHP 



Phenomenon 

Vertical lines appear when printing the OHP sheet as shown in print sample (29) of Fig. 8- 
2. 

Main Causes 

Paper dust around the paper exit roller adhering to the OHP sheet. 

Countermeasures 

1 ) Use the recommended OHP sheet. 

2) Clean the paper exit roller. 



VIII-60 



APPENDIX A 



SERIAL NO. DESCRIPTIONS 

The descriptions as below shows how to read labels on each place. 



< ID for production month of Printer > 



January 
February 
March 
April 



May 
June 
July 
August 



J: 
K: 
L: 
M: 



September 
October 
November 
December 



ID for production month of other parts than the printer 



January 
February 
March 
April 



May 
June 
July 
August 



September 
October 
November 
December 



(1) Printer 



U601 57L1 S1 1 1 1 01 



(120V) 
MODEL NO. 



1 — SERIAL NO. 
L- FACTORY NO. 

— YEAR 
MONTH 



<Location> 



Rear of the printer 




A-1 



(2) Toner Cartridge 



<Location> 



2XXXXXXXXXX 



YEAR —MONTH 



SERIAL NO. 




(3) OPC Belt Cartridge 



2XXXX 



YEAR 



-MONTH 



"SERIAL NO. 



<Location> 




A-2 



(4) Fusing Unit 



XXXX7 



23A 



REV.(-, A - Z) 



-DATA 



—MONTH 
YEAR 

VOLTAGE (100V, 120V, 240V) 



<Location> 




(5) Scanner Unit 



<Location> 



7 12 3 A REV.(-,A-Z) 



"DATE 



— MONTH 
YEAR 




A-3 



(6) Transfer Drum (Hand-writing) 



XXXXXX-71 23 



-DATE 



MONTH 



SERIAL NO. YEAR 



<Location> 




A-4 



DIAMETER / CIRCUMFERENCE OF ROLLERS 

The diameter or circumference of each roller is listed below; 



No. 


Parts Name 


Diameter (Circumference) 


1 


OPC Belt 


(380 mm) 


2 


Developer Roller 


4 18 mm (56.52 mm) 


3 


Transfer Roller 


4 20 mm (62.80 mm) 


4 


Paper Pick-up Roller 


c|)40 mm (125.60 mm) 


5 


Transfer Drum 


4 121 mm (379.94 mm) 


6 


Back-up Roller 


4) 32 mm (100.48 mm) 


7 


Fusing Roller 


4) 32 mm (100.48 mm) 


8 


Drum cleaner 2 


4 25 mm (78.50 mm) 


9 


Cleaning Roller 


4 18 mm (56.52 mm) 


10 


Registration Roller 


4 13.5 mm (42.39 mm) 


11 


Paper Exit Roller 


c|> 16 mm (50.24 mm) 



A-5 



SHELF LIFE OF EACH CONSUMABLE 

Each consumable follows has its own shelf life. Shelf life varies whether the package of 
consumable is unpacked or not. 



Consumable 


Before unpacking *1 


After unpacking *2 


Toner cartridge (all colors) 


3 years 


1 year 


OPC belt cartridge 


3 years 


1 year 


Fuser cleaner 


N/A 


N/A 



Note: 

*1: It means that the consumable life is 1 year if it is stored for 2 years. 

*2: Even though shelf life is one year after unpacking, the consumable life will be getting 
less than one year if it is stored more than 2 years before unpacking. 



A-6 



CONSUMABLES REPLACEMENT 

Each consumable follows should be replaced according its own life. 



1) Toner Cartridge 

Life: K = 12,000 pages, CYM = 7,200 pages 

Condition: Above figures are based on 5% coverage. Life is detected by the 

toner empty sensor. 
Note: 
Life of the starter toner cartridge is half of the above figures. 



2) 



3) 



4) 



Oil Bottle 




Life: 


12,000 pages 


Condition: 


Life is detected by the oil empty sensor. 


Waste Toner Pack 


Life: 


18,000 images 


Condition: 


Above figure is based on 5% coverage. 




waste toner sensor. 


120K Kit 




Life: 


120,000 pages 


Condition: 


None 



5) OPC Belt Cartridge 

Life: 60,000 images 

Condition: Above figure varies depending on pages/job. Refer to the list 

below. 



Pages per job 


1 page 


2 page 


3 page 


4 page 


5 page 


6 page 


7 page 


8 page 


9 page 




24,000 


30,000 


35,000 


39,000 


43,000 


46,000 


49,000 


51,000 


53,000 



Pages per job 


10 page 


11 page 


12 page 


13 page 


14 page 


1 5 page ~ 




54,000 


56,000 


57,000 


58,000 


59,000 


60,000 



5) Cleaning Roller 

Life: 12,000 pages 

Condition: Above figure varies depending on coverage. Refer to the list 

below. 



Coverage 


~ 20% 


20% ~ 40% 


40% ~ 


Additional life deleted 





1 


2 


Life (pages) 


12,000 


6,000 


4,000 



6) 



Fusing Unit 

Life: 

Condition: 



60,000 pages 

Above figure varies depending on coverage. Refer to the list 
below. 



Coverage 


-12.5% 


12.5% -20% 


20% ~ 40% 


40% ~ 60% 


60% ~ 


Additional life deleted 





0.2 


0.5 


1 


2 


Life (pages) 


60,000 


50,000 


40,000 


30,000 


20,000 



A-7 



Figure from <Next care information 32> 



Add figure of 
<Total pages 34> 



Modified by the addtional life deleted figure 

<40,000> 

1) No change 




2) 10 pages 



<39,990> 



1) Print 10 pages 
by 5% coverage 



2) Print 10 pages 
by 50% coverage 



This difference is the actual 
life remaining 



2) 10 pages 



1) 10 pages 
<0> 



Figure from <Total page 34> 



Total page counter life 



<40,020> 

— r 



3) Add 20 pages 



<40,000> 



This figure is actual 
next care time 



3) <Clear care 36> 




3) No change 



<20> 



A-8 



HOW TO RE-ENTER ORIGINAL DATA TO THE MCTL PWB 2 



A 



CAUTION 

Actions 1) and 2) MUST be carried out BEFORE the MCTL PWB 2 is removed or the 
NVRAM initialized otherwise ALL READINGS WILL BE LOST 



1 ) Go into the Engine Controller Mode. (Refer to Section 3 "ENGINE CONTROLLER 
MODE" of Chapter V.) 

2) Before initializing the NV-RAM or replacing the MCTL PWB 2, record the following 
values; 

i) Display TOTAL PAGE to record the value. 

(i.e.) TOTAL PAGE (T) = 41 2P 

ii) Display EACH IMAGE to record the values. 

(i.e.) EACH IMAGE (IY)=348P 

(IM)=353P 

(IC)=365P 

(IK)=439P 

iii) Display NEXT CARE to record the values, 
(i.e.) FCROLL(NC2) = 12,050P 
BL UNIT (NC7) = 49,1 35P 
FU UNIT (NC8) = 39,684P 
120KKIT(NC9) = 120,000P 

iv) Display LIFE PERIOD SET of FACTORY MODE to record the values, 
(i.e.) FCROLL(LP2) = 12,000P 
BL UNIT (LP7) = 50,000P 
FU UNIT (LP8) = 60,1 OOP 
120KKIT(LP9) = 120,000P 

3) When you have recorded all the values above, initialize the data in the NV-RAM on 
the MCTL PWB 2 or replace the MCTL PWB 2. 

After initializing all the data in the NV-RAM on the MCTL PWB 2, or replacing the MCTL 
PWB 2, all the original counter values for the cleaning roller, OPC belt cartridge, fusing 
unit, and 120K kit should be re-entered as below; 

The method used to correct the counters is to reset the page counter to a calculated 
TOTAL PAGE value and then to perform a CLEAR CARE for the item to reset the NEXT 
CARE for that item to the value recorded in 2) iii). 

The basic formula used in these calculations is:- 

TOTAL PAGE = NEXT CARE - LIFE PERIOD 

Where this formula would result in a negative number, the LIFE PERIOD should be 
temporarily set to a lower value so that the result is a positive number and then this 
number and LIFE PERIOD used to perform the CLEAR CARE to reset the NEXT CARE 
counter. 



A-9 



4) Re-enter the FC ROLL (NC2) value as follows; 

i) Enter the value of NC2 - LP2 into the TOTAL PAGE counter, 
(i.e.) NC2 - LP2 => 12,050P - 12,000P = 50 

Enter the value '50' in the TOTAL PAGE counter. 

ii) Perform CLEAR CARE 2. (Refer to '36 CLEAR CARE' in page V-23 of Chapter 
V.) 

iii) Check that the value of NEXT CARE is reset to the recorded value in 2) iii). 
(i.e.) NC2 = 12,050P 

5) Re-enter the BL UNIT (NC7) value as follows; 

i) After calculating the values so that they work in the following formula 
(IY + IM + IC + IK) = NC7 - LP7, 
enter each value of LP7, IY, IM, IC, IK. 

(i.e.) (IY + IM + IC + IK) = NC7 - LP7 

=> (348 + 353 + 365 + 439) = 49,135 - 50,000 

Since the above result is minus, reduce the value of LP7 is 40,000P in 
order to make the result plus, then enter it into the LIFE PERIOD SET 
counter in FACTORY MODE. 

The formula is as follows; 

(IY+IM + IC + IK) = NC7-LP7 

=> (348 + 353 + 365 + 439) = 49,135 - 40,000 

=> (348 + 353 + 365 + 439) = 9,135 

Change the value of IK from 439 to 8,069 so that the formula works out. 

(348 + 353 + 365 + 8,069) = 9,135 

Then, enter each value for IY=348, IM=353, IC=365, and IK=8,069 in the 
EACH IMAGE SET counter in FACTORY MODE. 

ii) Perform CLEAR CARE 7. (Refer to '36 CLEAR CARE' in page V-23 of Chapter 
V.) 

iii) Check that the value of NEXT CARE is reset correctly, 
(i.e.) NC7 = 49,135P 

iv) Reset the LIFE PERIOD counter in FACTORY MODE to 50,000. 

6) Re-enter the FU UNIT (NC8) value as follows; 

i) Enter the value of NC8 - LP8 into the TOTAL PAGE counter. 

(i.e.) NC8 - LP8 = 39,684 - 60,100 = - 20,416 

Since the above result is minus, reduce the value of LP8 is 30,000P in 
order to make the result plus, then enter it into the LIFE PERIOD SET 
counter in FACTORY MODE. 

The formula is as follows; 

NC8 - LP8 = 39,684 - 30,000 = 9,684 

Enter the value '9,684' in TOTAL PAGE. 

ii) Perform CLEAR CARE 8. (Refer to '36 CLEAR CARE' in page V-23 of Chapter 
V.) 



A-10 



iii) Check that the value of NEXT CARE is reset correctly. 
(i.e.)NC8 = 39,684P 

iv) Reset the LIFE PERIOD counter in FACTORY MODE to 60,100. 

7) Re-enter the 1 20K KIT (NC9) value as follows; 

i) Enter the value of NC9 - LP9 into the TOTAL PAGE counter, 
(i.e.) NC9 - LP9 = 120,000 - 120,000 = 

Enter the value '0' into the TOTAL PAGE counter. 

ii) Perform CLEAR CARE 9. (Refer to '36 CLEAR CARE' in page V-23 of Chapter 
V.) 

iii) Check that the value of NEXT CARE is reset correctly. 
(i.e.)NC9 = 120,000P 

8) Re-enter the original TOTAL PAGE (T) value in TOTAL PAGE SET in FACTORY 
MODE. 

(i.e.) T = 412P 

9) Re-enter the original EACH IMAGE (IY, IM, IC, IK) values in EACH IMAGE SET in 
FACTORY MODE. 

(i.e.) (IY)=348P, (IM)=353P, (IC)=365P, (IK)=439P 

1 0) Ensure that the values in the LIFE PERIOD SET counters in FACTORY MODE are 
correct. 

(i.e.) FC ROLL (LP2)=1 2,000P 

BL UNIT (LP7)=50,000P 

FU UNIT (LP8)=60,1 OOP 

120KKIT(LP9)=120,000P 

11) Completed. 



A-11 



RE-PACKING INSTRUCTIONS 



A 



PRECAUTION 

When re-packing the printer before shipping, be sure to follow the steps and 
cautions below. Failure to do so will cause toner or oil spill in the printer and 
severe damage to the printer. 



6.1 Toner Cartridge 

1) Open the front cover 2 and remove 
all the toner cartridges (K, Y, M, C) 
from the printer. 

2) Put the original protective cover 
(orange) onto each cartridge and 
put it into the polyethylene bag. 



Protective cover 




3) Put the toner cartridges into the 
original starter kit packing. 



Toner cartridge 



Starter kit packing 




A 



CAUTION 

• If you do not have the original protective cover, cover each toner cartridge with bubble 
sheet to protect the developer roller. 

• If you do not have the original starter kit packing, pack each toner cartridge firmly with 
bubble sheet and put them into the outer carton. 



A-12 



6.2 OPC Belt Cartridge 



1 ) Open the top cover ASSY 2 and 
remove the OPC belt cartridge from 
the printer. 

2) Open the shutter on the OPC belt 
cartridge and remove toner in the 
cartridge with a vacuum cleaner. 



Shutter 




3) Cover the OPC belt cartridge with 
the original protective sheet (black). 

4) Put the cartridge into the 
polyethylene bag. 




Protective sheet 



5) Put the OPC belt cartridge into the 
original starter kit packing. 



OPC belt cartridge 



Starter kit packing 




A< 



t\ CAUTION 

• Do not directly touch the OPC belt surface with bare hands or gloves. 

• If the belt is exposed for more than two minutes to a light source of 800 lux, the belt 
may be damage. 

• If you do not have the original starter kit packing, pack the OPC belt cartridge firmly 
with bubble sheet and put it into the outer carton. 



A-13 



6.3 Fusing Unit 



1 ) Open the rear access cover and 
slacken the fusing unit securing screws 
(2 pes.) 

2) Holding the handles at both ends of the 
fusing unit and remove the fusing unit 
from the printer. 



Fusing unit 




3) Remove the oil bottle and the fuser 
cleaner from the fusing unit and put 
each of them into the polyethylene 
bag. 



Oil bottle 



Fuser cleaner 



A 



CAUTION 

Pack the oil bottle in the polyethylene bag 
and seal it firmly. Failure to do so will 
cause oil spill during shipping and damage 
to the printer. 



4) Put the oil bottle and the fuser cleaner 
into the original starter kit packing. 



Starter kit packing 



5) Remove the oil remaining in the fusing 
unit with the supplied syringe to avoid 
oil spill in the printer. 

Note: 

Re-install the fusing unit into the printer 
after cleaning the printer as instructed in 
the following section. For re-install of the 
fusing unit, see Section 6.6 'Packing'. 




Fuser cleaner 



A-14 



6.4 Waste Toner Pack 



1 ) Remove the waste toner pack from the 
printer. 

2) Clean toner around the pack and cover 
the hole of the waste toner pack firmly 
with gummed paper tape. 

3) Put the waste toner pack into the 
polyethylene bag and seal it firmly. 



Waste toner pack 




6.5 Cleaning 



Clean the following areas with a vacuum 
cleaner to remove toner. 

1 ) Around the waste toner pack / Waste 
toner feeder tube. 

i) Vacuum toner from the exit of the 
waste toner feeder tube and around 
the waste toner pack holder. 




ii) Cover the exit of the waste toner 
feeder tube with vinyl wrap. 




A-15 



2) Drum cleaner 2 

i) Remove the cleaner cover by 
releasing the two hooks. 

ii) Holding the handle located on the 
top of the drum cleaner 2, push it 
backwards. 

iii) Remove the drum cleaner 2 by 
lifting it out. 



Handle 



Drum cleaner 2 




iv) Clean the area where the drum 
cleaner 2 is mounted with a vacuum 
cleaner and a cloth. (Refer to the 
figure as shown on the right.) 

3) Inside the printer 

i) Remove the upper side cover, side 
cover (L), and upper cover from the 
printer. 

ii) Remove the control fan, and then 
remove the waste toner feeder unit. 



Waste toner 
feeder unit 




iii) Vacuum toner around the other side 
of the waste toner feeder tube and 
inside the printer. (Refer to the 
figure as shown on the right.) 

iv) Reassemble the waste toner feeder 
unit, control fan, upper cover, side 
cover (L), and upper side cover. 

v) Re-install the drum cleaner 2 and 
cleaner cover. 




Transfer drum 2 



A-16 



A 



CAUTION 

Be sure not to damage the surface of the transfer drum 2 with a vacuum cleaner when 
cleaning the areas around the transfer drum 2. 

Be sure not to contact the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner with the terminals of the 
interior. Failure to do so will cause damage to the electrical parts in the printer. 

It is recommended to ground the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner by using the earth 
wire. 



4) Media cassette 

i) Remove the media cassette from 
the printer and remove paper from 
the cassette. 

ii) Vacuum paper dust in the media 
cassette. 

iii) Reinstall the media cassette. 



Media cassette 




6.6 Packing 



1 ) Re-install the fusing unit into the 
printer. 

i) After setting the fusing unit in place, 
lightly press down the unit to firmly 
connect to the connector on the 
base. 

ii) Tighten the securing screws while 
pressing down the fusing unit. 
Check the metal hook of the screw 
at the left hand secures the fusing 
unit correctly. 

iii) Close the rear access cover and 
top cover ASSY 2. 



Fusing unit 




A-17 



2) Check the following items are 
packed in the starter kit packing; 

Four toner cartridges (K, Y, M, C), 
OPC belt cartridge, Oil bottle, Fuser 
cleaner. (Refer to the figure as 
shown on the right.) 

3) Put the printer into the polyethylene 
bag. 

4) Pack the printer, the starter kit 
packing, the waste toner pack, and 
power code in the box using the 
original packing material. 

5) Seal the outer box firmly. 

Starter kit packing 



Oil bottle 



Outer box 



Starter kit packing 



Waste toner pack 




Power code 



Printer 



A-18 



6) Fix the four joints, then band the 
box with two plastic bands. 



P.P band 




Joint 



A-19 



7. HIDDEN FUNCTION MENU 

7.1 Line Test Menu 

Hold down the + and - buttons and turn the print ON 



LINE TEST ----- < Press the Go button 


> 




Item 


Descriptions 


1 


LCD TEST 


All columns of the LCD are turned on to 
check that the LCDs are all displayed 
correctly. 


2 


LED TEST 


All LEDs are turned on in LCD TEST above 
and turned off in SW TEST below to check 
the LED performance. 


3 


SW TEST 


The corresponding number appears when 
pressing the button to check the 
performance of all buttons. 


4 


SENSOR TEST 


The corresponding character appears when 
the sensor performs to check the 
performance of all sensors. 


5 


RAM SIZE TEST 


Displays the size of the RAM installed in the 
printer and checks that the size is correct. 


6 


TRAY1 CHECK 


Displays the paper size of the installed 
cassette 1 to check it. 


7 


TRAY2 CHECK 


Displays the paper size of the installed 
cassette 2 to check it. 


8 


FLASH CARD R/W TEST 


Implements the reading/writing test of the 
compact flash card to check the interface 
and flash card. 



DRAM CHECK START — - < Press the Go button > 
DRAM test mode 



NV-RAM CLEAR ----- < Press the Go button > 
SURE? (SET/ELSE) NV-RAM clear 



ROM/RAM WAIT SET — - < Press the Go button > 
CARD/CART SEL (WAIT LEVEL = 4*) 
ROM/RAM wait setting (0 to 15) 



A-20 



7.2 Professional Menu 

The professional menu is open to users as per request to customize the printer functions 
mainly. 

To enter the professional menu, press the Go and Set buttons together. 
The details for each menu are described as follows; 



TRAY SETTING 



TRAY PRIORITY ----- T1>T2(>T3), (T3>)T2>T1 

Specifies the priority of the paper source when selecting 'Auto' in the paper source 
setting. 



ENGINE ADJUST 



LEFT MARGIN 

Adjusts the horizontal gap of the printing position when the optional lower cassette is 
installed. 

The setting in the main PCB is changed. 

-3.5mm ~ +3. 5mm The setting value can be changed by 5mm. 

TRAY1 = *** mm 

TRAY2 = *** mm 

TRAY3 = *** mm 

DUPLEX = *** mm 

YPOS ADJUST 

Adjusts the vertical gap of the printing position when the optional lower cassette is 
installed. 

The range of the setting value is +1 00 - -1 00. (Default is 0.) 

The setting value can be changed by 1 dot. 

TRAY1 = **** dot 

TRAY2 = **** dot 

TRAY3 = **** dot 

DUPLEX = **** dot 



A-21 



RESET SETTINGS 



RESET SETTING1 
Sets the current printer setting to the user setting 1 . 



SAVE SETTINGS 



SAVE SETTING1 
Saves the current printer setting to the user 1 . 



SAVE FONT 



(Only when selecting the LaserJet emulation.) 

PRIMARY FONT 

Saves the fonts to be currently registered as the primary font into the storage device 
(compact flash card, hard disk). 

FONT ID = #### 

SECONDARY FONT 

Saves the fonts to be currently registered as the secondary font into the storage 
device (compact flash card, hard disk). 

FONT ID = #### 

DOWNLOAD FONT 

Saves the current download font into the storage device (compact flash card, hard 
disk). 

FONT ID = #### 

exit SAVE 



SAVE MACRO 



(Only when selecting the LaserJet emulation and any macros are registered.) 

Saves the macros to be currently registered into the storage device (compact flash 
card, hard disk). 

MACRO ID = #### 



A-22 



SPOOL PRINT 



Specifies the collated printing when implementing reprint (secure print, proof print, 
public print). 

COLLATE = ON* 

COLLATE = OFF 



TRAYCOMMAND MODE 



Makes the command to select the paper source compatible with HP LaserJet 3. 
TRAY COM. = NORM * HP LaserJet 4 command 
TRAY COM. = SPEC. HP LaserJet 3 command 



READOUT SELECT 



Specifies that the printer reads DC3 in the FX emulation or not. 

READOUT = ON The data is ignored until DC1 is received when DC3 is 

received. 

READOUT = OFF * The data is not ignored even when DC3 is received. 



FONT SELECT 



SCALABLE FONT 

(Only when selecting the LaserJet emulation.) 

FONT = ALL* All scalable fonts can be selected when selecting the PCL 

font. 

FONT = LJ4 The following fonts cannot be selected when selecting the 

PCL font. 

Atlanta, BermudaScript, PCBrussels, Copenhargen, 
Germany, Portugal, Calgry, San Diego, UR Roman 



FONT SELECT 

(Only when selecting the LaserJet emulation.) 

Selects the default font in the LaserJet emulation. 



PRIMARY FONT 
SELECT FONT 
SYMBOL FONT 

SECONDARY FONT 
SELECT FONT 
SYMBOL FONT 



Selects the primary font. 



Selects the secondary font. 



A-23 



IBM CHR SET MODE 
IBM E1H = Beta 
IBME1H = Esszet* 



Places 'Beta' on E1 h of the IBM character set. 

Places the character of 'Esszet' on E1 h of the IBM 
character set. 



W BOLD ON/OFF 

The application software is provided for the dot printer, which reprints the 
character onto the same position to make the bold font. On the other hand, the 
laser printer detects the reprinted character and converts it to the bold font. After 
the HL-8V model, however, the function has caused that print speed gets slow in 
the FX and XL emulations. Therefore the setting is added, which selects to 
implement the function or to print fast without using the function. 



W BOLD = OFF * 
W BOLD = ON 



Not converts the reprinted character to the bold font in the 
FX and XL emulations. 

Converts the reprinted character to the bold font in the FX 
and XL emulations. 

(The print speed is decreased.) 



DLFNT Bd / It 

Brother has an original function such that the printer creates the bold font when 
receiving the command of the bold font which the printer does not have. If the 
download font is selected by ID, however, the bold font which has been specified 
before can remain in the printer so that the download font is printed in bold. 

Though the function was deleted from the printer for the mean time, it also 
caused the claims. Therefore the setting which deletes the function is added. 

DLFNT Bd / It = YES Creates the bold or italic font from the download font. 
DLFNT Bd / It = NO * Not creates the bold or italic font from the download font. 



B PROD ON/OFF 
B PROD = ON* 
B PROD = OFF 



Creates the bold or italic font from the bitmap font. 
Creates the bold or italic font from the bitmap font. 



CONDENCE SELECT 

The condensed font is printed at 16.66cpi in the dot printer emulation for the 
Brother laser printers in conjunction with that the 16.66cpi font is used. However, 
some customers need the same pitch with the one of the dot printer, and many 
customers still use the printer at 16.66cpi on the other hand. Therefore the 
setting which selects the pitch of the condensed font is added. 

CONDENCE = 16.66p* 

Sets the pitch of the Epson/IBM condensed character 16.66cpi. 
CONDENCE = 17.14p 

Sets the pitch the Epson/IBM condensed character 17.14cpi. 



A-24 



OEM FONT SELECT 

The special character set is necessary when the printer is supplied to the 
European countries. For the HL-1260 printer, the special character set is stored 
into the program ROM additionally. Since the font number is moved due to the 
addition, the character set is disabled for the normal model. 



OEM FONT = DISABL* 
OEM FONT = ENABLE 



Disables to select the European character. 
Enables to select the European character. 



BRO FONT SELECT 

The Brougham bitmap font of 10 pitch and 12 pitch is built in due to the user's 
request. 



BROBITM = DISABL* 
BROBITM = ENABLE 



Disables the internal 10/12 pitch Brougham 
bitmap font. 

Enables the internal 10/12 pitch Brougham bitmap 
font. 



ISR FONT SELECT 
ISRFONT = DISABLE 
ISRFONT = ENABLE 



Normal mode 
Israel mode 



300DPI PRIORITY 

Though it was necessary to select and print the cartridge font of Courier for the 
US customer, the 300dpi bitmap font could not be selected because the priority 
of the font selection was low in rank. Since the current model is compatible with 
HP LaserJet 4, the setting is added, which disables the compatibility with HP 
LaserJet 4 and makes the priority of the 300dpi bitmap font high. 



3B PRIO = LOW 



3BPRIO = HIGH 



Makes the priority of selection for the 300dpi 
bitmap font standard (low) in the font setting. 

Command: <ESCxCR>!1T 

Makes the priority of selection for the 300dpi 
bitmap font high in the font setting. 

Command: <ESCxCR>!2T 



A-25 



The priority in each setting is as follows; 
< When the printer resolution is 600dpi > 
3B PRIO = LOW 

1 . DOWNLOAD 600 

2. DOWNLOAD SCALABLE 

3. CARD 600 

4. CARD SCALABLE 

5. CART 600 

6. CART SCALABLE 

7. RESIDENT 600 

8. RESIDENT SCALABLE 

9. DOWN 300 

1 0. CARD 300 

1 1 . CART 300 

12. RESIDENT 300 



3B PRIO = HIGH 

1 . DOWNLOAD 600 

2. DOWNLOAD 300 

3. DOWNLOAD SCALABLE 

4. CARD 600 

5. CARD 300 

6. CARD SCALABLE 

7. CART 600 

8. CART 300 

9. CART SCALABLE 

10. RESIDENT 600 

11. RESIDENT 300 

12. RESIDENT SCALABLE 



< When the printer resolution is 300dpi > 
3B PRIO = either of low or high 

1 . DOWNLOAD 300 

2. DOWNLOAD SCALABLE 

3. CARD 300 

4. CARD SCALABLE 

5. CART 300 

6. CART SCALABLE 

7. RESIDENT 300 

8. RESIDENT SCALABLE 

FX / XL SCALE FONT 

Specifies the setting for the default font and font selected on the control panel in 
the Epson/IBM emulation. 

SCAL.F = NORMAL* Enables to select the only similar size of the font when the 

scalable font is selected. 

SCAL.F = ALL SIZE Enables to select all sizes of the font when the scalable 

font is selected. 

FX / XL SCALE ITA 

Specifies the setting for the italic font of the scalable font in the Epson/IBM 
emulation. 



ITA = OBLIQUE* 
ITA = ITALIC SEL 



Makes the upright font oblique to have italic when the 
scalable font is selected. 

Uses the upright font to have italic when the scalable font 
is selected. 



A-26 



PAPER&TRAY SIZE 



Specifies the default paper size. 

DEF PAPER =LT The default paper size is letter for the US and Canada 

models. 

DEF PAPER =A4 The default paper size is A4 for the other models. 



PARALLEL MENU 



Changes the signal timing of the Centronics interface 

PARALLEL TIMING 

The BUSY signal gets high when the STROBE signal 
goes up. 

The BUSY signal gets high when the STROBE signal 
goes down. 



CDCC PSW = L 
CDCC PSW = H* 



STB /ACK DELAY 
CDCC BSSL = H 

CDCC BSSL = L* 



The ACK signal is output when the BUSY signal goes 
down. 

The ACK signal is output before the BUSY signal goes 
down. 

INPUT PRIME 

INPUT PRIME = OFF* The INPUT PRIME signal does not reset the printer. 

INPUT PRIME = ON The INPUT PRIME signal resets the printer. 



REPRINT ON/OFF 



Specifies that the reprint function is enabled or disabled forcedly. 

REPRINT = ON* The reprint function is enabled or disabled following the 

setting of the user menu. 

REPRINT = OFF The reprint function is enabled forcedly. 



AUTO HRC OFF 



Specifies that the smoothing control is enabled or disabled automatically depending 
on the contents of the file. 

AUTO HRC = OFF* 

AUTO HRC = ON 



A-27 



APPLETALK AT/PS 



Specifies that the emulation is switched to the PS mode forcedly with AppleTalk. 
APPLE TALK = PS* Switches the emulation to the PS mode with AppleTalk. 
APPLE TALK = AUTO Uses the auto emulation function with AppleTalk. 



PS BINARY SELECT 



Specifies that the data from the parallel interface is handled as the binary data. 

PS BINARY = ASCII* Default. Enables the commands such as Ctrl-T, Ctrl-C 

and disables to use the binary data. 

PS BINARY = BIN Enables to print the binary data and disables the 

commands such as Ctrl-T. 



PS QUOTE BINARY 



PS QUOTEBIN = OFF* Disables to input the binary data even by the special 

codes. 

PS QUOTEBIN = ON Enables to input the binary data by the special codes. 



PS IMAGE MASK 



Revises the image mask procedure to make print speed faster with an OS/2 driver. 
PS IMAGEMSK = OFF* Not revises the image mask procedure. 
PS IMAGEMSK = ON Revises the image mask procedure. 



PS CEIL MODE 



PS CEIL = FLOOR* 
PS CEIL = CEIL 



PS STATUS 



STATUS ECHO = ON* 
STATUS ECHO = OFF 



A-28 



PROTECT OFF MODE 



Specifies the performance of the page protection function. 

PRO. OFF = AUTO* Protects the data spuriously even when the page 

protection is turned off. (Countermeasure for the memory 
full or print overrun error.) 

PRO.OFF = NORMAL Specification up to the 4 th mask ROM. 



HP ESC E COMMAND 



Specifies the performance of the ESC E command. 
HP ESC E = RESET* Resets the printer. 
HP ESC E = F / F Implements form feed. 



PS300RESO 



Specifies that the resolution is reduced to 300dpi in the PS mode automatically. 

PS300RESO = NO* Not reduces the resolution automatically. 

PS300RESO = IF 2M Reduces the resolution to 300dpi when the RAM size is 

2MB. 

PS300RESO = FORCE Reduces the resolution to 300dpi. 



COPY PAGES 



Fixes the copy page number to one page when COPY PAGES = OFF. 
COPY PAGES = ON* 
COPY PAGES = OFF 



PANEL RESET MODE 



Changes the setting of the reset printer function. 
RESET = JOB Resets the data per job. 

RESET = NORMAL* 



A-29 



JOB TIMEOUT SEL 



Specifies the setting of the job timeout. 

Though the job timeout has been set to 5 minutes in the PJL emulation since the HL- 
1260 printer, the setting to disable the timeout is added due to the user's request. 

TIME OUT = ON* Enables the job timeout. 

TIME OUT = OFF Disables the job timeout. 



DEMO PAGE ON/ OFF 



Specifies that the demo page is printed or not. 

When the setting is OFF, the demo page is deleted from the control panel and printer 
Web page, and the demo page is not printed by the PJL command and MIB. 

DEMO PAGE = ON* 

DEMO PAGE = OFF 



JOB CANCEL TIME 



Specifies the timeout of job cancel. (1 ~255) 
TIME OUT = ???sec 



PSCOPYPAGE 



PSCOPYPAGE = L3* 
PSCOPYPAGE = L2 

Switches the copy page operator in the PS mode between Level2 and Level3. 

@PJL DEFAULT PSCOPYPAGE = L3, L2 

@PJL SET PSCOPYPAGE = L3, L2 

@PJL DINQUIRE PSCOPYPAGE 

@PJL INQUIRE PSCOPYPAGE 



APPLEUSBPS 



BINARY = OFF* 
BINARY = ON 

Enables to print the PS pure binary data through the Mac USB interface. 

@PJL DEFAULT APPLEUSBPS = ON / OFF 

@PJL SET APPLEUSBPS = ON / OFF 

@PJL DINQUIRE APPLEUSBPS 

@PJL INQUIRE APPLEUSBPS 



A-30 



7.3 Reset Parts Life 



The Reset parts life menu is implemented when the service personnel replaces the periodic 
maintenance parts. For the parts to be replaced easily, however, it is assumed that the 
user replaces them by him/herself. Therefore the reset parts life menu is distinguished 
from the service menu described in the next section, '4. Service Menu'. 

(The following descriptions are not open to other than the service personnel in principal. 
You may let users know as necessary.) 

To enter the reset parts life menu, press the Go and + buttons together. 

The details for the menu are described as follows; 



RESET PARTS LIFE 



FC Roller Initializes the life of the fuser cleaner. 

OPC Belt Initializes the life of the OPC belt cartridge. 

FUSER UNIT Initializes the remaining life of the fusing unit. 

1 20K Kit Initializes the life of the 1 20K kit. 

PF KIT1 Initializes the remaining life of the paper feeding kit 1 . 

PF KIT2 Initializes the remaining life of the paper feeding kit 2. 



A-31 



7.4 Service Menu 



The service menu provides the printer information for the service personnel. (The 
following descriptions are not open to other than the service personnel.) 

To enter the service menu, press the + and Set buttons in this order while holding down 
the Go button. 

The details for each menu are described as follows; 



--SERVICE MENU- 
SERVICE INFO 



PAGE COUNT 


Number of printini 


IMAGECOUNTERS 




C = 


The number of pr 


M = 


The number of pr 


Y = 


The number of pr 


K = 


The number of pr 


TOTAL = 


The number of pr 


JAM COUNT 


Paper jam freque 



inting pages with using cyan, 
inting pages with using magenta, 
inting pages with using yellow, 
inting pages with using black, 
inting pages with using all colors. 



REPLACE COUNT 



C TONER 
M TONER 
Y TONER 
K TONER 
FC Roller 
OPC Belt 
FUSER UNIT 
120K Kit 
PF KIT1 
PF KIT2 

Waste Toner Box 
Oil Bottle 



Number of replacement 

(Counts the frequency after clearing the counter when 100 
pages or more are printed.) 

The number of the cyan toner cartridge replacement. 

The number of the magenta toner cartridge replacement. 

The number of the yellow toner cartridge replacement. 

The number of the black toner cartridge replacement. 

The number of the fuser cleaner replacement. 

The number of the OPC belt cartridge replacement. 

The number of the fusing unit replacement. 

The number of the 120K kit replacement. 

The number of the paper feeding kit 1 replacement. 

The number of the paper feeding kit 2 replacement. 

The number of the waste toner box replacement. 

The number of the oil bottle replacement. 



COVERAGE 

C = 
M = 
Y = 
K = 



Average coverage (Based on that the letter size printed all 
black is 100%) 

Average coverage of cyan. 

Average coverage of magenta. 

Average coverage of yellow. 

Average coverage of black. 



A-32 



PRINT PAGES 

A4 PAGE 
LETTER PAGE 
LEGAL PAGE 
B5 PAGE 
JISB5 PAGE 
EXEC PAGE 
A3 PAGE 
COM-10PAGE 
DL PAGE 



Number of printing pages depending on the paper size. 
(Counted up to 100K.) 



The number of pri 
The number of pri 
The number of pri 
The number of pri 
The number of pri 
The number of pri 
The number of pri 
The number of pri 
The number of pri 



nting pages of the A4 size, 
nting pages of the letter size 
nting pages of the legal size 
nting pages of the ISO B5 size 
nting pages of the JIS B5 size 
nting pages of the EXECUTIVE size 
nting pages of the A3 size 
nting pages of the COM10 size, 
nting pages of the DL size. 



* The number of replacement is counted after clearing the counter when 100 
pages or more are printed. 



--SERVICE MENU-- 
ERROR HISTORY 



1 : ####### 
2 : ####### 
3 : ####### 



The 1 latest errors in order of the newest to the oldest. 



10 :####### 



--SERVICE MENU-- 
MODIFY COUNT 



For modifying of the number of pages and remaining life, the digit to be modified 
is raised whenever pressing the Set button. The pages and remaining life are 
fixed on when pressing the Set button on the highest digit. 



JAM COUNT 
REPLACE COUNT 

C TONER 

M TONER 

Y TONER 

K TONER 

FC Roller 

OPC Belt 

FUSER UNIT 

120K Kit 

PF KIT1 

PF KIT2 

Waste Toner Box 

Oil Bottle 



Paper jam frequency 

The number of the cyan toner cartridge replacement. 
The number of the magenta toner cartridge replacement. 
The number of the yellow toner cartridge replacement. 
The number of the black toner cartridge replacement. 
The number of the fuser cleaner replacement. 
The number of the OPC belt cartridge replacement. 
The number of the fusing unit replacement. 
The number of the 120K kit replacement. 
The number of the paper feeding kit 1 replacement. 
The number of the paper feeding kit 2 replacement. 
The number of the waste toner box replacement. 
The number of the oil bottle replacement. 



A-33 



--SERVICE MENU- 
RESET COUNT 



COVER AGE Clears the average coverage of the cyan, magenta, 

yellow and black toner. 



Caution 1 

The counter is limited for the following items; 

COVERAGE : The number of pages over 1 00K is not stored. 

PRINT PAGE : Counted up to 1 00K pages. 

ERROR HISTORY : Up to 100K errors are stored. 

Caution 2 

When modifying the life period, enter the Hitachi mode. 



A-34 



8. TO INSTALL THE PRINTER CORRECTLY 

Please read the installation steps described below carefully. 

If the printer is not installed correctly, image failures may occur or the life expectancy of 
the OPC belt cartridge may be shortened. 

1 ) Turn ON the power switch of the printer. 




2) After the printer has initialized, open the front cover 2 and then the top cover ASSY 
2 of the printer and pull up the OPC belt cartridge from the printer. 



OPC belt cartridge 




3) Measure the gap on the OPC belt cartridge shown in the figure below. If the gap is 
in the range of 5 ± 2 mm, the printer is installed correctly. 




A-35 



4) If the gap is NOT in the range of 5 ± 2 mm, check the following items; 

Note: 

If the printer is inclined at 1 ° as shown in the figures below, the printer is 
approximately 9mm out of level from one side to the other. 

i) Is the printer inclined because the table the printer is installed on is unlevel? 




Is the printer inclined because the table surface the printer is installed on is not 
strong enough? 




Is the printer inclined because it is installed across two or more tables? 




A-36 



iv) Is there anything under the printer, or is there something stuck to the printer 
base? 




5) After checking these items, initialize the printer again (opening/closing the top 

cover automatically initializes the OPC belt cartridge), and measure the gap on the 
OPC belt cartridge again. 

If the gap is in the range of 5 ± 2 mm, the printer is installed correctly. (Refer to the 
figure for Step 3).) 



6) If the gap is NOT in the range of 5 ± 2 mm, follow the steps below; 

i) When the gap is more than 7 mm; 
(the OPC belt has moved to the 
right.) 

Place something 1 cm thick such as 
a book under the right hand side of 
the printer as shown in the figure on 
the right. 

Initialize the printer again and then 
measure the gap on the OPC belt 
cartridge. If the gap is in the range of 
5 ± 2 mm, the printer is installed 
correctly. 




A-37 



When the gap is less than 3 mm; 
(the OPC belt has moved to the left.) 

Place something 1 cm thick such as 
a book under the left hand side of the 
printer as shown in the figure on the 
right. 

Initialize the printer again and then 
measure the gap on the OPC belt 
cartridge. If the gap is in the range of 
5 ± 2 mm, the printer is installed 
correctly. 




Note: 

• Place the book or other object 1 cm thick under the printer metal frame as shown in 
the figures above. Even if the Lower Tray unit is installed onto the printer, the book 
should be positioned in the same position. 

• If you have a spirit level, put it on the output tray and install the printer as level as 
possible referring to the level. 

• The surface that the printer is placed on should have its level corrected properly. 

• The temporary action with a 1 cm thick object should only be used to determine the 
correct leveling action required and should not be used as a permanent solution. 



Spirit level 




A-38